Operation Manual
Embroidery and Sewing Machine
Product Code: 882-W20/W22
Be sure to read this document before using the machine.
We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference.
INTRODUCTION
1
Thank you for purchasing this embroidery and sewing machine. Before using this machine, carefully read
the “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the correct operation of the
various functions.
In addition, after you have finished reading this manual, store it where it can quickly be accessed for
future reference.
Please read these safety instructions before attempting to use the machine.
DANGER - To reduce the risk of electric shock
1Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet immediately after using, when cleaning, when making any
user servicing adjustments mentioned in this manual, or if you are leaving the machine unattended.
WARNING - To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electric shock, or injury to
persons.
2Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet when removing covers, or when making any adjustments
mentioned in the instruction manual.
• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the plug and pull
it out of the electrical outlet. Do not pull on the cord.
• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord.
• Always unplug your machine if the power is cut.
3Electrical Hazards:
• This machine should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. Do not
connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power source you have, contact a
qualified electrician.
• This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only.
4Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, if it has been dropped
or damaged, or water is spilled on the unit. Return the machine to the nearest authorized Brother dealer for
examination, repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.
• While the machine is stored or in use if you notice anything unusual, such as an odor, heat, discoloration or
deformation, stop using the machine immediately and unplug the power cord.
• When transporting the sewing machine, be sure to carry it by its handle. Lifting the sewing machine by any other
part may damage the machine or result in the machine falling, which could cause injuries.
• When lifting the sewing machine, be careful not to make any sudden or careless movements, otherwise you may
injure your back or knees.
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
2
5Always keep your work area clear:
• Never operate the machine with any air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the sewing machine and
foot control free from the build up of lint, dust, and loose cloth.
• Do not store objects on the foot controller.
• Do not use extension cords. Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.
• Never drop or insert any object into any opening.
• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are being used or where oxygen is being administered.
• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord or
garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire or an electric shock.
• Do not place this sewing machine on an unstable surface, such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the
sewing machine may fall, resulting in injuries.
6Special care is required when sewing:
• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use bent or damaged needles.
• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special care is required around the machine needle.
• Switch the sewing machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off when making any adjustments in the needle
area.
• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as it could cause the needle to break.
• Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and follow careful instruction when free motion stitching so that
you do not deflect the needle and cause it to break.
7This machine is not a toy:
• Your close attention is necessary when the machine is used by or near children.
• The plastic bag that this sewing machine was supplied in should be kept out of the reach of children or disposed
of. Never allow children to play with the bag due to the danger of suffocation.
• Do not use outdoors.
8For a longer service life:
• When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or store the machine
near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.
• Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can damage the
case and machine, and should never be used.
• Always consult the operation manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser feet, needle, or
other parts to assure correct installation.
9For repair or adjustment:
• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by an authorized Brother dealer.
• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the back of
the operation manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please consult your
local authorized Brother dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
3
Use this machine only for its intended use as described in the manual.
Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as contained in this manual.
Use only the interface cable (USB cable) included with this machine.
Use only the mouse designed specifically for this machine.
Use only the sensor pen included with this machine.
The contents of this manual and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
For additional product information and updates, visit our website at www.brother.com
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
This machine is intended for household use.
FOR USERS IN COUNTRIES EXCEPT EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge,
unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the
appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised
to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
FOR USERS IN EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
This appliance can be used by children aged from 8 years and above and persons
with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities or lack of experience and
knowledge if they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the
appliance in a safe way and understand the hazards involved. Children shall not
play with the appliance. Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be made by
children without supervision.
FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA
AND CYPRUS ONLY
IMPORTANT
• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the mark,
rating as marked on plug.
• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.
• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, you should contact your
authorized Brother dealer to obtain the correct lead.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
4
Trademarks
IMPORTANT:
READ BEFORE DOWNLOADING, COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.
By downloading, copying, installing or using the software you agree to this license. If you do not agree
to this license, do not download, install, copy or use the software.
Intel License Agreement For Open Source Computer Vision Library
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation, all rights reserved. Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
• Redistribution’s of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
• Redistribution’s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are
disclaimed. In no event shall Intel or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,
or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use,
data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict
liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if
advised of the possibility of such damage.
All information provided related to future Intel products and plans is preliminary and subject to change at any time, without notice.
Secure Digital (SD) Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sandisk Corporation.
Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sony Corporation.
SmartMedia is a registered trademark or a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
MultiMediaCard (MMC) is a registered trademark or a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
“Adobe” and “Adobe Reader” are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective companies. However, the
explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly described within the text.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
5
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Declaration of Conformity (For U.S.A. Only)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the authorized Brother dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The included interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B digital
device.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation
200 Crossing Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
TEL : (908) 704-1700
declares that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Brother Sewing Machine
XV8500D
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
6
Laser Notices (For U.S.A. only)
Laser Safety
This sewing machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the
sewing machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This sewing machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1:2007 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine
contains 6-milliwat, 630-640nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 24-34 degree at perpendicular
divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
FDA Regulations
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured on and after August 2,
1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown on the back of the sewing machine
indicates compliance with the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
Brother Industries, Ltd.
15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561, JAPAN
This product complies with FDA performance standards for laser
products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50,
dated June 24, 2007.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
7
Laser Notices (For countries except U.S.A.)
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This sewing machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825-1:2007 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine
contains 6-milliwat, 630-640nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 24-34 degree at perpendicular
divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
CAUTION
• This sewing machine has a Class 3B Laser Diode in the Laser Unit. The Laser Unit should not be opened
under any circumstances.
• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
8
My Design Center
Draw your own shape or lines to design original
embroidery patterns. You can specify colors, line
type and fill stitch type. Try the stipple-like
embroidery pattern. It’s very easy and fun!
Line Scan / Fill Scan
You don’t need a computer to create line art
anymore. Scan your favorite drawing or illustration
or import a JPEG format data to make your original
embroidery pattern. Embroider your unforgettable
memories!
Spool Stand LED Lighting
Now, your sewing machine shows you the thread
color you are going to embroider next.
Couching Dual Feed Foot with
Dual Feed
Couching gains more popularity everyday. The
powerful dual feed foot helps you add
embellishment securely with an attractive result to
your favorite materials. Enjoy creating many types
of couching embellishment projects with this dual
feed foot.
Improved Laser Guideline
Marker
It’s easy and accurate to specify the stitch position
using the improved laser guideline marker. You
can use this function easily without any
preparation.
OUTSTANDING FEATURES
9
Improved Camera Function
Can you imagine a sewing machine with a built-in
camera? Not only viewing the close up view of the
needle position, but also you can align the
embroidery position, connect the embroidery
patterns and place the pattern position while
checking the fabric image. The camera functions
become clearer and more accurate.
Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) Videos
Your MPEG-4 (MP4) videos can be played and
saved from USB media. It’s going to be easier to
create your project watching the tutorial video on
the machine.
Original tutorial videos are installed in this
machine. When you find this icon on the
title in this manual, you can find the tutorial video
of the procedure in your machine.
10
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
Getting Ready
To learn the operation of the principal parts and the
screens
Sewing Basics
To learn how to prepare for sewing and basic sewing
operations
Chapter 1
Page 29
Chapter 2
Page 81
Utility Stitches
Pre-programmed with more than 100 frequently used
stitches
Character/Decorative
Stitches
The variety of stitches widen your creativity
Chapter 3
Page 109
Chapter 4
Page 169
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Create original decorative stitches
Basic Embroidery
Maximum 36 cm × 24 cm (approx. 14 × 9-1/2 inches) for
large embroidery designs
Chapter 5
Page 197
Chapter 6
Page 209
Advanced Embroidery
To create the variety of embroidery designs
My Design Center
Create original embroidery pattern
Chapter 7
Page 285
Chapter 8
Page 337
How to Create Bobbin
Work
To learn how to create bobbin work
Appendix
Caring for your machine and dealing with errors and
malfunctions
Chapter 9
Page 371
Chapter 10
Page 387
11
Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 explain your sewing machine’s basic operation procedures for someone who is
using the sewing machine for the first time. If you want to sew utility stitches or character/ decorative
stitches, read Chapter 1 and Chapter 2, then go on to Chapter 3 (Utility Stitches) or Chapter 4 (Character/
Decorative Stitches).
When you are ready to begin using the embroidery function after reading Chapter 1 and Chapter 2,
proceed to Chapter 6 (Basic Embroidery) and Chapter 7 (Advanced Embroidery).
In the screens appearing in the step-by-step instructions, the parts referred to in the operations are marked
with . Compare the screen in the directions with the actual screen, and carry out the operation.
If, while using the machine, you experience something you do not understand, or there is a function you
would like to know more about, refer to the index at the back of the operation manual in conjunction
with the table of contents to find the section of the manual you should refer to.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
To sew utility stitches
To sew character or
decorative stitches
To do machine
embroidery
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
CONTENTS
12
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION................................................. 1
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................ 1
Trademarks ............................................................................ 4
OUTSTANDING FEATURES ................................. 8
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE... 10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ........................... 11
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR
FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 15
Machine............................................................................... 15
Needle and Presser Foot Section .......................................... 16
Embroidery Unit................................................................... 17
Operation Buttons................................................................ 17
Using the Flat Bed Attachment ............................................. 18
Using the Accessory Case..................................................... 18
Storing Bobbin Clips............................................................. 19
Included Accessories............................................................ 20
Accessories that are Included in Some Countries or Regions
..... 22
Options................................................................................ 22
Using the Multi-purpose Screwdriver .................................. 24
Using the Spool Stand .......................................................... 24
Using the Multi-function Foot Controller
(Only for supplied models) .................................................. 26
Assembling the Controller .................................................... 26
Chapter 1 Getting Ready 29
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF................... 30
Setting Your Machine for the First Time................................ 31
LCD SCREEN ...................................................... 32
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key .................................. 33
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key .................................. 42
Using the Operation Guide Function.................................... 43
Using the Sewing Guide Function ........................................ 44
Playing a Tutorial Video ....................................................... 45
Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) Videos ............................................. 46
Using the Pattern Explanation Function ................................ 47
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE
MACHINE........................................................... 48
Using USB Media................................................................. 48
Connecting the Machine to the Computer ............................ 48
Using a USB Mouse (Sold Separately)................................... 49
USING THE SENSOR PEN .................................. 50
Convenient Sewing Features by Using the Sensor Pen ......... 50
Connecting the Sensor Pen .................................................. 50
Using the Sensor Pen Holder ............................................... 51
Using the Sensor Pen............................................................ 51
Important Information about Sensor Pen............................... 52
Calibrating the Sensor Pen ................................................... 52
LOWER THREADING......................................... 54
Winding the Bobbin ............................................................ 54
Setting the Bobbin ............................................................... 59
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread .............................................. 61
UPPER THREADING........................................... 62
Upper Threading ................................................................. 62
Using the Twin Needle Mode............................................... 65
Using the Spool Stand .......................................................... 67
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .................................... 69
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT ...................... 70
Removing the Presser Foot .................................................. 70
Attaching the Presser Foot ................................................... 70
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter .......... 71
Using the Dual Feed Foot .................................................... 72
CHANGING THE NEEDLE ................................. 75
About the Needle ................................................................. 77
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations .................................... 77
NEEDLE CALIBRATION USING THE BUILT IN
CAMERA ............................................................ 78
Chapter 2 Sewing Basics 81
SEWING............................................................. 82
Sewing a Stitch .................................................................... 82
Specifying the Multi-Function Foot Controller
(Only for supplied models) .................................................. 84
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches ............................................ 85
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching...................................... 85
Sewing Curves ..................................................................... 87
Changing Sewing Direction ................................................. 87
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics ............................................... 87
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener Tape................................. 88
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics.................................................. 89
Sewing Stretch Fabrics ......................................................... 89
STITCH SETTINGS ............................................. 90
Setting the Stitch Width ....................................................... 90
Setting the Stitch Length....................................................... 91
Setting the “L/R Shift”........................................................... 91
Setting the Thread Tension................................................... 92
USEFUL FUNCTIONS ........................................ 93
Automatic Thread Cutting.................................................... 93
Adjusting the Needle Drop Position with the Guideline Marker
...... 94
Pivoting .............................................................................. 95
Using the Knee Lifter .......................................................... 96
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure) ............................................................................. 97
Needle Position - Stitch Placement ...................................... 98
Checking the Needle Location in the Screen ....................... 98
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING
STITCH ............................................................ 100
Sensor Function Area......................................................... 100
Specifying the Guideline Marker Position
With the Sensor Pen ......................................................... 100
Specifying the Needle Drop Position With the Sensor Pen
..... 102
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Stitching Width
and Stitch Position ............................................................ 103
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Sewing End Point ...... 105
Chapter 3 Utility Stitches 109
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES ....................... 110
Selecting a Stitch ............................................................... 113
Saving Your Stitch Settings................................................. 115
SEWING THE STITCHES .................................. 116
Straight Stitches ................................................................. 116
Dart Seam.......................................................................... 121
Gathering .......................................................................... 121
Flat Fell Seam .................................................................... 122
Pintuck .............................................................................. 123
Zigzag Stitches .................................................................. 124
Elastic Zigzag Stitches........................................................ 125
Overcasting ....................................................................... 126
Quilting ............................................................................. 129
Blind Hem Stitches ............................................................ 138
Appliqué............................................................................ 141
Shelltuck Stitches............................................................... 142
Scallop Stitches.................................................................. 142
Crazy Quilting................................................................... 143
Smocking Stitches.............................................................. 143
Fagoting............................................................................. 144
Tape or Elastic Attaching ................................................... 145
Heirloom........................................................................... 146
Zigzag Couching .............................................................. 147
One-step Buttonholes ........................................................ 149
Four-step Buttonholes ........................................................ 153
Bar Tacks........................................................................... 155
Button Sewing ................................................................... 156
Eyelet................................................................................. 157
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
.... 158
Zipper Insertion ................................................................. 159
CONTENTS
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Edge Sewing ..................................................................... 162
Chapter 4
Character/Decorative Stitches
169
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS ....................... 170
Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch Patterns/
Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns..................... 172
Alphabet Characters/Japanese characters ........................... 172
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS............................ 175
Sewing Attractive Finishes.................................................. 175
Basic Sewing...................................................................... 175
Making Adjustments .......................................................... 176
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS ........................... 178
Changing the Size .............................................................. 180
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
.... 180
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image ........................................ 180
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ................................... 180
Sewing a Pattern Continuously........................................... 180
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ... 181
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern ........................... 181
Checking the Image ........................................................... 182
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS .................... 183
Before Combining.............................................................. 183
Combining Various Stitch Patterns ..................................... 183
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns ........................ 184
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns ........... 185
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length .................... 186
Making Step Stitch Patterns
(for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)................................... 186
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................. 189
Stitch Data Precautions ...................................................... 189
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ................ 190
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media .................................. 190
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer ............................... 191
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory....... 192
Recalling from USB Media................................................. 193
Recalling from the Computer ............................................. 194
Chapter 5 MY CUSTOM STITCH 197
DESIGNING A STITCH .................................... 198
ENTERING STITCH DATA................................ 200
Editing Stitch Stored in the Machine................................... 204
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES .............. 206
Storing Custom Stitches in Your List ................................... 206
Retrieving Stored Stitches................................................... 206
Chapter 6 Basic Embroidery 209
BEFORE EMBROIDERING ................................ 210
Embroidery Step by Step .................................................... 210
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED pointer ........... 211
Attaching the Embroidery Unit .......................................... 211
SELECTING PATTERNS..................................... 214
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Decorative Alphabet Patterns/
Utility Embroidery Patterns/Bobbin Work Patterns.............. 216
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns................................ 217
Selecting Frame Patterns .................................................... 219
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards .......................... 219
Recalling from USB Media................................................. 221
Recalling from the Computer ............................................. 222
EDITING PATTERNS ........................................ 224
Previewing the Pattern ....................................................... 226
Moving the Pattern............................................................. 226
Rotating the Pattern............................................................ 227
Changing the Size of the Pattern ........................................ 228
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ................................... 229
Changing Font Type........................................................... 230
Editing Letters (Size/Font Type)........................................... 230
Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only) .................................................................... 231
Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns .......... 232
Changing the Configuration of Alphabet Character Patterns
.... 233
Deleting the Pattern............................................................ 233
Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified....................... 234
Changing Alphabet Character Spacing ............................... 235
Separating Combined Character Patterns............................ 235
Changing the Thread Color ................................................ 236
Creating a Custom Thread Table ........................................ 237
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table ............... 240
Find New Color Schemes With
the Color Shuffling Function............................................... 241
Designing Repeated Patterns .............................................. 243
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly.................................. 247
Duplicating a Pattern.......................................................... 249
After Editing ....................................................................... 249
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN............ 250
COMBINING PATTERNS................................. 252
Editing Combined Patterns ................................................. 252
Sewing Combined Patterns................................................. 255
PREPARING THE FABRIC ................................ 256
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric .......... 256
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame .................... 257
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges ....................... 259
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME ....... 261
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ....... 263
Checking the Needle Drop Point With the Embroidery Foot
“W+” with LED Pointer ...................................................... 263
Aligning the Embroidering Position
Using the Built-In Camera ................................................. 264
Using the Built-In Camera to Align
the Embroidering Position ................................................. 266
Specifying the Embroidering Position With the Sensor Pen
..... 268
Checking the Pattern Position............................................. 271
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN....................... 273
Embroidering Attractive Finishes ........................................ 273
Embroidering Patterns ........................................................ 274
Spool Stand LED................................................................. 276
Using Appliqués................................................................. 276
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY
PROCESS........................................................... 280
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ....................................... 280
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing.................................... 281
Restarting from the Beginning............................................. 282
Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power ............ 282
Chapter 7 Advanced Embroidery 285
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ....... 286
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Using a Single Color :
Monochrome) .................................................................... 286
Display the Fabric While Aligning
the Embroidering Position ................................................. 286
Basting Embroidery ............................................................ 290
Creating an Appliqué Piece ................................................ 291
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY
PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
.................. 296
Selecting a Pattern.............................................................. 297
Outputting the Background Image and Positioning Image
.... 297
Printing the Background and Embroidery Position Sheet..... 299
Sewing Embroidery Patterns ............................................... 300
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS......... 301
Adjusting Thread Tension................................................... 301
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case
(with No Color on the Screw) ............................................. 303
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
(End Color Trim)................................................................. 304
Using the Thread Trimming Function (Jump Stitch Trim) .... 304
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed......................................... 305
Changing the Thread Color Display.................................... 305
Changing the Embroidery Frame Display............................ 306
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle ................................... 307
Embroidering Linked Characters......................................... 308
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ................. 311
Embroidery Data Precautions ............................................. 311
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ....... 313
CONTENTS
14
Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media.......................... 313
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer ...................... 314
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory................. 315
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS......................... 317
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1).................. 317
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2).................. 318
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns ....................................... 319
USING THE CAMERA TO
CONNECT PATTERNS...................................... 321
Connecting Three Patterns.................................................. 321
Changing the Position of a Sticker ...................................... 327
CONNECTING ROTATED PATTERNS.............. 330
Connecting Patterns to be Joined Along an Edge ................ 332
RESUME FEATURE............................................ 335
Chapter 8 My Design Center 337
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER .......................... 338
Basics: Creating a Pattern ................................................... 338
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN ......................... 340
Before Creating Designs ..................................................... 341
Drawing Lines .................................................................... 342
Drawing Regions................................................................ 343
Using the stamp key........................................................... 344
Using the erase key ............................................................ 345
Using the select key ........................................................... 346
After Editing the Design...................................................... 346
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN .............................. 347
EMBROIDERY IMAGE PREVIEW SCREEN ........ 349
MY DESIGN CENTER WITH SCAN .................. 350
Using the Scanning Frame.................................................. 350
Scanning to Trace Background Image................................. 351
LINE SCAN ...................................................... 354
Using the Scanning Frame to Create a Pattern
with Line Scan.................................................................... 354
ILLUSTRATION SCAN ..................................... 357
Using the Scanning Frame to Create a Pattern
with Illustration Scan.......................................................... 357
STIPPLING........................................................ 360
Basic Stippling with My Design Center............................... 360
Scanning Drawing to Create Stippling Pattern .................... 363
Scanning Fabric and Stippling ............................................ 367
Chapter 9 How to Create Bobbin Work 371
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK .................................. 372
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK ................... 373
Required Materials ............................................................. 373
Upper Threading ................................................................ 374
Preparing the Bobbin Thread ............................................. 374
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING) ........... 378
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing...................................... 378
Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing...................................... 380
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
..... 381
Selecting the Pattern........................................................... 381
Start Embroidering.............................................................. 382
ADJUSTING BOBBIN WORK
THREAD TENSION........................................... 385
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 386
Chapter 10 Appendix 387
CARE AND MAINTENANCE............................. 388
Restrictions on oiling.......................................................... 388
Precautions on storing the machine.................................... 388
Cleaning the LCD Screen ................................................... 388
Cleaning the Machine Casing............................................. 388
Cleaning the Race ............................................................ 388
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area...................... 390
About the Maintenance Message........................................ 390
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN ................................ 391
Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display ................... 391
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning .......................................... 391
TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 392
Frequent Troubleshooting Topics....................................... 392
Upper Thread is Too Tight ................................................. 392
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric........................... 393
Incorrect Thread Tension ................................................... 395
Fabric is Caught in the Machine and Cannot be Removed
...... 396
List of Symptoms................................................................ 399
ERROR MESSAGES........................................... 405
SPECIFICATIONS............................................. 411
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
..... 412
Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media............................... 412
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ................................. 413
STITCH SETTING CHART ................................ 414
INDEX.............................................................. 423
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
15
The names of the various parts of the sewing machine and their functions are described below. Before
using the sewing machine, carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine parts.
Machine
■ Front View
a Top cover
Open the top cover when threading the machine or winding the
bobbin.
b Pre-tension disk
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk when winding the
bobbin thread. (page 54)
c Thread guide for bobbin winding
Pass the thread through this thread guide when winding the
bobbin thread. (page 54)
d Spool pin
Place a spool of thread on the spool pin. (page 62)
e Spool cap
Use the spool cap to hold the spool of thread in place. (page
62)
f Supplemental spool pin
Use this spool pin to wind the bobbin thread, or to sew with the
twin needle. (page 54, 65)
g Bobbin winder
Use the bobbin winder when winding the bobbin. (page 54)
h LCD (liquid crystal display)
Settings for the selected stitch and error messages appear in
the LCD. (page 32)
i Speaker
j Knee lifter
Use the knee lifter to raise and lower the presser foot. (page 96)
k Knee lifter slot
Insert the knee lifter into the slot. (page 96)
l Operation buttons (7 buttons) and sewing speed
controller
Use these buttons and the slide to operate the sewing
machine. (page 17)
m Flat bed attachment with accessory compartment
Store presser feet and bobbins in the accessory compartment
of the flat bed attachment. When sewing cylindrical pieces,
remove the flat bed attachment. (page 18)
n Thread cutter
Pass the threads through the thread cutter to cut them. (page
64)
o Thread guide plate
Pass the thread around the thread guide plate when threading
upper thread. (page 62)
■ Right-side/Rear View
a Connector for the presser foot
Connect the dual feed foot or embroidery foot with LED
pointer. (page 72, 211)
b Handle
Carry the sewing machine by its handle when transporting the
machine.
c Presser foot lever
Raise and lower the presser foot lever to raise and lower the
presser foot. (page 70)
d Air vent
The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate.
Do not cover the air vent while the sewing machine is being
used.
e Main power switch
Use the main power switch to turn the sewing machine ON and
OFF. (page 30)
f Multi-function foot controller
Various sewing machine operations can be programmed into
the multi-function foot controller. For some countries and
areas, normal foot controller is included with the machine.
g Power cord receptacle
Insert the power cord into the machine receptacle. (page 30)
h Sensor pen holder connector
Connect the included sensor pen holder. (page 51)
i Sensor pen jack
Connect the sensor pen. (page 50)
j Foot controller jack
Insert the foot controller plug into its jack on the machine.
(page 83)
k Headphones or external speaker jack
Connect the headphone.
l USB port for computer
In order to import/export patterns between a computer and the
machine, plug the USB cable into the USB port. (page 48, 189,
191, 194, 222, 298, 314, 413)
m USB port for mouse (page 48)
n USB port
In order to send patterns from/to USB media, plug the USB
media directly into the USB port. (page 36, 48,189,190, 193,
221, 239, 288, 298, 313, 412)
o Handwheel
Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise
and lower the needle. The wheel should be turned toward the
front of the machine.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
16
Needle and Presser Foot Section
a Buttonhole lever
The buttonhole lever is used with the one-step buttonhole foot
to create buttonholes. (page 149)
b Presser foot holder screw
Use the presser foot holder screw to hold the presser foot in
place. (page 71)
c Presser foot holder
The presser foot is attached to the presser foot holder. (page
70)
d Presser foot
The presser foot consistently applies pressure to the fabric as
sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the
selected stitch. (page 70)
e Feed dogs
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction.
f Bobbin cover
Open the bobbin cover to set the bobbin. (page 59, 125)
g Needle plate cover
Remove the needle plate cover to clean the race. (page 119,
274)
h Needle plate
The needle plate is marked with guides to help sew straight
seams. (page 118)
i Needle bar thread guide
Pass the upper thread through the needle bar thread guide.
(page 62)
j Needle clamp screw
Use the needle clamp screw to hold the needle in place. (page
71)
Measurements on the needle plate, bobbin cover
(with mark) and needle plate cover
The measurements on the bobbin cover are
references for patterns with a middle (center)
needle position. The measurements on the needle
plate and the needle plate cover are references for
stitches with a left needle position.
a For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
b For stitches with a left needle position
c Left needle position on the needle plate <inch>
d Left needle position on the needle plate <cm>
e Middle (center) needle position on the bobbin cover
(with mark) <inch>
f Left needle position on the needle plate cover
<inch>
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
17
Embroidery Unit
a Carriage
The carriage moves the embroidery frame automatically when
embroidering. (page 211)
b Release lever (located under the embroidery unit)
Press the release lever to remove the embroidery unit. (page
212)
c Embroidery frame holder
Insert the embroidery frame into the embroidery frame holder
to hold the frame in place. (page 261)
d Frame-securing lever
Press the frame-securing lever down to secure the embroidery
frame. (page 261)
e Embroidery unit connection
Insert the embroidery unit connection into the connection port
when attaching the embroidery unit. (page 211)
Operation Buttons
a “Start/Stop” button
Press this button and the machine will sew a few stitches at a
slow speed and then begin sewing at the speed set by the
sewing speed controller. Press the button again to stop the
machine. Hold the button in to sew at the machine’s slowest
speed. The button changes color according to the machine’s
operation mode.
b “Reverse Stitch” button
For straight, zigzag, and elastic zigzag stitch patterns that take
reverse stitches, the machine will sew reverse stitches at low
speed only while holding down the “Reverse Stitch” button.
The stitches are sewn in the opposite position.
For other stitches, use this button to sew reinforcement
stitches at the beginning and end of sewing. Press and hold
this button, and the machine sews 3 stitches in the same spot
and stops automatically. (page 85)
c “Reinforcement Stitch” button
Use this button to sew a single stitch repeatedly and tie-off.
For character/decorative stitches, press this button to end with
a full stitch instead of at a mid-point. The LED light beside this
button lights up while the machine is sewing a full motif, and
automatically turns off when the sewing is stopped. (page 85)
d “Needle Position” button
Use this button when changing sewing direction or for detailed
sewing in small areas. Press this button to raise or lower the
needle position. With this button, you can lower and raise the
needle to sew a single stitch.
e “Thread Cutter” button
Press this button after sewing to automatically trim the excess
thread.
f “Presser Foot Lifter” button
Press this button to lower the presser foot and apply pressure
to the fabric. Press this button again to raise the presser foot.
g Sewing Speed controller
Use this controller to adjust the sewing speed. Move the slide
to the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the slide to the right
to sew at higher speeds. Beginners should sew at a slow
speed.
h “Automatic Threading” button
Use this button to automatically thread the needle.
CAUTION
• Before inserting or removing the embroidery
unit, turn the main power to off.
• After the embroidery frame is set in the frame
holder, be sure the frame-securing lever is
correctly lowered.
Green: The machine is ready to sew or is sewing.
Red: The machine cannot sew.
CAUTION
• Do not press the thread cutter button after the
threads have been cut. The needle may break
and threads may become tangled, or damage
to the machine may occur.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
18
Using the Flat Bed Attachment
Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the
accessory compartment.
Using the Accessory Case
■ Opening the Accessory Case
Fully slide the bar on each side of the accessory case
to the unlocked position, and then lift off the lid to
open the case.
The case can only be opened or locked correctly if
both bars are slid in the same direction.
a Bars
■ Closing the Accessory Case
a
Fully slide the bar on each side of the
accessory case lid to the unlocked position.
b
Place the lid on top of the case so that the
notches in the lid align with the tabs on the
case, and then slide the bar on each side
back to the locked position.
a Bars
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
19
■ Using the Accessory Trays
Two presser foot storage trays are stored in the
included accessory case. One is for presser feet for
utility sewing, and the other is for presser feet for
embroidery and machine quilting.
a For presser feet for utility sewing
b For presser feet for embroidery and machine
quilting
For your convenience, a presser foot storage tray
can be stored in the accessory compartment of the
flat bed attachment.
a Additional storage space of the flat bed
attachment
b Presser foot storage space of the flat bed
attachment
c Presser foot storage trays
Storing Bobbin Clips
Bobbin clips can be stored inside of the accessory
case cover.
Memo
• Placing bobbin clips on bobbins helps
prevent the thread from unwinding from the
bobbin. In addition, snapping bobbin clips
together allows the bobbins to be
conveniently stored and prevents them from
rolling around if they are dropped.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
20
Included Accessories
12345678
9 10111213141516
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
75/11 2 needles
90/14 2 needles
90/14 2 needles:
Ball point needle (gold colored)
2.0/11 needle 75/11
2 needles
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
32 33 34 35 36 37 38
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
47 48 49 50 51 52
53 54 55 56 57 58
J
N
G
I
A
R
M
C
C
E
E
O
O
W+
V
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
21
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
67 68
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
1
Zigzag foot “J” (on machine)
XC3022-001
2
Monogramming foot “N”
X53840-351
3
Overcasting foot “G”
XC3098-051
4
Zipper foot “I”
X59370-051
5
Buttonhole foot “A”
X57789-351
6
Blind stitch foot “R”
X56409-051
7
Button fitting foot “M”
130489-001
8
Dual feed foot
SA196
(U.S.A.)
SA196C
(Canada)
DF1: XF4166-001
(EU area)
DF1AP: XF6843-001
(Asia/Oceania)
XF3165-001
(other area)
9
Straight stitch foot
SA167 F042N:
XC1973-052
10
Free motion quilting foot “C”
XF4737-001
11
Free motion echo quilting
foot “E”
XE0766-001
12
Free motion open toe
quilting foot “O”
SA187 F061:
XE1097-001
13
Embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer
SA197
(U.S.A.)
SA197C
(Canada)
FLED1: XF4168-001
(EU area)
FLED1AP: XF6845-001
(Asia/Oceania)
XF3124-001
(other area)
14
Vertical stitch alignment foot
“V”
SA189 F063: XE5224-001
15
1/4 quilting foot with guide SA185 F057:XC7416-252
16
Couching dual feed foot XF9332-001
17
Top-left yarn guide
XG0786-001
18
Yarn th reade r
XF7187-001
19
Adapter
SA131 F010N:XF3613-001
20
Screw (small)
XA4813-051
21
Needle set *1
XE4962-001
22
Twin needle *2
XE4963-001
23
Ball point needle set *3
XD0705-151
24
Bobbin × 10
(One is on machine.)
SA156 SFB: XA5539-151
25
Seam ripper
XF4967-001
26
Scissors
XC1807-121
27
Cleaning brush
X59476-051
28
Eyelet punch
XZ5051-001
29
Screwdriver (small)
X55468-051
30
Screwdriver (large)
XC4237-021
31
Multi-purpose screwdriver
SAMDRIVER1
(U.S.A)
SAMDRIVER1C
(Canada)
MDRIVER1
(EU area)
MDRIVER1AP
(other area)
32
Spool cap (small)
130013-154
33
Spool cap (medium) × 2
(One is on machine.)
X55260-153
34
Spool cap (large)
130012-054
35
Thread spool insert
(mini king thread spool)
XA5752-121
36
Spool stand
SA562
(U.S.A.)
SA562C
(Canada)
TS6: XF4180-001
See page 24
37
Bobbin clip × 10
XE3060-001
38
Spool felt (on machine)
X57045-051
39
Spool net × 2
XA5523-050
40
Embroidery needle plate
cover
XE5131-001
41
Touch pen (stylus)
XA9940-051
42
Knee lifter
SA599 KL1: XE5902-001
43
USB cable
XD0745-051
44
Alternate bobbin case
(no color on the screw)
XC8167-551
45
Bobbin case
(gray, for bobbin work)
XE8298-001
46
Straight stitch needle plate
XF3076-001
47
Cord guide bobbin cover
(with single hole)
XE8991-101
48
Bobbin cover (with mark)
XF0750-101
49
Bobbin cover (on machine)
XE8992-101
50
Embroidery frame set
(medium) H 10 cm × W 10
cm (H 4 inches × W 4
inches)
SA438 EF74: XC8480-152
51
Embroidery frame set (large)
H 18 cm × W 13 cm
(H 7 inches × W 5 inches)
SA439 EF75: XC8481-152
52
Embroidery frame set
(extra large)
H 30 cm × W 20 cm
(H 12 inches × W 8 inches)
SA447 EF92: XE5071-001
53
Embroidery frame set (super
large) H 36 cm × W 24 cm (H
14 inches × W 9-1/2 inches)
XF9309-001
54
Scanning frame
XF9321-001
55
Magnet × 6
XF9325-001
56
Embroidery bobbin thread
SA-EBT EBT-CEN:
X81164-001
57
Embroidery positioning
sticker sheets × 4
SAEPS2
(U.S.A.)
SAEPS2C
(Canada)
EPS2: XF0763-001
58
White calibration stickers
(solid)
XE7916-001
59
Edge sewing sheet × 6
SAESS1
(U.S.A.)
SAESS1C
(Canada)
ESS1: XE5094-001
60
Stabilizer material
SA519 BM3: XE0806-001
61
Grid sheet set
SA507 GS3: X81277-151
62
Chalk pencil
XE8568-001
63
Sensor pen
XF4992-001 (EU area)
XF3116-001 (other area)
64
Pen holder XF2973-001
65
LCD cleaning cloth
XE4913-001
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
22
*1 75/11 2 needles
90/14 2 needles
90/14 2 needles: Ball point needle (gold colored)
*2 2.0/11 needle
*3 75/11 2 needles:
Ball point needle for embroidery
HAX130EBBR
Accessories that are Included in
Some Countries or Regions
If these accessories are not included with your
machine, these are available as optional
accessories.
Options
The following are available as optional accessories
to be purchased separately from your authorized
Brother dealer.
66
Accessory case
XG0629-001 (EU area)
XF9159-001 (other area)
67
Operation manual
This manual
68
Quick reference guide
XF9337-001
123
4
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
1 Foot controller XD0501-151 (EU area)
XC8816-051 (other area)
2 Multi-function foot controller SAMFFC
(U.S.A.)
SAMFFCC
(Canada)
MFFC1:
XF4159-001
MFFC10C:
XF4471-001
(Australia)
See page 26
3 Dust Cover XG1096-001
4 Bobbin center pin and
instruction sheet
XF5048-001
Memo
• (For U.S.A. only)
Foot controller: Model U
This foot controller can be used on the
machine with product code 882-W20/W22.
The product code is mentioned on the
machine rating plate.
• Always use accessories recommended for
this machine.
• The screw for the presser foot holder is
available through your authorized Brother
dealer (Part code XA4813-051).
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
123
456
789
10 11 12
13 14 15
16 17 18
19 20
W
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
23
21 22 23
24 25
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
1 Embroidery frame set (small)
H 2 cm × W 6 cm
(H 1 inch × W 2-1/2 inches)
SA437 EF73:
XC8479-152
2 Square embroidery frame
H 15 cm × W 15 cm
(H 6 inches × W 6 inches)
SA448
(U.S.A.)
SA448C
(Canada)
SEF150:
XF4163-001
3 Embroidery frame set (quilt)
H 20 cm × W 20 cm
(H 8 inches × W 8 inches)
SA446 EF91:
XE5068-101
4 Embroidery frame set (extra
large) H 26 cm × W 16 cm
(H 10-1/4 inches × W 6-1/4
inches)
SA441 EF81:
XC9763-151
5 Border embroidery frame H
30 cm × W 10 cm
(H 12 inches × W 4 inches)
SABF6200D1
(U.S.A.)
SABF6200D1
C (Canada)
BF3:
XF4170-001
6 Border embroidery frame set
H 18 cm × W 10 cm
(H 7 inches × W 4 inches)
SABF6000D BF2:
XE5059-001
7 Embroidery bobbin thread
(white)
SAEBT EBT-CEN:
X81164-001
Embroidery bobbin thread
(black)
SAEBT999 EBT-CEBN:
XC5520-001
8 10 spool stand SA561
(U.S.A.)
SA561C
(Canada)
TS5:
XF4175-001
9 Wide table SAWT6200D
(U.S.A.)
SAWT6200D
C (Canada)
WT10:
XF4184-001
10 Embroidery card reader SAECRI
11 Stabilizer material SA519 BM3:
XE0806-001
Water soluble stabilizer SA520 BM5:
XE0615-001
12 Seam guide SA538 SG1:
XC8483-052
13 Walking foot SA140 F033N:
XC2214-052
14 Side cutter foot SA177 F054:
XC3879-152
15 Quilting guide SA132 F016N:
XC2215-002
16 Embroidery foot “W” XF4012-001
17 Free-motion quilting foot SA129 F005N:
XC1948-052
18 Couching foot SA199V
(U.S.A)
SA199VC
(Canada)
F073:
XF8185-001
(EU area)
F073AP:
XF8188-001
(other area)
19 Circular attachment SACIRC1 CIRC1:
XE3527-001
20 Stitch in the ditch foot SA191 F065:
XF2339-001
21 Vertical spool pin XC8619-052
22 Embroidery positioning
sticker sheets × 8
SAEPS2 EPS2:
XF0763-001
23 Edge sewing sheet × 5 SAESS1 ESS1:
XE5094-001
24 Free motion guide grip SAFMGRIP FMG2:
XF6266-001
(EU area)
FMG2AP:
XF6267-001
(other area)
25 USB mouse XE5334-101
Memo
• All specifications are correct at the time of
printing. Please be aware that some
specifications may change without notice.
Note
• Visit your nearest authorized Brother dealer
for a complete listing of optional
accessories for your machine.
No. Part Name
Part Code
Americas Others
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
24
Using the Multi-purpose
Screwdriver
Since the screwdriver can be changed to three
different positions, it can be extremely useful for
the various machine preparations.
■ Position “1”
You can install/remove the presser foot holder,
needle clamp screw.
■ Position “2”
You can install/remove the needle plate.
■ Position “3”
The multi-purpose screwdriver can be positioned
over the screw on the embroidery frame to tighten
the screw after hooping the fabric or when removing
the fabric.
Using the Spool Stand
The included spool stand is useful when using
thread spools with a large diameter (cross-wound
thread). The spool stand can hold two spools of
thread.
Note
• When rotating the multi-purpose
screwdriver, do not forcefully rotate it in the
direction that it does not rotate; otherwise, it
may break.
123
456
789
No. Part Name Part Code
1 Telescopic thread guide XE0776-001
2 Spool support XE4637-001
3 Spool pin × 2 XA6313-051
4 Screw and washer XC7568-051
5 Spool cap (XL) × 2 XE0779-001
6 Spool holder × 2 XA0679-050
7 Spool cap base × 2 XE0780-001
8 Spool felt × 2 XC7134-051
9 Ring × 4 026030-136
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
25
■ How to assemble the spool stand
a
Fully extend the telescopic thread guide
shaft, and then rotate the shaft until the two
internal stoppers click into place.
b
Insert the telescopic thread guide into the
round hole at the center of the spool
support, and then use a screwdriver to
securely tighten the screw (a) from the
reverse side.
a Screw
c
Firmly insert the two spool pins into the two
holes in the spool support.
d
Open the upper cover of the machine, and
then pull the upper cover up to remove it
from the machine.
e
Insert the spool stand onto the notches of
the machine.
CAUTION
• Do not lift the handle of the machine while the
spool stand is installed.
• Do not push or pull the telescopic thread
guide or spool pins with extreme force,
otherwise damage may result.
• Do not place any object other than spools of
thread on the spool support.
• Do not try to wind thread on the bobbin while
sewing using the spool stand.
Note
• Make sure that the stoppers on the
telescopic thread guide shaft are firmly in
place and that the thread guide openings
are directly above the two holes for spool
pins in the spool support. In addition, check
that the shaft is securely tightened in the
spool support.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
26
■ How to remove
a
Pull the spool stand up to remove it from
the machine.
b
Attach the upper cover to the machine.
Using the Multi-function Foot
Controller (Only for supplied
models)
Refer to see “Specifying the Multi-Function Foot
Controller (Only for supplied models)” on page
84, before using this foot controller.
Assembling the Controller
a
Align the wide side of the mounting plate
with the notch in the bottom of the main
foot controller, and then secure them
together with a screw.
Feed the other side of the mounting plate into the
notch on the bottom of the side pedal, and then secure
them together with a screw.
Memo
• See page 58 about the bobbin winding
using the spool stand.
• See page 67 about the upper threading
using the spool stand.
12
34
No. Part Name Part Code
1 Main foot controller XF6708-201 (U.S.A.)
XF6710-201 (other area)
2 Side pedal XF3217-001
3 Mounting plate XF3222-001
4 Mounting screw × 2 XF3223-001
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
27
b
Insert the plug for the side pedal into the
jack at the back of the main foot controller.
c
Insert the plug for the main foot controller
into the foot controller jack on the right
side of the machine.
a Multi-function foot controller
b Foot controller jack
■ Adjusting the Pedal Positions
The pedal spacing can be adjusted depending on
the screw holes used in the mounting plate. The
pedal spacing is the widest when the pedals are
attached using the outermost screw holes
a; the
pedal spacing is the narrowest when they are
attached using the innermost screw holes
b.
Note
• The side pedal may be attached on the right
or left side of the main foot controller.
• For greater distance you always have the
option of not connecting the side pedal and
main foot controller using the mounting
plate, making sure that both pedals are
connected using the jack from the side
pedal to the main foot controller.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
28
Chapter 1
Getting Ready
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF ....................... 30
Setting Your Machine for the First Time....................................31
LCD SCREEN ........................................................... 32
■ Home Page Screen ................................................................... 32
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key ......................................33
■ Saving a Settings Screen Image to USB Media.......................... 36
■ Selecting the “Eco Mode” or “Shutoff Support Mode”............. 36
■ Changing the Pointer Shape When a USB Mouse Is Used ........ 37
■ Changing the Screen Saver Image ............................................ 37
■ Selecting the Initial Screen Display .......................................... 38
■ Choosing the Display Language................................................ 39
■
Changing the Background Colors of the Embroidery Patterns
.... 39
■ Specifying the Size of Pattern Thumbnails................................ 40
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key .......................................42
Using the Operation Guide Function ........................................43
Using the Sewing Guide Function .............................................44
Playing a Tutorial Video............................................................45
Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) Videos ..................................................46
Using the Pattern Explanation Function ....................................47
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
..... 48
Using USB Media ......................................................................48
Connecting the Machine to the Computer ................................48
Using a USB Mouse (Sold Separately) .......................................49
■ Clicking a Key .......................................................................... 49
■ Changing Pages ........................................................................ 49
USING THE SENSOR PEN ....................................... 50
Convenient Sewing Features by Using the Sensor Pen ..............50
Connecting the Sensor Pen ......................................................50
Using the Sensor Pen Holder ...................................................51
Using the Sensor Pen ................................................................51
Important Information about Sensor Pen ..................................52
Calibrating the Sensor Pen .......................................................52
LOWER THREADING.............................................. 54
Winding the Bobbin .................................................................54
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin............................................54
■ Using the Spool Pin .................................................................. 57
■ Using the Spool Stand ..............................................................58
■ Untangling Thread from Beneath the Bobbin Winder Seat....... 58
Setting the Bobbin ....................................................................59
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread...................................................61
UPPER THREADING ............................................... 62
Upper Threading ......................................................................62
Using the Twin Needle Mode ...................................................65
Using the Spool Stand ...............................................................67
■ Using the Spool Stand ..............................................................67
Using Threads that Unwind Quickly .........................................69
■ Using the Spool Net ................................................................. 69
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT........................... 70
Removing the Presser Foot .......................................................70
Attaching the Presser Foot .......................................................70
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter .............71
■ Attaching the Walking Foot...................................................... 71
Using the Dual Feed Foot .........................................................72
■ Attaching the Dual Feed Foot................................................... 72
■ Attaching/Detaching toe...........................................................73
■ Using the Dual Feed Position Lever ..........................................74
■
Adjusting the Amount of Fabric Feeding of the Dual Feed Foot
.....74
CHANGING THE NEEDLE ......................................75
About the Needle ..................................................................... 77
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations ....................................... 77
NEEDLE CALIBRATION USING
THE BUILT IN CAMERA ..........................................78
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
30
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
WARNING
• Use only regular household electricity for the power source. Using other power sources may result in fire,
electric shock, or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet and the power
cord receptacle on the machine. Otherwise, a fire or electric shock may result.
• Do not insert the plug on the power cord into an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.
• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the plug in the following circumstances:
When you are away from the machine
After using the machine
When the power fails during use
When the machine does not operate correctly due to a bad connection or a disconnection
During electrical storms
CAUTION
• Use only the power cord included with this machine.
• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug adapters with many other appliances plugged in to them. Fire or
electric shock may result.
• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric shock may result.
• When unplugging the machine, always turn the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the plug to remove
it from the outlet. Pulling on the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire or electric shock.
• Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or bundled.
Do not place heavy objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to heat. These things may damage the
cord, or cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug is damaged, take the machine to your authorized
Brother dealer for repairs before continuing use.
• Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a fire may
result.
• When leaving the machine unattended, either the main switch of the machine should be turned to OFF or
the plug must be removed from the socket-outlet.
• When servicing the machine or when removing covers, the machine must be unplugged.
•For U.S.A only
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical
shock, this plug is intended to fit in a polarized outlet only one way.
If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a qualified
electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not modify the plug in any way.
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
Getting Ready
31
1
a
Insert the power supply cord into the power
cord receptacle, then insert the plug into a
wall outlet.
a Main power switch
b Power supply cord
b
Turn the main power switch to “I” to turn
on the machine.
a OFF
b ON
c
Turn the main power switch to “O” to turn
off the machine.
Setting Your Machine for the First
Time
When you first turn on the machine, set the
language and time/date to your language and local
time/date. Follow the procedure below when the
settings screen appears automatically.
a
Press and to set your local language.
b
Press .
c
The message screen, confirming if you want
to set time/date, appears. To set the time/
date, press ; to cancel the setting,
press .
→ The screen to set time/date appears.
d
Press or to set time date.
a Press to display the time on the screen.
b Set the year (YYYY), month (MM) and date (DD).
c Select whether 24h or 12h setting to display.
d Set the current time.
e
Press to start using your machine.
→ The clock starts from 0 second of the time you set.
Memo
• When the machine is turned on, the needle
and the feed dogs will make sound when
they move; this is not a malfunction.
Memo
• If the machine is turned off in the middle of
sewing in the “Sewing” function, the
operation will not be continued after turning
the power on again.
Note
• The time/date you set may be cleared, if
you don't turn on the machine for an
extended period of time.
• Time setting is also available by pressing
clock button/time on the bottom of the LCD
screen.
b
a
c
d
LCD SCREEN
32
When the machine is turned on, the opening
movie is played. Touch anywhere on the screen
for the home page screen to be displayed. Touch
the LCD screen or a key with your finger or the
included touch pen to select a machine function.
■ Home Page Screen
LCD SCREEN
Note
• When the straight stitch needle plate is on
the machine, the needle will automatically
move to the middle position.
Memo
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the
included touch pen. Do not use a sharp
pencil, screwdriver, or other hard or sharp
object. It is not necessary to press hard on
the screen. Pressing too hard or using a
sharp object may damage the screen.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Sewing key Press this key to sew utility
stitches or character/
decorative stitch patterns.
110, 170
b Embroidery
key
Attach the embroidery unit
and press this key to
embroider patterns.
210
c My Design
Center
Press this key to start
creating your custom
design embroidery
patterns.
338
d Camera
view key
Press this key to check the
needle location as it is
shown on the screen
through the built-in
camera.
98, 162
b
c
a
j
d e f g h i
e Machine
setting
screen key
Press this key to change
the needle stop position,
adjust the pattern or
screen, and change other
machine settings.
33
f Sewing
machine
help key
Press this key to see
explanations on how to
use the machine. You can
see the tutorial videos and
also the MP4 movie files
that you have.
42
g Presser
foot/
Needle
exchange
key
Press this key before
changing the needle, the
presser foot, etc. This key
locks all key and button
functions to prevent
operation of the machine.
59, 70
h Screen
lock key
Press this key to lock the
screen. When the screen
is locked, can still sew, but
cannot change any of the
screen functions. Press
this key again to unlock
the settings.
170
i Home
page
screen key
Press this key anytime it is
displayed to return to the
home page screen and
select a different category
- “Sewing”, “Embroidery”
or “My Design Center”.
–
j Time/Date
key
Press this key to set the
clock to your local time.
31
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
33
1
Using the Machine Setting Mode Key
Press to change the default machine settings (needle stop position, embroidery speed, opening
display, etc.). To display the different settings screens, press for “Sewing settings”, for
“General settings” or for “Embroidery settings”.
Sewing settings
a Select whether to use the sewing speed controller to determine the zigzag width (see page 133).
b Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch patterns (see page 176).
c Adjust the presser foot height. Select the height of the presser foot when the presser foot is raised.
d Adjust the presser foot pressure. The higher the number, the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at “3” for
normal sewing.
e Adjust the amount of fabric feeding of the dual feed foot (see page 74).
f Select whether “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight stitch (Middle)” is the utility stitch that is automatically
selected when the machine is turned on.
g Select whether “Utility Stitch” or “Quilt Stitch” displayed first on the stitch selection screen when the “Sewing” is
selected.
h You can activate this setting after connecting the multi-function foot controller. (These settings are not operable
unless the multi-function foot controller is attached to the machine.) (see page 84)
i Change the height of the presser foot when sewing is stopped when the pivot setting is selected (see page 95).
Adjust the presser foot to one of the three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm and 7.5 mm).
j Change the height of the presser foot when the machine is set to free motion sewing mode (see page 133).
k When set to “ON”, the thickness of the fabric is automatically detected by an internal sensor while sewing. This
enables the fabric to be fed smoothly (see pages 88 and 97).
l When set to “ON”, reinforcement stitches are sewn at the beginning and/or end of sewing for a reinforcement stitch
pattern, even when the “Reverse Stitch” button is pressed (see page 85).
m Adjust the guideline marker position and brightness (see page 100).
n Press to save a settings screen image to USB media (see page 36).
o Press to reset settings. Some settings do not reset.
Memo
• Press or to display a different settings screen.
a
b
c
d
e
f
h
g
o
k
l
m
i
j
n
LCD SCREEN
34
General settings
a Select the needle stop position (the needle position when the machine is not operating) to be up or down. Select
the down position when using the pivot key.
b Select the operation of the “Needle Position - Stitch Placement” button from the following two sequences (see
page 98).
Each press of the “Needle Position - Stitch Placement” button:
“ON” – raises the needle, stops it at a nearly lowered position, then lowers it
“OFF” – raises the needle, then lowers it
c Change the shape of the pointer when a USB mouse is used (see page 37).
d Turn both the upper and bobbin thread sensor “ON” or “OFF”. If it is turned “OFF”, the machine can be used
without thread.
e Change the speaker volume. Increase the number for louder volume, decrease for softer volume.
f Change the headphone (external speakers) volume.
g Change the brightness of the needle area and work area lights.
h Change the screen display brightness (see page 391).
i Select to save the machine power by setting the “Eco Mode” or the “Shutoff Support Mode” (see page 36).
j Select the length of time until the screen saver appears. A setting between “OFF” (0) and “60” minutes can be set in
1-minute increments.
k Change the image of the screen saver (see page 37).
l Select the initial screen that is displayed when the machine is turned on (see page 38).
m Turn on or off the spool stand LED indicator (see page 276).
n Change the display language (see page 39).
o Calibrate the sensor function (see page 52).
p Display the service count which is a reminder to take your machine in for regular servicing. (Contact your
authorized Brother dealer for details.)
q Display the total number of stitches sewn on this machine.
r The “No.” is the internal machine number for the embroidery and sewing machine.
s Display the program version.
CAUTION
• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” is set to “OFF”, remove the upper thread. If the machine is used
with the upper thread threaded, the machine will not be able to detect if the thread has become tangled.
Continuing to use the machine with tangled thread may cause damage.
Memo
• The latest version of software is installed in your machine. Check with your local authorized Brother
dealer or at “ http://support.brother.com
” for available updates (see page 412).
a
d
f
g
b
h
c
e
j
o
n
i
k
l
m
s
r
p
q
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
35
1
Embroidery settings
a Select from among 23 embroidery frame displays (see page 306).
b Change the thread color display on the “Embroidery” screen; thread number, color name (see page 305).
c When the thread number “#123” is selected, select from six thread brands (see page 305).
d Adjust the maximum embroidery speed setting (see page 305).
e Adjust the upper thread tension for embroidering (see page 302).
f Select the height of the embroidery foot during embroidering (see page 256).
g Change the display units (mm/inch).
h Change the color of the background for the embroidery display area (see page 39).
i Change the color of the background for the thumbnail area (see page 39).
j Press to specify the size of pattern thumbnails (see page 40).
k Adjust the distance between the pattern and the basting stitching (see page 290).
l Adjust the distance between the appliqué pattern and the outline (see page 291).
m Adjust the position and brightness of the embroidery foot with LED pointer (see page 263).
n Specify to display the fabric image on the screen. You can select the scan quality (see page 286).
o Set to “ON” when positioning the pattern on the thick fabric using the built-in camera (see page 289).
a
d
e
f
b
c
k
l
g
h
j
m
i
n
o
LCD SCREEN
36
■ Saving a Settings Screen Image to
USB Media
An image of the settings screen can be saved as a
BMP file.
A maximum of 100 images can be saved on a single
USB media at one time.
a
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the right side of the machine.
a USB port
b USB media
b
Press .
→ The settings screen appears. Select the settings
screen page that you want to save the screen image
of.
c
Press .
→ The image file will be saved to the USB media.
d
Remove the USB media, and then check the
saved image using a computer.
The files for Settings screen images are saved with the
name “S**.BMP” in a folder labeled “bPocket”.
* “**” in the name “S**.BMP” will automatically be
replaced with a number between 00 and 99.
■ Selecting the “Eco Mode” or
“Shutoff Support Mode”
You can save the machine power by setting the eco
mode or the shutoff support mode.
If you leave the machine without using for a
specified period of time, the machine enters in one
of these modes.
“Eco Mode”;
Machine will enter a sleep mode. Touch the screen
or press the “Start/Stop” button to continue sewing.
“Shutoff Support Mode”;
Machine will enter the lower power mode after set
period of time. Turn machine off and then back on
to restart sewing.
Press the “Start/Stop” button or touch the screen
display to recover from these modes.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
d
Use or to select the time until
entering the mode.
Note
• If 100 image files have already been saved
on the USB media, the following message
appears. In this case, delete a file from the
USB media or use different USB media.
Condition Eco Mode Shutoff Support
Mode
Available time OFF, 0 - 120 (minute) OFF, 1 - 12 (hour)
“Start/Stop” button Green flashing Green slow flashing
Suspended function Machine light,
Screen display, LED
pointer, Guideline
marker, Spool Stand
LED
All functions
After recovering The machine starts
from the previous
operation.
You need to turn off
the machine.
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
37
1
■ Changing the Pointer Shape When a
USB Mouse Is Used
In the settings screen, the shape can be selected for
the pointer that appears when a USB mouse is
connected. Depending upon the background color,
select the desired shape from the three that are
available.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 4 of the General settings
screen.
d
Use and to choose the pointer shape
from the three available setting ( ,
and ).
e
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Changing the Screen Saver Image
Instead of the default image, you can select your
own personal images for the screen saver of your
machine.
Before changing the screen saver image, prepare the
image on your computer or USB media.
Compatible image files
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
d
Press .
e
Press .
Note
• If you turn off the machine while the
machine is in the “Eco Mode” or the
“Shutoff Support Mode”, wait for about 5
seconds before turning on the machine
again.
Memo
• For details on changing the background
color, refer to “Changing the Background
Colors of the Embroidery Patterns” on page
39.
Memo
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
Format
JPEG format (.jpg)
File size
Max. 2 MB for each image
File dimension
800 × 1280 pixels or less, (If the width is
more than 800 pixels, the image imported
will be reduced to a width of 800 pixels.)
Number allowed
5 or less
Note
• When using USB media, make sure that it
contains only your own personal images to
be selected for the screen saver.
• Folders are recognized. Open the folder that
holds your personal images.
LCD SCREEN
38
f
Connect the USB media or the computer
(using a USB cable) that contains your
personal image to the USB port of the
machine.
* See page 48 about USB connectivity.
g
Press to select the first image.
* The images will appear in a list in this screen. Select
the desired number to specify the image.
h
Select the device that is connected.
* Press when connecting USB media to the USB
port.
* Press when connecting USB media to the
center USB port.
* Press when connecting a computer using a
USB cable, and then copy your personal images into
“Removable Disk”, which appears on the desktop of
the computer.
→ A list of your personal images appear on the screen.
* Press to delete the selected image.
* Press to view the previous page.
i
Press a file name to select image and then
press .
→ The selected image is stored on your machine.
* Press to view the previous page.
j
Repeat the procedure from step g to select
the remaining images.
k
Press to return to the original
screen.
■ Selecting the Initial Screen Display
The Initial screen that appears on the machine can
be changed.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
d
Use and to select the setting for the
initial screen display.
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
39
1
* Opening Screen: When the machine is turned on,
the home page screen appears after the opening
movie screen is touched.
* Home Page: When the machine is turned on, the
home page screen appears.
* Sewing/Embroidery Screen: When the machine is
turned on, the Embroidery screen appears if the
embroidery unit is attached to the machine, or the
sewing screen appears if the embroidery unit is not
attached to the machine.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Choosing the Display Language
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
d
Use and to choose the display
language.
a Display language
e
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Changing the Background Colors of
the Embroidery Patterns
In the settings screen, the background colors can be
changed for the embroidery pattern and pattern
thumbnails. Depending on the pattern color, select
the desired background color from the 66 color
thumbnails shown. Different background colors can
be selected for the embroidery pattern and pattern
thumbnails.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display shown on page 8 of the Embroidery
settings screen.
d
Press .
a Embroidery pattern background
b Pattern thumbnails background
a
Memo
• When using the Embroidery or My Design
Center, touch to directly access the
Embroidery settings screen.
a
b
LCD SCREEN
40
e
Select the background color from the 66
color thumbnails shown.
a Embroidery pattern background
b Selected color
a Pattern thumbnails background
b Selected color
f
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Specifying the Size of Pattern
Thumbnails
The thumbnails for selecting an embroidery pattern
can be set to be displayed at the normal size or a
larger size. The larger size is 1.5 times the normal
size.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The Embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display page 8 of the Embroidery settings
screen.
Memo
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
b
a
b
a
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
41
1
d
Press or to select the desired
thumbnail size.
Note
• When thumbnail size setting has been
changed the pattern selection screen will
not immediately reflect the chosen size. To
view the patterns with the new thumbnail
size, return to the category selection
screen, and then select the pattern category
again.
LCD SCREEN
42
Using the Sewing Machine Help Key
Press to open the sewing machine help screen. Four functions are available from the screen shown
below.
a Press this key to see explanation for upper threading, winding the bobbin, changing the presser foot, preparing to
embroider a pattern, and how to use the machine (see page 47).
b Press this key to select utility stitches when you are not sure which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch (see page
43).
c Press this key to see an explanation of the stitch selected (see page 44).
d Press this key to watch tutorial videos or MPEG-4 (MP4) files from USB media (see page 45).
a
b
c
d
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
43
1
Using the Operation Guide Function
Press to open the screen shown below. Six categories are displayed at the top of the screen.
Press a key to see more information about that category.
displays information about
the main parts of the machine and their
functions. This is the first screen displayed
when you press .
displays information about
the operation buttons.
displays information about
threading the machine, changing presser
feet, etc. Some of the functions are described
in the movies. Watch these movies for a
better understanding of the functions.
displays information about
attaching the embroidery unit, preparing
fabric for embroidering, etc.
Some of the functions are described in the
movies. Watch these movies for a better
understanding of the functions.
displays troubleshooting
information.
displays information about
cleaning the machine, etc.
Some of the functions are described in the
movies. Watch these movies for a better
understanding of the functions.
LCD SCREEN
44
Example: Displaying information about
upper threading
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The lower half of the screen will change.
d
Press (upper threading).
→ The screen shows instructions for threading the
machine.
e
Read the instructions.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view the previous page.
f
Press to return to the original
screen.
Using the Sewing Guide Function
The sewing guide function can be used to select
patterns from the Utility Stitch screen.
Use this function when you are not sure which
stitch to use for your application, or to get advice
about sewing particular stitches. For example, if
you want to sew overcasting, but you do not know
which stitch to use or how to sew the stitch, you
can use this screen to get advice. We recommend
that beginners use this method to select stitches.
a
Enter Utility Stitch category from the home
page.
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The advice screen is displayed.
d
Press the key of the category whose sewing
instructions you wish to view.
* Press to return to the original screen.
e
Read the explanations and select the
appropriate stitch.
→ The screen displays directions for sewing the
selected stitch. Follow the directions to sew the
stitch.
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
45
1
Playing a Tutorial Video
This machine provides tutorial videos on how to
use the machine. Together with the help guides,
which offer descriptions through text and
illustrations, the tutorial videos assist with machine
operation.
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press the title of the desired tutorial video.
→ The selected tutorial video begins playing.
d
Play the tutorial video.
a Number of seconds elapsed/Total number of
seconds
Operation keys
e
After you are finished playing the video,
press .
a
Play
Stop
Pause
Skip back 10 seconds
Skip forward 10 seconds
Return to beginning
Repeat
Delete video (when playing from the
machine’s memory)
Save to machine (when playing from USB
media)
Memo
• A frequently viewed tutorial video can be
saved to (favorites) of the machine,
from where it can be played.
LCD SCREEN
46
Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) Videos
Your MP4 videos can be played from USB media.
In addition, the MP4 video can be saved to the
machine so that a tutorial video on creating a
project, for example, can be viewed at any time.
Videos that can be played
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Select the device where the video is saved.
: play a tutorial video
: Play a video saved on the machine
(favorites)
: Play a video from USB media plugged into
the USB port
: Play a video from USB media plugged into
the USB port for mouse
* To return to the previous screen, press .
d
Select the video that you want to play.
* To return to the previous screen, press .
e
Play the video.
* Use the operation keys as described in “Playing a
Tutorial Video”.
f
After you are finished playing the video,
press .
MP4 file format: Video - H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Audio – AAC
Size: 450 (H) × 800 (W)
Memo
• MP4 file size will be changed to fit the
screen. If you view the large MP4 file, the
file will be reduced to fit the screen. If you
view the smaller MP4 file, the file will be
expanded to fit the screen.
• Some type of MP4 file cannot viewed with
the machine.
Note
• Video file names more than 20 characters
long may be omitted and not displayed.
Note
• Up to about 1 GB of MP4 videos can be
saved on the machine. When the maximum
capacity has been reached, delete
unnecessary videos.
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
47
1
Using the Pattern Explanation
Function
If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch
pattern, select the pattern and press and then
to see an explanation of the stitch
selection.
Example: Displaying information about
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The screen shows information.
d
Press to return to the original screen.
Note
• With the pattern explanation function,
descriptions can be displayed for the
patterns available on the Utility Stitch and
Character/Decorative Stitch screens.
• Descriptions are displayed for each pattern
in the Utility Stitch screen. Description for
the Character/Decorative Stitch category is
also displayed.
• If the key appears in gray, the
pattern explanation function cannot be
used.
Memo
• The settings remain displayed to allow you
to fine tune the stitch.
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
48
Using USB Media
When sending or reading patterns using the USB
media, connect the device to the USB port.
a USB port
b USB media
Connecting the Machine to the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the sewing
machine can be connected to your computer.
Refer to “Connecting Your Machine to the PC” on
page 189 for the available computer operating
systems.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
Memo
• USB media is widely used, however some
USB media may not be usable with this
machine. Please visit our website for more
details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the
USB media Reader/Writer into the
machine’s USB port.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it
is difficult to insert the connector, do not
insert it with force. Check the orientation of
the connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
Getting Ready
49
1
Using a USB Mouse (Sold
Separately)
The USB mouse, connected to the sewing
machine, can be used to perform a variety of
operations in the screens.
Connect a USB mouse to the USB port marked
with . You can also connect a USB mouse to
the other USB port.
a USB port marked with
b USB mouse
■ Clicking a Key
When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears
on the screen. Move the mouse to position the
pointer over the desired key, and then click the left
mouse button.
a Pointer
■ Changing Pages
Rotate the mouse wheel to switch through the tabs
of the pattern selection screens.
Memo
• If a mouse other than the optional USB
mouse is used, it may not perform as
described in this Operation Manual.
Note
• Do not perform operations with the mouse
at the same time that you are touching the
screen with your finger or the included
touch pen.
• A USB mouse can be connected or
disconnected at any time.
• Only the left mouse button and its wheel
can be used to perform operations. No
other buttons can be used.
• The mouse pointer does not appear in the
camera view window, the screen saver,
opening screen or the home page screen.
Memo
• Double-clicking has no effect.
Memo
• If page numbers and a vertical scroll bar for
additional pages are displayed, rotate the
mouse wheel or click the left mouse button
with the pointer on / or
/ to
display the previous or next page.
a
USING THE SENSOR PEN
50
Convenient Sewing Features by Using the Sensor Pen
By using the sensor pen, you have the option of
four separate functions
• Setting the guideline as a reference for your
sewing position.
• Set the needle position of straight stitch.
• Adjust the width and “L/R Shift” position of a
zigzag stitch.
• Set the ending point of a stitch pattern sequence.
a When specifying the end point of your sewing, this
function adjusts your pattern or stitch so that you
end up with a complete design.
b It is easy to set the pattern width and position.
Connecting the Sensor Pen
When connecting the sensor pen to the machine, make sure that the arrow on the sensor pen connector
faces up and that the connector is firmly inserted into the jack.
a Sensor pen jack
b Sensor pen connector
USING THE SENSOR PEN
CAUTION
• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do
not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise
it may cause blindness.
Note
• When the guideline or LED pointer does not
appear clearly, set the brightness of the
machine light dimmer to see them clearly.
Refer to “Using the Machine Setting Mode
Key” on page 33.
CAUTION
• When connecting the sensor pen, make sure
that the arrow on the sensor pen connector
faces up, otherwise the connector pins will not
align correctly and the connector will be
damaged.
• When connecting or disconnecting the sensor
pen, grab the connector, and then slowly push
it straight in or pull it straight out.
• When disconnecting the sensor pen from the
machine, do not pull on the cord, otherwise
the sensor pen may be damaged.
USING THE SENSOR PEN
Getting Ready
51
1
Using the Sensor Pen Holder
When connecting the sensor pen to the machine,
attach the sensor pen holder to keep the sensor
pen with the machine.
The right side of the holder can be used to hold the
touch pen.
Sensor pen holder
a
Using the point end of the cleaning brush or
the seam ripper point, remove the
protective cap covering the hole on the
right side of the machine.
→ Insert the point of the seam ripper or cleaning brush
into the hole in the protective cap, and then lightly
pull out the protective cap to remove it.
b
Firmly insert the sensor pen holder into the
hole where the protective cap was
removed.
c
Set the sensor pen in the sensor pen holder
with the pen tip pointing downward, and
then connect the sensor pen to the
machine.
Using the Sensor Pen
Hold the sensor pen, and then touch the point to
be specified. When the tip of the sensor pen is
pushed in, the position information is sent to the
machine.
When using the sensor pen, touch slowly and
gently for the definite operation.
1) Touch: Touch a point with the sensor pen, then
immediately lift up the pen.
2) Long touch: Touching a point with the sensor
pen and holding it down for at least one second
allows you to activate the functions that you just
selected.
Note
• Once a point is touched with the sensor pen
and the entered information is applied in the
screen, perform the next operation.
Repeatedly touching a point with the sensor
pen may prevent the information from being
correctly read.
• Do not drag the sensor pen tip on the
machine, otherwise the sensor pen tip may
be chipped off.
• If there is any problem with the guideline
marker, the sensor function may not
operate correctly.
USING THE SENSOR PEN
52
Important Information about
Sensor Pen
The sensor pen emits the signal to the machine,
and then the sensor pen receiver receives the
signal to specify the position.
a Sensor pen receiver
b Signal is waved out from the sensor pen
Calibrating the Sensor Pen
Before using the sensor pen for the first time, be
sure to personalize it using “Sensor Function
Calibration” in the settings screen. Doing so
allows the machine to learn the position in which
you usually hold the pen.
Hold the sensor pen at a comfortable angle and
then calibrate the machine according to the
procedure below.
Be sure to keep the sensor pen at the same angle
while calibrating the first and second points.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 5 of the General settings
screen.
d
Press after connecting the sensor
pen to the machine.
→ The Sensor Function Calibration screen appears.
Memo
• The sensor pen can be used to touch on the
screen as a touch pen.
CAUTION
• Do not insert any object into the sensor pen
and the receiver, otherwise the machine may
be damaged.
IMPORTANT
• Do not put your hand, the fabric or any object
between the machine and the sensor pen,
otherwise the sensor pen receiver may not
receive the ultrasonic wave.
• Do not use the machine close to any other unit
which produces ultrasonic wave or a vibration
sound, otherwise interference may occur.
USING THE SENSOR PEN
Getting Ready
53
1
e
Touch the first point of green dot marking
using the sensor pen.
* Touch on the needle plate cover.
a Needle plate cover
f
Touch the second point of center of cross-
hair using the sensor pen.
* Touch on the point in the illustrations.
a Flat bed attachment
b Embroidery unit
g
Press to finish the calibration. To
repeat the calibration touch the first point
again using the sensor pen, and continue
with step
f.
* Press to return to the original screen
without finishing the calibration.
* Press to reset the calibration.
LOWER THREADING
54
Winding the Bobbin
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin
With this machine, you can wind the bobbin during
sewing. While using the main spool pin to sew
embroidery, you can conveniently wind the bobbin
using the supplemental spool pin.
a Supplemental spool pin
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
c
Set the supplemental spool pin in the “up”
position.
a Supplemental spool pin
d
Place the spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that thread
unrolls from the front. Push the spool cap
onto the spool pin as far as possible to
secure the thread spool.
a Spool cap
b Spool pin
c Thread spool
LOWER THREADING
CAUTION
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code: SA156,
(SFB: XA5539-151)). SA156 is Class 15 type
bobbin.
* Actual size
a This model
b Other models
c 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
LOWER THREADING
Getting Ready
55
1
e
With your right hand, hold the thread near
the thread spool. With your left hand, hold
the end of the thread, and use both hands to
pass the thread through the thread guide.
a Thread guide
f
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk
making sure that the thread is under the
pre-tension disk.
a Pre-tension disk
→ Make sure that the thread passes under the pre-
tension disk.
b Pre-tension disk
c Pull it in as far as possible.
→ Check to make sure thread is securely set between
pre-tension disks.
g
Wind the thread clockwise around the
bobbin 5-6 times.
CAUTION
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
• Use the spool cap (large, medium, or small)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.
Memo
• When sewing with fine, cross-wound
thread, use the small spool cap, and leave a
small space between the cap and the
thread spool.
a Spool cap (small)
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
c Space
• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm
(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)
high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the
mini spool cap.
a Spool cap (mini king thread spool)
b 12 mm (1/2 inch)
c 75 mm (3 inches)
LOWER THREADING
56
h
Pass the end of the thread through the guide
slit in the bobbin winder seat, and pull the
thread to the right to cut the thread with
the cutter.
a Guide slit (with built-in cutter)
b Bobbin winder seat
i
Set the bobbin winding switch to the left,
until it clicks into place.
a Bobbin winding switch
→ The bobbin winding window appears.
j
Press .
→ Bobbin winding starts. The bobbin stops rotating
when bobbin winding is completed. The bobbin
winding switch will automatically return to its
original position.
k
Cut the thread with cutter and remove the
bobbin.
a Cutter
CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the process described. If the
thread is not cut with the cutter, and the
bobbin is wound, when the thread runs low it
may tangle around the bobbin and cause the
needle to break.
Memo
• Sliding the bobbin winding switch to the left
switches the machine into bobbin winding
mode.
Note
• changes to while the bobbin
is winding.
• Stay near the machine while winding the
bobbin to make sure the bobbin thread is
being wound correctly. If the bobbin thread
is wound incorrectly, press
immediately to stop the bobbin winding.
• The sound of winding the bobbin with stiff
thread, such as nylon thread for quilting,
may be different from the one produced
when winding normal thread; however, this
is not a sign of a malfunction.
Memo
• You can change the winding speed by
pressing (to decrease) or (to
increase) in the bobbin winding window.
• Press to minimize the bobbin
winding window. Then, you can perform
other operations, such as selecting a stitch
or adjusting the thread tension, while the
bobbin is being wound.
• Press (in top right of the LCD
screen) to display the bobbin winding
window again.
LOWER THREADING
Getting Ready
57
1
■ Using the Spool Pin
You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin
before sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to
wind the bobbin while sewing.
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and set
the bobbin on the shaft.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
c
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
the thread unwinds from the front of the
spool.
a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool
d Spool felt
d
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
original position.
e
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
Memo
• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on
the bobbin winder seat. Doing so could
loosen or remove the bobbin winder seat,
and could result in damage to the machine.
CAUTION
• Setting the bobbin improperly may cause the
thread tension to loosen, breaking the needle
and possibly resulting in injury.
LOWER THREADING
58
f
Pass the thread through the thread guide.
a Thread guide
g
Pass the thread around the pre-tension disk
making sure that the thread is under the
pre-tension disk.
a Thread guide
b Pre-tension disk
h
Follow steps g through k on page 55
through 56.
■ Using the Spool Stand
To wind thread on the bobbin while the spool stand
is installed, pass the thread from the spool through
the thread guide on the telescopic thread guide, and
then wind the bobbin according to steps
e through
k of “Using the Supplemental Spool Pin”on
page 55 to page 56.
■ Untangling Thread from Beneath the
Bobbin Winder Seat
If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is not
passed through the pre-tension disk correctly, the
thread may become tangled beneath the bobbin
winder seat.
Wind off the thread according to the following
procedure.
a Thread
b Bobbin winder seat
a
If the thread becomes tangled under the
bobbin winder seat, press once to
stop the bobbin winding.
Memo
• See page 24 to assemble the spool stand.
• See page 67 to thread the machine using
the spool stand.
CAUTION
• When winding thread on the bobbin, do not
cross the bobbin winding thread with the
upper thread in the thread guides.
CAUTION
• Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if
the thread becomes tangled under the bobbin
winder seat. It may result in injuries.
LOWER THREADING
Getting Ready
59
1
b
Cut the thread with scissors near the pre-
tension disk.
a Pre-tension disk
c
Push the bobbin winder switch to the right,
and then raise the bobbin at least 100 mm
(4 inches) from the shaft.
d
Cut the thread near the bobbin and hold the
thread end of the spool with your left hand.
Unwind the thread clockwise near the
bobbin winder seat with your right hand as
shown below.
e
Wind the bobbin again.
Setting the Bobbin
a
Press to lock all keys and buttons and
raise the presser foot.
* If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?” appears on the LCD screen, press
to continue.
b
Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right.
a Bobbin cover
b Latch
→ The bobbin cover opens.
Note
• Make sure that the thread passes through
the pre-tension disk correctly (page 55).
CAUTION
• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly
wound. Otherwise, the needle may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this sewing machine. If bobbins from other
models are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code: SA156,
(SFB: XA5539-151)). SA156 is Class 15 type
bobbin.
* Actual size
a This model
b Other models
c 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be
sure to press in the LCD to lock all keys
and buttons, otherwise injuries may occur if
the “Start/Stop” button or any other button is
pressed and the machine starts sewing.
LOWER THREADING
60
c
Remove the bobbin cover.
d
Hold the bobbin with your right hand and
hold the end of the thread with your left
hand.
e
Set the bobbin in the bobbin case so that
the thread unwinds to the left.
f
Hold the bobbin lightly with your right
hand, and then guide the thread with your
left hand.
g
Pass the thread through the guide, and then
pull the thread out toward the front.
a Cutter
→ The cutter cuts the thread.
h
Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of the
bobbin cover (1), and then lightly press
down on the right side to close the cover
(2).
i
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
Note
• If the thread is not correctly inserted
through the tension spring of the bobbin
case, it may cause incorrect thread tension.
(see page 92)
a Tension spring
CAUTION
• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your
finger and unwind the bobbin thread
correctly. Otherwise, the thread may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
LOWER THREADING
Getting Ready
61
1
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread
There may be some sewing applications where
you want to pull up the bobbin thread; for
example, when making gathers, darts, or doing
free motion quilting or embroidery.
a
Follow steps a to d in “Setting the
Bobbin” on page 59 for installing the
bobbin into the bobbin case.
b
Guide the bobbin thread through the
groove, following the arrow in the
illustration.
* Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
* Do not replace the bobbin cover.
c
While holding the upper thread, press the
“Needle Position” button to lower the
needle.
a “Needle Position” button
d
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
e
Gently pull the upper thread. A loop of the
bobbin thread will come out of the hole in
the needle plate.
f
Pull up the bobbin thread, pass it under the
presser foot and pull it about
100 mm (approx. 3-4 inches) toward the
back of the machine, making it even with
the upper thread.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
g
Replace the bobbin cover.
Memo
• You can pull up the bobbin thread after
threading the upper thread (“UPPER
THREADING” on page 62).
UPPER THREADING
62
Upper Threading
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
raise the presser foot.
→ The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can
be threaded.
a Upper thread shutter
c
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
d
Pivot the spool pin so that it angles upward.
Set the thread spool on the spool pin so that
the thread unwinds from the front of the
spool.
a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool
d Spool felt
UPPER THREADING
CAUTION
• Be sure to thread the machine properly.
Improper threading can cause the thread to
tangle and break the needle, leading to injury.
• When using the walking foot, the side cutter or
accessories not included with this machine,
attach the accessory to the machine after
threading the machine.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be
used with sewing machine needle sizes 75/
11 through 100/16.
• When threads such as transparent nylon
monofilament or speciality threads are used
it is not recommended to use the needle
threader.
• The automatic threading function cannot be
used with the wing needle or the twin
needle.
Memo
• This machine is equipped with an upper
thread shutter, allowing you to check that
the upper threading is performed correctly.
Note
• If you try to thread the needle automatically
without raising the needle, the thread may
not thread correctly.
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
63
1
e
Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as far
as possible, then return the spool pin to its
original position.
f
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
g
While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.
h
Guide the thread down, up, then down
through the groove, as shown in the
illustration.
CAUTION
• If the thread spool and/or spool cap are set
incorrectly, the thread may tangle on the spool
pin and cause the needle to break.
• Use the spool cap (large or medium) or the
thread spool insert (mini king thread spool)
that is closest in size to the thread spool. If a
spool cap smaller than the thread spool is
used, the thread may become caught in the slit
on the end of the spool and cause the needle
to break.
Memo
• When sewing with fine, cross-wound
thread, use the small spool cap, and leave a
small space between the cap and the
thread spool.
a Spool cap (small)
b Thread spool (cross-wound thread)
c Space
• If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm
(1/2 inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches)
high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the
thread spool insert (mini king thread spool).
a Thread spool insert (mini king thread spool)
b 12 mm (1/2 inch)
c 75 mm (3 inches)
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if
the thread catches on the take-up lever
visible inside the upper groove area.
a Look in the upper groove area
UPPER THREADING
64
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the
thread with both hands and guiding it as
shown in the illustration.
a Needle bar thread guide
j
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower presser foot.
k
Pass the thread through the thread guide
disks (marked “7”). Make sure that the
thread passes through the groove in the
thread guide.
a Groove in thread guide
l
Pull the thread up through the thread cutter
to cut the thread, as shown in the
illustration.
a Thread cutter
m
Press the “Automatic Threading” button to
have the machine automatically thread the
needle.
→ The thread passes through the eye of the needle.
n
Carefully pull the end of the thread that was
passed through the eye of the needle.
* If a loop was formed in the thread passed through
the eye of the needle, carefully pull on the loop of
thread through to the back of the needle.
Note
• When using thread that quickly winds off
the spool, such as metallic thread, it may be
difficult to thread the needle if the thread is
cut.
Therefore, instead of using the thread
cutter, pull out about 80 mm (approx. 3
inches) of thread after passing it through the
thread guide disks (marked “7”).
a 80 mm (approx. 3 inches) or more
Memo
• When the “Automatic Threading” button is
pressed, the presser foot will be
automatically lowered. After threading is
finished, the presser foot moves back to the
position before the “Automatic Threading”
button was pressed.
Note
• Pulling the loop of thread gently will avoid
needle breakage.
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
65
1
o
Pull out about 100-150 mm (approx. 4-6
inches) of the thread, and then pass it under
the presser foot toward the rear of the
machine.
→ Raise the presser foot lever if the presser foot is
lowered.
a About 100-150 mm (approx. 4-6 inches)
Using the Twin Needle Mode
The twin needle can only be used for patterns that
show after being selected. Before you select a
stitch pattern, make sure the stitch can be sewn in
the twin needle mode (refer to the “STITCH
SETTING CHART” at the end of this manual).
a
Press to lock all keys and buttons and
then install the twin needle (“CHANGING
THE NEEDLE” on page 75).
* If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?” appears on the LCD screen, press
to continue.
Memo
• If the needle could not be threaded or the
thread was not passed through the needle
bar thread guides, perform the procedure
again starting from step
c.
Then, pass the thread through the eye of
the needle after step
i.
Note
• Some needles cannot be threaded with the
needle threader. In this case, instead of
using the needle threader after passing the
thread through the needle bar thread guide
(marked “6”), manually pass the thread
through the eye of the needle from the front.
CAUTION
• Twin needle (part code XE4963-001) is
recommended for this machine. Contact your
authorized Brother dealer for replacement
needles (size 2.0/11 is recommended).
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.
• Do not sew with bent needles. The needle
could break and cause injury.
• When using the twin needle, it is
recommended to use presser foot “J”.
• When the twin needle is used, bunched
stitches may occur depending on the types of
fabric and thread that are used.
Use monogramming foot “N” for decorative
stitches.
• Before changing the needle or threading the
machine, be sure to press
on the LCD
Screen to lock all keys and buttons, otherwise
injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button
or any other button is pressed and the machine
starts sewing.
UPPER THREADING
66
b
Thread the machine for the first needle
according to the procedure for threading a
single needle (“Upper Threading” on
page 62).
c
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guides on the needle bar, then
thread the needle on the left side manually.
a Needle bar thread guide
d
Pull up the supplemental spool pin and set it
in the up position.
a Supplemental spool pin
e
Place the additional spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that the thread
unwinds from the front. Push the spool cap
onto the spool pin as far as possible to
secure the thread spool.
a Spool cap
b Spool pin
c Thread spool
f
Hold the thread from the spool with both
hands, and place the thread in the thread
guide.
* Do not place the thread in the pre-tension disks.
a Thread guide
g
While holding the thread from the spool,
pull the thread through the lower notch in
the thread guide plate, then through the
upper notch. Hold the end of the thread
with your left hand, and then guide the
thread through the groove, following the
arrows in the illustration.
Note
• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot
be used. Manually thread the twin needle
from front to back. Using the “Automatic
Threading” button may result in damage to
the machine.
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
67
1
h
Continue threading however do not pass
the thread in the needle bar thread guide
“6” on the needle bar. Thread the needle on
the right side.
a Needle bar thread guide
i
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
j
Select a stitch pattern. (Example: )
* Refer to “Sewing a Stitch” on page 82 for selecting
the stitch.
* Refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end
of this manual for the proper stitch to use with
presser foot “J”.
→ The selected stitch is displayed.
k
Press to select the twin needle mode.
a Single needle/twin needle setting
→ appears.
l
Start sewing.
Sample of Twin Needle Sewing
Using the Spool Stand
The included spool stand is useful when using
thread on spools with a large diameter (cross-
wound thread). This spool stand can hold two
spools of thread.
■ Using the Spool Stand
• Be sure to use a spool cap that is slightly larger
than the spool.
If the spool cap that is used is smaller or much
larger than the spool, the thread may catch and
sewing performance may suffer.
Note
• If the key is light gray after selecting
the stitch, the selected stitch cannot be
sewn in the twin needle mode.
a
CAUTION
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.
Memo
• To change direction when sewing with the
twin needle, raise the needle from the
fabric, raise the presser foot lever, and then
turn the fabric.
Memo
• See page 24 to assemble the spool stand.
• See page 58 to wind the bobbin when using
the spool stand.
UPPER THREADING
68
• When using thread on a thin spool, place the
included spool felt on the spool pin, place the
thread spool on the spool pin so that the center
of the spool is aligned with the hole at the center
of the spool felt, and then insert the spool cap
onto the spool pin.
a Spool felt
• When using thread on a cone spool, use the
spool holder. When using cone shaped thread
spool with other than cotton thread, it is not
necessary to use spool caps.
a Spool holder
• Depending on the size of spool or the amount of
thread remaining, choose the appropriate sized
spool cap (large or medium). Spool cap (small)
cannot be used with the spool cap base.
a Spool cap
b Spool cap base
a
Attach the spool stand to the machine. (see
page 24.)
b
Place the spool of thread on the spool pin
so that the thread feeds off the spool
clockwise. Firmly insert the spool cap onto
the spool pin.
Note
• When using 2 spools of thread, make sure
that both spools are feeding in the same
direction.
• Make sure that the spools do not touch
each other, otherwise the thread will not
feed off smoothly, the needle may break, or
the thread may break or become tangled. In
addition, make sure that the spools do not
touch the telescopic thread guide at the
center.
• Make sure that the thread is not caught
under the spool.
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
69
1
c
Pull the thread off the spool. Pass the thread
from the back to the front through the
thread guides at the top.
When using thread that quickly feeds off the spool,
such as metallic thread, use the enclosed ring to
prevent the thread from becoming entangled.
Threading sequence; Pull the thread from the spool,
place the thread through the ring from the bottom up
(1), into the thread guide (2) and through the ring
from the top down (3). When using the ring, do not
use the spool cap base.
d
Pass the thread through the machine’s
thread guide from the right to the left.
a Thread guide
e
Thread the machine according to the steps
f to o of “Upper Threading” on page 62.
Using Threads that Unwind
Quickly
■ Using the Spool Net
If using transparent nylon monofilament thread,
metallic thread, or other strong thread, place the
included spool net over the spool before using it.
When using specialty threads, threading must be
done manually.
If the spool net is too long, fold it once to match it to
the spool size before placing it over the spool.
Note
• Guide the thread so that it does not become
entangled with the other thread.
• After feeding the thread as instructed, wind
any excess thread back onto the spool,
otherwise the excess thread will become
tangled.
2
13
a Spool net
b Thread spool
c Spool pin
d Spool cap
Memo
• When threading the spool with the spool net
on, make sure that 50-60 mm (approx. 2 -
2-1/2 inches) of thread are pulled out.
• It may be necessary to adjust the thread
tension when using the spool net.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
70
Removing the Presser Foot
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?” appears on the LCD screen, press
to continue.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
d
Press the black button on the presser foot
holder and remove the presser foot.
a Black button
b Presser foot holder
Attaching the Presser Foot
a
Place the new presser foot under the
holder, aligning the foot pin with the notch
in the holder. Lower the presser foot lever
so that the presser foot pin snaps into the
notch in the holder.
a Notch
b Pin
b
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
CAUTION
• Always press on the screen to lock all keys and buttons before changing the presser foot. If is
not pressed and the “Start/Stop” button or another button is pressed, the machine will start and may
cause injury.
• Always use the correct presser foot for the selected stitch pattern. If the wrong presser foot is used, the
needle may strike the presser foot and bend or break, and may cause injury.
• Only use presser feet made for this machine. Using other presser feet may lead to accident or injury.
b
a
CAUTION
• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in
the correct direction, otherwise the needle
may strike the presser foot, breaking the
needle and causing injuries.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
Getting Ready
71
1
Attaching the Presser Foot with
the Included Adapter
You can attach the presser feet using the included
adapter and small screw.
For example, the walking foot, the free motion
echo quilting foot “E”, the free motion quilting foot
“C” and so on.
Following procedure shows how to attach the
walking foot as an example.
■ Attaching the Walking Foot
The walking foot holds the fabric between the
presser foot and the feed dogs to feed the fabric.
This enables you to have better fabric control
when sewing difficult fabrics (such as quilted
fabrics or velvet) or fabrics that slip easily (such as
vinyl, leather, or synthetic leather).
a
Follow the steps in “Removing the Presser
Foot” on the previous page.
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder
to remove the presser foot holder.
a Multi- purpose screwdriver
b Presser foot holder screw
c Presser foot holder
c
Remove the screw of the presser foot
completely from the presser foot shaft.
d
Set the adapter on the presser foot bar,
aligning the flat side of the adapter opening
with the flat side of the presser bar. Push it
up as far as possible, and then tighten the
screw securely with the screwdriver.
e
Turn a supplied small screw 2 or 3 times
with your hand.
Note
• Thread the needle manually when using the
walking foot, or only attach the walking foot
after threading the needle using the
“Automatic Threading” button.
• When sewing with the walking foot, sew at
medium to low speeds.
Memo
• The walking foot can only be used with
straight or zigzag stitch patterns. Reverse
stitches cannot be sewn with the walking
foot. Only select straight or zigzag stitch
patterns with reinforcement stitches. (see
page 85.)
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
72
f
Set the operation lever of the walking foot
so that the needle clamp screw is set in the
fork. Position the shank of the walking foot
on the presser foot bar.
a Operation lever
b Needle clamp screw
c Fork
d Walking foot shank
e Presser foot bar
g
Lower the presser foot lever. Insert the
screw, and tighten the screw securely with
the screwdriver.
Using the Dual Feed Foot
Dual feed foot enables you to have best fabric
control when sewing difficult fabrics that slip
easily, such as quilted fabrics or fabrics that tend
to stick to the bottom of a presser foot, such as
vinyl, leather or synthetic leather.
■ Attaching the Dual Feed Foot
a
Follow the steps in “Removing the Presser
Foot” on page 70.
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder
to remove the presser foot holder.
a Multi- purpose screwdriver
b Presser foot holder screw
c Presser foot holder
c
Position the dual feed foot to the presser
foot bar by aligning the notch of the dual
feed foot to the large screw.
Side view
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to tighten the
screw securely. If the screw is loose, the
needle may strike the presser foot and cause
injury.
• Be sure to rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check that the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If the needle
strikes the presser foot, injury may result.
Note
• When sewing with the dual feed foot, sew at
medium to low speeds.
Memo
• When selecting stitches to be used with the
dual feed foot, only the stitches that can be
used will be activated on the display.
• When sewing fabric that easily sticks
together, a more attractive finish can be
achieved by basting the beginning of
sewing.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
Getting Ready
73
1
d
Hold the dual feed foot in place with your
right hand, then using the included
screwdriver securely tighten the large
screw.
e
Plug the connector of the dual feed foot
into the jack on the back of your machine.
f
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
■ Attaching/Detaching toe
Attach the toe by aligning the pins with the notches
and snap it into place.
a Pins
b Notches
If you push down on the front and back part of the
dual feed foot, the toe of the dual feed foot will snap
off.
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw. If the screw is loose, the needle may
strike the presser foot and possibly cause
injury.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
74
■ Using the Dual Feed Position Lever
When the feed position lever is up, the black roller
belt on the dual feed is not engaged.
When the feed position lever is down, the black
roller belt on the dual feed is engaged.
■ Adjusting the Amount of Fabric
Feeding of the Dual Feed Foot
The dual feed mechanism pulls the top fabric
according to the set stitch length. With troublesome
fabrics, fine tune the set length, by changing the
dual feed feed adjustment in the settings screen.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The Sewing settings screen appears.
c
Display page 1 of the Sewing settings
screen.
d
Use or to increase or decrease the
feeding of the top fabric.
* Select “00” for sewing in most cases.
* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too little,
causing the fabric to be longer than the bottom
fabric, press to increase the feed amount for the
top fabric.
* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too much,
causing the fabric to be shorter than the bottom
fabric, press to decrease the feed amount for the
top fabric.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
Note
• Do not operate the lever while sewing.
Note
• As a default, some keys mentioned in the
following procedures appear in light gray
and are not available. To enable the keys for
specifying the settings, attach the dual feed
foot to the machine. The keys are enabled
after the dual feed foot is detected.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
Getting Ready
75
1
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message “OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?” appears on the LCD screen, press
to continue.
c
Use the screwdriver to turn the needle
clamp screw toward the front of the
machine and loosen the screw. Remove the
needle.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
CAUTION
• Always press on the screen to lock all keys and buttons before changing the needle. If is not
pressed and the “Start/Stop” button or another operation button is pressed accidentally, the machine will
start and injury may result.
• Use only sewing machine needles made for home use. Other needles may bend or break and may cause
injury.
• Never sew with a bent needle. A bent needle will easily break and may cause injury.
Memo
• To check the needle correctly, place the flat
side of the needle on a flat surface. Check
the needle from the top and the sides.
Throw away any bent needles.
a Parallel space
b Level surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)
Note
• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole
in the needle plate with fabric or paper to
prevent the needle from falling into the
machine.
Note
• Do not apply pressure to the needle clamp
screw. Doing so may damage the needle or
machine.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
76
d
With the flat side of the needle facing the
back, insert the new needle all the way to
the top of the needle stopper (viewing
window) in the needle clamp. Use a
screwdriver to securely tighten the needle
clamp screw.
a Needle stopper
b Hole for setting the needle
c Flat side of needle
e
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
CAUTION
• Be sure to push in the needle until it touches
the stopper, and securely tighten the needle
clamp screw with a screwdriver. If the needle
is not completely inserted or the needle clamp
screw is loose, the needle may break or the
machine may be damaged.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
Getting Ready
77
1
About the Needle
The sewing machine needle is probably the most important part of the sewing machine. Choosing the
proper needle for your sewing project will result in a beautiful finish and fewer problems. Below are some
things to keep in mind about needles.
• The smaller the needle number, the finer the needle. As the numbers increase, the needles get thicker.
• Use fine needles with lightweight fabrics, and thicker needles with heavyweight fabrics.
• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 with stretch fabrics.
• To avoid skipped stitches, use ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 when sewing character or decorative
stitches.
• Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. Use ball point needle 75/11 for embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters when the thread trimming function is turned on.
• It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavyweight fabrics or
stabilizing products (for example, denim, puffy foam, etc.). A 75/11 needle may bend or break, which could
result in injury.
• Size 75/11 machine needle is installed into your sewing machine.
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations
The following table provides information concerning the appropriate thread and needle for various
fabrics. Please refer to this table when selecting a thread and needle for the fabric you wish to use.
Fabric type/Application
Thread
Size of needle
Type Size
Medium weight fabrics Broadcloth Cotton thread
60 - 90
75/11 - 90/14Taffeta Synthetic thread
Flannel, Gabardine Silk thread 50
Thin fabrics Lawn Cotton thread
60 - 90
65/9 - 75/11Georgette Synthetic thread
Challis, Satin Silk thread 50
Thick fabrics Denim Cotton thread 30
90/14 - 100/16
50
Corduroy Synthetic thread
50 - 60
Tweed Silk thread
Stretch fabrics Jersey Thread for knits
50 - 60
Ball point needle
(gold colored)
75/11 - 90/14
Tricot
Easily frayed fabrics Cotton thread
50 - 90
65/9 - 90/14Synthetic thread
Silk thread 50
For top-stitching Synthetic thread
50 90/14 - 100/16
Silk thread
Memo
• For transparent monofilament nylon thread, always use needle sizes 90/14 or 100/16.
The same thread is usually used for the bobbin thread and upper thread.
CAUTION
• Be sure to follow the needle, thread, and fabric combinations listed in the table. Using an improper
combination, especially a heavyweight fabric (i.e., denim) with a small needle (i.e., 65/9 - 75/11), may
cause the needle to bend or break, and lead to injury. Also, the seam may be uneven, the fabric may
pucker, or the machine may skip stitches.
NEEDLE CALIBRATION USING THE BUILT IN CAMERA
78
Setting the camera needle position is essential
when you use camera function. It is not necessary
to perform this operation each time, but we
recommend performing it when the needle is
changed. Use the white stickers (solid) included
with the machine.
a
Hold your finger firmly on the LCD screen,
and then turn on the machine.
→ The following screen appears.
b
Press the “Automatic Threading” button.
→ Camera needle position setting screen appears.
c
Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the procedure.
1. Raise needle bar to its highest position.
2. Remove presser foot and replace needle
with a new embroidery needle standard
size 75/11 or 90/14.
NEEDLE CALIBRATION USING THE BUILT IN
CAMERA
Note
• Be careful not to touch the LCD screen prior
to Step
b below.
• This function can be performed with or
without embroidery unit attached to
machine. If attached, message screens will
appear regarding movement of embroidery
unit.
+1
+4
+5 +8
+11 +13
+9
+2 +3
+10
7+
6+
12+
Note
• The “Needle Position” button cannot be
used while setting the camera needle
position. Turn the handwheel
counterclockwise to move the needle bar.
NEEDLE CALIBRATION USING THE BUILT IN CAMERA
Getting Ready
79
1
3. Affix white sticker on needle dropping
point area.
a White sticker
4. Press to initiate the calibration
process. For safety please make sure area
around needle is clear prior to pressing
.
→ Setting the needle drop point begins.
d
The operation is finished when “OK”
appears. If “NG” appears, remove the
sticker, and then follow the on-screen
instructions to repeat steps 3 and 4 of
step
c. If multiple attempts to set the
position are not successful, contact your
nearest authorized Brother dealer.
e
Remove the sticker, and then turn off the
machine.
Note
• Use a new sticker. The camera needle
position cannot be set correctly if there is a
hole in sticker or if it is dirty. If you have no
new stickers, contact your nearest
authorized Brother dealer.
NEEDLE CALIBRATION USING THE BUILT IN CAMERA
80
Chapter 2
Sewing Basics
SEWING.................................................................. 82
Sewing a Stitch..........................................................................82
■ Using the Multi-Function Foot Controller (Only for supplied
models) .................................................................................... 83
Specifying the Multi-Function Foot Controller
(Only for supplied models) .......................................................84
■ Functions That Can Be Specified .............................................. 84
■ Specifying the Functions........................................................... 84
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches .................................................85
Automatic Reinforcement Stitching ..........................................85
Sewing Curves...........................................................................87
Changing Sewing Direction ......................................................87
■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm or Less ............................ 87
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics.....................................................87
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the Presser Foot ...................... 88
■ If the Fabric does not Feed .......................................................88
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener Tape ......................................88
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics ......................................................89
Sewing Stretch Fabrics ..............................................................89
STITCH SETTINGS................................................... 90
Setting the Stitch Width ............................................................90
Setting the Stitch Length ..........................................................91
Setting the “L/R Shift”...............................................................91
Setting the Thread Tension .......................................................92
■ Proper Thread Tension ...........................................................92
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight ....................................................... 92
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose ...................................................... 92
USEFUL FUNCTIONS.............................................. 93
Automatic Thread Cutting.........................................................93
Adjusting the Needle Drop Position with the Guideline Marker
....94
■ Adjusting the Guideline Marker Position..................................94
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the Guideline Marker .................... 95
Pivoting ....................................................................................95
Using the Knee Lifter ...............................................................96
Automatic Fabric Sensor System
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) ...........................................97
Needle Position - Stitch Placement ...........................................98
Checking the Needle Location in the Screen ............................98
■ Using the Camera View Window ............................................. 99
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS
WITH SEWING STITCH ........................................ 100
Sensor Function Area ..............................................................100
Specifying the Guideline Marker Position With the Sensor Pen
.....100
Specifying the Needle Drop Position With the Sensor Pen .....102
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Stitching Width and Stitch
Position ..................................................................................103
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify the Sewing End Point ...........105
■ Reusing the Previous Setting...................................................108
SEWING
82
Sewing a Stitch
a
Turn the main power to ON and press
to display the utility stitches, and push the
“Needle Position” button to raise the
needle.
b
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
→ The symbol of the correct presser foot will be
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD screen.
c
Install the presser foot (“CHANGING THE
PRESSER FOOT” on page 70).
d
Set the fabric under the presser foot. Hold
the fabric and thread in your left hand, and
rotate the handwheel to set the needle in
the sewing start position.
e
Lower the presser foot.
* You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
f
Adjust the sewing speed with the speed
control slide.
* You can use this slide to adjust sewing speed during
sewing.
a Slow
b Fast
SEWING
CAUTION
• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the needle while the machine is in operation. Keep your hands
away from moving parts while the machine is in operation.
• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during sewing. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not attempt to sew over basting pins or other objects during sewing. Otherwise, the needle may break
and cause injury.
• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the stitch length setting before continuing sewing. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury.
CAUTION
• Always use the correct presser foot. If the
wrong presser foot is used, the needle may
strike the presser foot and bend or break,
possibly resulting in injury.
Refer to page 414 for presser foot
recommendations.
Memo
• The black button on the left side of presser
foot “J” should be pressed only if the fabric
does not feed or when sewing thick seams
(see page 88). Normally, you can sew
without pressing the black button.
SEWING
Sewing Basics
83
2
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
* Guide the fabric lightly by hand.
h
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to stop
sewing.
i
Press the “Thread Cutter” button to trim
the upper and lower threads.
→ The needle will return to the up position
automatically.
j
When the needle has stopped moving, raise
the presser foot and remove the fabric.
■ Using the Multi-Function Foot
Controller (Only for supplied
models)
You can also use the foot controller to start and stop
sewing.
Memo
• When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the “Start/
Stop” button.
CAUTION
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button after
the threads have been cut. Doing so could
tangle the thread or break the needle and
damage the machine.
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button when
there is no fabric set in the machine or during
machine operation. The thread may tangle,
possibly resulting in damage.
Note
• When cutting thread thicker than #30, nylon
monofilament thread, or other decorative
threads, use the thread cutter on the side of
the machine.
Memo
• This machine is equipped with a bobbin
thread sensor that warns you when the
bobbin thread is almost empty. When the
bobbin thread is nearly empty, the machine
automatically stops. However, if the “Start/
Stop” button is pressed, a few stitches can
be sewn. When the warning displays, re-
thread the machine immediately.
CAUTION
• Do not allow fabric pieces and dust to collect
in the foot controller. Doing so could cause a
fire or an electric shock.
Memo
• When the multi-function foot controller is
being used, you cannot start sewing by
pressing the “Start/Stop” button.
• The multi-function foot controller cannot be
used when embroidering.
• The multi-function foot controller can be
used for sewing utility and decorative
stitches when the embroidery unit is
attached.
SEWING
84
a
Insert the multi-function foot controller
plug into its jack on the machine.
* Before connecting the multi-function foot controller,
be sure to assemble the controller. Refer to
“Assembling the Controller” on page 26.
a Multi-function foot controller
b Foot controller jack
b
Slowly depress the multi-function foot
controller to start sewing.
Pressing down on the multi-function foot controller
increases the sewing speed; releasing the pressure on
the multi-function foot controller decreases the sewing
speed.
c
Release the multi-function foot controller to
stop the machine.
Specifying the Multi-Function
Foot Controller (Only for
supplied models)
With the multi-function foot controller, various
sewing machine operations in addition to starting/
stopping sewing, such as thread cutting and
reverse stitching, can be specified to be
performed.
■ Functions That Can Be Specified
* If you set the “Reverse Stitch” function on the heel
switch, machine operates the same as pressing the
“Reverse Button” on the machine.
* Reinforcement stitching may be applied depending
on the selected stitch pattern. For the details, refer to
“Automatic Reinforcement Stitching” on page 85.
■ Specifying the Functions
The functions performed by the multi-function foot
controller can be specified in the settings screen.
Memo
• The speed that is set using the sewing
speed controller is the multi-function foot
controller’s maximum sewing speed.
Controller Functions that can be specified
a Main foot controller Start/Stop
b Heel switch Select any of the following:
• Thread Cutting
• Needle Position UP/DOWN
• Single Stitch
• Reverse Stitch (Reinforcement
Stitch) *
c Side pedal
Memo
• If you set “Reverse Stitch” on the side
pedal, you can create a darning stitch effect
using zigzag stitches. With both feet, keep
pressing the main foot controller, and
repeat pressing and releasing the side pedal
to sew forward and reverse in turn. Machine
will reverse at the speed you press the main
foot controller.
Note
• Before specifying the functions, connect the
multi-function foot controller to the sewing
machine. The settings screen is activated
the first time that the sewing machine
detects the multi-function foot controller.
• After the multi-function foot controller is
connected to the sewing machine and the
functions are specified, the “Start/Stop”
button cannot be used. All buttons other
than the “Start/Stop” button can continue to
be used.
SEWING
Sewing Basics
85
2
a
Press .
b
Display page 2 of the Sewing Settings
screen.
c
Select the functions to be performed by the
multi-function foot controller.
d
Press .
Sewing Reinforcement Stitches
Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally
necessary at the beginning and end of sewing. You
can use the “Reverse Stitch” button to sew reverse/
reinforcement stitches. When you keep pressing
“Reinforcement Stitch” button, the machine will
sew reinforcement stitch at that point 3 to 5
stitches, and then stop. (see page 17)
a “Reverse Stitch” button
b “Reinforcement Stitch” button
If the automatic reinforcement stitch is selected on
the screen, reverse stitches (or reinforcement
stitches) will be sewn automatically at the
beginning of sewing when the “Start/Stop” button
is pressed. Press “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew reverse
stitches (or reinforcement stitches) automatically at
the end of sewing (Refer to the next procedure
“Automatic Reinforcement Stitching”.).
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
The operation performed when the button is
pressed differs depending on the selected pattern.
(Refer to “STITCH SETTING CHART” on
page 414.)
Automatic Reinforcement
Stitching
After selecting a stitch motif, turn on the automatic
reinforcement stitching function before sewing,
and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch motif) at the beginning
and end of sewing.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press to set the automatic
reinforcement stitching function.
→ The key will display as .
Memo
• When you press the “Reinforcement Stitch”
button while sewing character/decorative
stitch pattern, you can end sewing with a
full stitch instead of at a mid-point.
• The green light on the right of the
“Reinforcement Stitch” button lights up
while the machine is sewing a full motif, and
it automatically turns off when the sewing is
stopped.
SEWING
86
c
Set the fabric in the start position and begin
sewing.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
sewing.
If you press the Start/Stop button to pause sewing,
press it again to continue. The machine will not
sew reverse/reinforcement stitches again.
d
Press “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button).
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) and stop.
The operation performed when the button is
pressed differs depending on the selected pattern.
Refer to the following table for details on the
operation that is performed when the button is
pressed.
* If “Reinforcement Priority” of the settings screen is set to
“ON” (see page 33), reinforcement stitches are sewn
instead of reverse stitches.
Memo
• Some stitches, such as buttonholes and bar
tacks, require reinforcement stitches at the
beginning of sewing. If you select one of
these stitches, the machine will
automatically turn on this function (the key
appears as when the stitch is selected).
Memo
• To turn off the automatic reinforcement
stitching function, press again, so it
appears as .
“Reverse Stitch”
button
“Reinforcement
Stitch” button
+
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and only sews
reverse stitches
while holding the
“Reverse Stitch”
button.
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding the
“Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
+
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and only sews
reverse stitches
while holding the
“Reverse Stitch”
button.*
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding the
“Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches at
the beginning and
end of sewing.
Machine sews
reverse stitches at
the beginning and
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
+
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and
reverse stitches at
the end of sewing.*
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and end of
sewing.
+
Machine starts
sewing and then
sews reinforcement
stitches while
holding the “Reverse
Stitch” button.
Machine starts
sewing at the
beginning, then
completes the
pattern and sews
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
+
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and sews
reinforcement
stitches when the
“Reverse Stitch”
button is pressed.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning, then
completes the
pattern and sews
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
SEWING
Sewing Basics
87
2
Sewing Curves
Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
Changing Sewing Direction
Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric,
and press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to raise
the presser foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn
the fabric so that you can sew in the new
direction. Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot and start sewing.
The pivot setting is useful when changing the
sewing direction. When the machine is stopped at
the corner of the fabric, the machine stops with the
needle in the fabric and the presser foot is
automatically raised so the fabric can easily be
rotated (“Pivoting” on page 95).
■ Sewing a Seam Allowance of 0.5 cm
or Less
Baste the corner before sewing, and then, after
changing the sewing direction at the corner, pull the
basting thread toward the back while sewing.
a 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics
The sewing machine can sew fabrics up to 6 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) thick. If the thickness of a seam
causes sewing to occur at an angle, help guide the
fabric by hand and sew on the downward slope.
CAUTION
• Do not forcefully push fabrics more than
6 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) thick through the
sewing machine. This may cause the needle to
break and cause injury.
• Thicker fabrics require a larger needle (See
page 77).
SEWING
88
■ If the Fabric does not Fit under the
Presser Foot
If the presser foot is in the up position, and you are
sewing heavyweight or multiple layers of fabric
which do not fit easily under the presser foot, use
the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot to its
highest position. The fabric will now fit under the
presser foot.
■ If the Fabric does not Feed
If the fabric does not feed when starting to sew or
when sewing thick seams, press the black button on
the left side of presser foot “J”.
a
Raise the presser foot.
b
While keeping the black button on the left
side of presser foot “J” pressed in, press the
“Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower the
presser foot.
c
Release the black button.
→ The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric to
be fed.
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener
Tape
Memo
• You cannot use the presser foot lever after
the presser foot has been raised using the
“Presser Foot Lifter” button.
Memo
• Once the trouble spot has been passed, the
foot will return to its normal position.
• When “Automatic Fabric Sensor System”
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) in the
machine settings screen is set to “ON”, the
thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected by the internal sensor so the fabric
can be fed smoothly for best sewing results.
(see page 97 for details.)
CAUTION
• Do not use adhesive backed hook-and-loop
fastener tape designed for sewing. When glue
adheres to the needle or the bobbin hook race,
it may cause malfunction.
• If the hook-and-loop fastener tape is sewn with
a fine needle (65/9-75/11), the needle may
bend or break.
Note
• Before starting to sew, baste the fabric and
hook-and-loop fastener tape together.
SEWING
Sewing Basics
89
2
Make sure that the needle passes through the
hook-and-loop fastener tape by rotating the
handwheel and lower the needle into the hook-
and-loop fastener tape before sewing. Sew the
edge of the hook-and-loop fastener tape at a slow
speed.
If the needle does not pass through the hook-and-
loop fastener tape, replace the needle size with the
needle for thick fabrics (page 77).
a Edge of the hook-and-loop fastener tape
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics
Place thin paper or tear away embroidery
stabilizer under thin fabrics to make sewing easier.
Gently tear off the paper or the stabilizer after
sewing.
a Thin paper
Sewing Stretch Fabrics
First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then
sew without stretching the fabric.
In addition, a better result can be achieved by
using thread for knits or a stretch stitch.
a Basting stitching
Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch
fabrics, decrease the pressure of the
presser foot (“Using the Machine Setting
Mode Key” on page 33).
STITCH SETTINGS
90
When you select a stitch, your machine automatically selects the appropriate stitch width, stitch length,
and upper thread tension. However, if needed, you can change any of the individual settings.
Setting the Stitch Width
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the zigzag stitch pattern width.
Example:
Press to narrow the zigzag stitch pattern
width.
→ The value in the display gets smaller.
Press to widen the zigzag stitch pattern width.
→ The value in the display gets bigger.
STITCH SETTINGS
Note
• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed (refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual).
• If you turn off the machine or select another stitch without saving stitch setting changes (“Saving Your
Stitch Settings” on page 115), the stitch settings will return to their default settings.
Memo
• For an alternate method of changing the
stitch width using the speed controller, see
page 133.
Memo
• Press to save the stitch settings.
• Press to check changes made to the
stitch.
• Press to return the stitch width to the
original setting.
Note
• After adjusting the stitch width, slowly
rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle does not touch the presser foot. If
the needle hits the presser foot, the needle
may bend or break.
STITCH SETTINGS
Sewing Basics
91
2
Setting the Stitch Length
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the stitch pattern length.
Example:
Press to shorten the stitch length.
→ The value in the display gets smaller.
Press to lengthen the stitch length.
→ The value in the display gets bigger.
Setting the “L/R Shift”
Follow the steps below when you want to change
the placement of the zigzag stitch pattern by
moving it left and right.
Example:
Press to shift the pattern to the left.
→ The value in the display appears with a minus sign.
Press to shift the pattern to the right side of the
left needle position.
→ The value in the display appears with a plus sign.
Memo
• Press to save the stitch settings.
• Press to check changes made to the
stitch.
• Press to return the stitch length to
the original setting.
CAUTION
• If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen
the stitch length and continue sewing. Do not
continue sewing without lengthening the stitch
length. Otherwise, the needle may break and
cause injury.
Memo
• Press to save the stitch settings.
• Press to check changes made to the
stitch.
• Press to return to the original setting.
Note
• After adjusting the “L/R Shift”, slowly rotate
the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle does not touch the presser foot. If
the needle hits the presser foot, the needle
may bend or break.
STITCH SETTINGS
92
Setting the Thread Tension
You may need to change the thread tension,
depending on the fabric and thread being used.
Follow the steps below to make any necessary
changes.
■ Proper Thread Tension
The upper thread and the bobbin thread should
cross near the center of the fabric. Only the upper
thread should be visible from the right side of the
fabric, and only the bobbin thread should be visible
from the wrong side of the fabric.
a Wrong side
b Surface
c Upper thread
d Bobbin thread
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
If the bobbin thread is visible from the right side of
the fabric, the upper thread is too tight.
a Bobbin thread
b Upper thread
c Surface
d Locks appear on surface of fabric
Press , to loosen the upper thread.
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of
the fabric, the upper thread is too loose.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c Wrong side
d Locks appear on wrong side of fabric
Press , to tighten the upper thread.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may be too
tight. In this case, refer to “Setting the
Bobbin” (page 59) and rethread the bobbin
thread.
Memo
• When you finish sewing, remove the bobbin
cover and then make sure that the thread is
shown as below. If the thread is not shown
as below, the thread is not inserted through
the tension-adjusting spring of the bobbin
case correctly. Reinsert the thread
correctly. For details, refer to page 59.
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may be too
loose. In this case, refer to “Upper
Threading” (page 62) and rethread the
upper thread.
Memo
• Press to return the thread tension to
the original setting.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
93
2
Automatic Thread Cutting
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the
automatic thread cutting function before sewing,
and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning
and end of sewing, and trim the threads at the end
of sewing. This function is useful when sewing
buttonholes and bar tacks.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press to set the automatic thread
cutting function.
→ You get , and the machine is set for
automatic thread cutting function and automatic
reverse/reinforcement stitching.
c
Set the fabric in the start position and start
sewing.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
→ The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue
sewing.
d
Once you have reached the end of the
stitching, press “Reverse Stitch” button or
“Reinforcement Stitch” button once.
If stitching, such as buttonholes and bar tacking, that
includes reinforcement stitching has been selected,
this operation is unnecessary.
a The point where the “Start/Stop” button was
pressed.
b The point where the “Reverse Stitch” button or the
“Reinforcement Stitch” button was pressed.
c The thread is cut here.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Memo
• To turn off the automatic thread cutting
function, press again, so it appears as
.
• This function is set automatically when
sewing embroidery.
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to
pause sewing, press the same button again
to continue. The beginning reverse/
reinforcement stitches will not be sewn
again.
Memo
• The automatic thread cutting function will
not be performed if the “Start/Stop” button
is pressed while sewing. Press the “Reverse
Stitch” button or the “Reinforcement Stitch”
button at the end of the stitching.
32
1
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
94
Adjusting the Needle Drop
Position with the Guideline
Marker
The red guideline marker indicates the sewing
position on the fabric. You can adjust the sewing
position by moving the guideline marker while
checking the guideline marker on the fabric.
a
Press to display the guideline marker.
→ The guideline marker scale appears.
* Depending on the setting of “Initial Position” in the
settings screen, the initial needle drop position is
scaled as either 0.0 mm or 3.5 mm.
b
Use or to move the needle drop
position.
→ Adjust the position from 15.5 mm (5/8 inch) to the
right of the left needle to -3.5 mm (-1/8 inch) to the
left of the left needle.
a Press to flip the guideline marker position on the
center needle position.
c
Press again to stop using the guideline
marker.
■ Adjusting the Guideline Marker
Position
If the guideline marker indicates the position
incorrectly in the center needle position, adjust the
initial position in the settings screen.
a
Press to display “Guideline Marker
Adjustment” in the settings screen.
b
Display settings screen.
c
Press .
→ The “Guideline Marker Adjustment” screen appears.
d
Use or to adjust the guideline
marker position.
a Press to move the guideline marker to the left
b Press to move the guideline marker to the right
e
Press twice to return to the original
screen.
CAUTION
• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do
not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise
it may cause blindness.
a
a b
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
95
2
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the
Guideline Marker
a
Follow steps from a to c to display the
“Guideline Marker Adjustment” screen.
b
Use or to adjust the brightness of
the guideline marker.
→ Set the brightness of the guideline marker from “1”
for a dim marker, to “5” for the brightest marker, on
the fabric.
c
Press twice to return to the original
screen.
Pivoting
If the pivot function is selected, the machine stops
with the needle lowered (in the fabric) and the
presser foot is automatically raised to an
appropriate height when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed. When the “Start/Stop” button is pressed
again, the presser foot is automatically lowered
and sewing continues. This function is useful for
stopping the machine to rotate the fabric.
a
Select a stitch.
CAUTION
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
machine starts when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed or the foot controller is pressed down
even if the presser foot has been raised. Be
sure to keep your hands and other items away
from the needle, otherwise injuries may occur.
Memo
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
height of the presser foot when sewing is
stopped can be changed according to the
type of fabric being sewn. Press to
display “Pivoting Height” of the settings
screen. Press or to select one of the
three heights (3.2 mm, 5.0 mm or 7.5 mm).
To raise the presser foot further, increase
the setting. (Normally, 3.2 mm is set.)
Note
• The “Needle Position – Up/Down” of the
settings screen, must be set in the down
position
for the pivot function to be
used. When “Needle Position – Up/Down” is
set in the raised position , appears
as light gray and cannot be used.
• The pivot function can only be used with
stitches where presser foot “J” or “N” is
indicated in the upper-left corner of the
screen. If any other stitch is selected,
appears as light gray and is not available.
• If the pivot function is selected, and
beside “Presser Foot Height” in the settings
screen are not available and the setting
cannot be changed.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
96
b
Press to select the pivot setting.
→ The key appears as .
c
Place the fabric under the presser foot with
the needle at the starting point of the
stitching, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button. The machine will begin sewing.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine at the point where the sewing
direction changes.
→ The machine stops with the needle in the fabric, and
the presser foot is raised.
e
Rotate the fabric, and then press the “Start/
Stop” button.
→ The presser foot is automatically lowered, and
sewing continues.
Using the Knee Lifter
Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the
presser foot with your knee, leaving both hands
free to handle the fabric.
a
Change the operating position of the knee
lifter handle before inserting into the
machine.
Slide up the knee lifter handle slightly and
rotate it while releasing pressure so handle
will click into position.
* The knee lifter can be adjusted to three different
angles.
a Knee lifter handle
→ Rotate knee lifter handle till it clicks into the
selected position that is most comfortable for you.
Memo
• If you press the “Start/Stop” button to
pause sewing, press it again to continue,
reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
will not be sewn.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
97
2
b
Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the
notches in the knee lifter slot on the front of
the machine. Insert the knee lifter bar as far
as possible.
c
Use your knee to move the knee lifter bar to
the right in order to raise the presser foot.
Release the knee lifter to lower the presser
foot.
Automatic Fabric Sensor System
(Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure)
The thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected and the presser foot pressure is
automatically adjusted with an internal sensor
while sewing, to insure that your fabric is fed
smoothly. The fabric sensor system works
continuously while sewing. This function is useful
for sewing over thick seams (see page 87), or
quilting (see page 131).
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Set “Automatic Fabric Sensor System” to
“ON”.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
CAUTION
• Only change position of the knee lifter handle
when knee lifter is not on the machine,
otherwise the knee lifter may damage the
mounting slot on front of the machine.
Note
• If the knee lifter bar is not pushed into the
mounting slot as far as possible, it may
come out during use.
CAUTION
• Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee
lifter during sewing. If the knee lifter is pushed
during machine operation, the needle may
break or the thread tension may loosen.
Memo
• When the presser foot is in the up position,
move the knee lifter to the far right and then
release to return the presser foot to the
down position.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
98
Needle Position - Stitch
Placement
When the “Needle Position - Stitch Placement” is
“ON”, the needle will be partially lowered for
precise stitch placement and then press the
“Needle Position” button to lower the needle
completely. Each press of the “Needle Position”
button changes the needle to the next position.
When the “Needle Position - Stitch Placement” is
“OFF”, each press of the “Needle Position” button
simply raises and then lowers the needle.
“Needle Position - Stitch Placement” is “ON”
* When the needle is nearly lowered by pressing the
“Needle Position” button, the feed dogs are
lowered. At this time, the fabric can be shifted to
finely adjust the needle drop position.
“Needle Position - Stitch Placement” is “OFF”
a
Press .
b
Set “Needle Position - Stitch Placement” to
“ON” or “OFF”.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Checking the Needle Location in
the Screen
You can check the stitch image with actual fabric
image on the screen.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Press .
→ An image of the selected stitch and the actual fabric
image are displayed.
* Press to change the thread color displayed on
the screen. You can select from four different colors.
c
Press on the fabric image or on the
screen.
→ The camera view window appears.
→ Press again to turn off the camera view.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
99
2
■ Using the Camera View Window
→ The camera view window appears.
a CAMERA IMAGE
b GRID VIEW
c OK
d NEEDLE DROP POSITION
e ZOOM
CAMERA IMAGE
Press this key to save a camera image to the USB
media.
Insert the USB media to the machine to save a
camera image (Refer to “Saving a Settings Screen
Image to USB Media” on page 36). The files for
camera images are saved with the name “C**.BMP”.
A maximum of 100 camera images can be saved in
one USB media.
* “**” in the name “C**.BMP” will automatically be
replaced with a number between 00 and 99.
GRID VIEW
Press this key to display a grid.
OK
Press this key to close the screen.
NEEDLE DROP POSITION
Press to show the needle drop position in
the screen as “ ”.
Lower the presser foot before pressing .
Once the needle drop position appears on the
screen, you can raise the presser foot and change
the needle drop position by moving the fabric.
a Needle drop position
ZOOM
Press to enlarge the image in the screen.
Press again to return the image to its original
display size.
a
b
cd
e
Note
• The camera view window disappears when
you start sewing.
• When sewing thick fabrics, the needle drop
position indicated in the screen may differ
from the actual position.
a
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
100
Before using the sensor functions, carefully read “Utility Stitches” chapter to familiarize yourself with the
machine operations.
The sensor functions are performed using the sensor pen.
Sensor Function Area
When using the sensor pen with utility stitches, the
operations may differ depending on the area to be
touched.
Specifying the Guideline Marker
Position With the Sensor Pen
The sewing position will be indicated by a red
guideline marker.
The position of the guideline marker can be
adjusted to your desired location.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press .
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
a Center needle
position
Sewing position for stitch patterns sewn
with the center needle position
b Setting area Area 3.5 mm to the left and right of a.
Touch this area with the sensor pen to
specify a position.
Area 7 mm to the left and 12 mm to the
right of a, when positioning the
guideline marker.
c Adjustment area
(right)
Touch: With each touch, the setting
increases by 0.5 mm. This allows fine
adjustments to be made after touching
within b to specify a position.
Long touch: After touching b to specify
a position or adjusting the position by
touching within c or d, long touch to
apply the setting.
d Adjustment area
(left)
Touch: With each touch, the setting
decreases by 0.5 mm. This allows fine
adjustments to be made after touching
within b to specify a position.
Long touch: Apply the setting in the
same way as a long touch within c.
e The sensor pen touch range extends approximately 200 mm
(7-7/8 inches) toward you from the needle drop point and 130
mm (approx. 5 inches) to either side of the middle (center)
needle position.
Memo
• There are borderline areas between setting
area and adjustment areas, which allow you
to set quickly to the most decreased/
increased value.
• The borderline areas are respectively 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) wide when
positioning the guideline marker, and 10
mm (approx. 3/8 inch) wide in other cases.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Sewing Basics
101
2
c
Press .
→ The guideline marker position setting screen appears
and the guideline marker flashes.
d
With the sensor pen, touch the location to
be specified as the guideline marker
position.
→ The machine’s guideline marker moves to the
touched position and flashes.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the guideline marker
position setting screen.
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the
screen is updated according to the specified setting.
→ Press
to stop specifying a setting with the
sensor pen.
e
Press to apply the guideline marker
position setting.
* The setting can also be applied by a long touch of
the sensor pen within the adjustment area.
→ The stitch selection screen appears again, and the
setting in the guideline marker scale changes to the
setting specified with the sensor pen.
→ The guideline marker stops flashing.
Note
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press , and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
Memo
• The position can be precisely adjusted by
touching the adjustment areas with the
sensor pen.
• When using the sensor pen to specify the
guideline marker position, it may not be
possible to exactly specify the desired
location. In this case, use either of the
following operations to make fine
adjustments.
- Touch an adjustment area with the sensor
pen to adjust the position in 0.5 mm
increments.
- Adjust the position with the guideline
marker scale shown in step
e.
Note
• If you set the needle drop position, the
stitch width or stitch position after
specifying the guideline marker position, the
guideline marker may move while setting.
The guideline marker moves back to the
specified position after the needle drop
position, stitch width or stitch position is set
and the original screen appears.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
102
Specifying the Needle Drop
Position With the Sensor Pen
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press .
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
c
Press .
→ The reference position setting screen appears, and
the red guideline marker flashes at the machine’s
sewing position.
d
With the sensor pen, touch the location to
be specified as the needle drop position.
→ The guideline marker moves to the touched position
and flashes.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the reference position
setting screen.
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the
screen is updated according to the specified setting.
a Press to return the needle drop position to its
default setting.
b Press to stop specifying a setting with the sensor
pen.
Note
• If is not available, the sewing
reference position cannot be specified with
the selected stitch pattern. Select a different
stitch pattern.
Note
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press , and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
Memo
• The position can be precisely adjusted by
touching the adjustment areas with the
sensor pen.
• To change the setting, use the sensor pen
to touch the desired location for the
reference position.
a
b
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Sewing Basics
103
2
e
Press to apply the reference position
setting.
* The setting can also be applied by extended touch in
the adjustment area with the sensor pen.
→ The needle moves to the specified position to start
sewing.
→ The stitch selection screen appears again, and the
stitch width changes to the setting specified with the
sensor pen.
→ The guideline marker stops flashing.
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify
the Stitching Width and Stitch
Position
The zigzag width and “L/R Shift” value can be
specified.
a Original stitching width/position
b Adjusted stitching width/position
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press .
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
c
Press .
→ The stitching width setting screen appears, and the
guideline marker flashes at the present left side of
the stitch width.
d
With the sensor pen, touch the first point
for the stitching width.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the stitching width
setting screen.
→ The guideline marker moves to the touched position
and flashes.
Note
•If is not available, the stitching width
cannot be specified with the selected stitch
pattern. Select a different stitch pattern.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
104
e
Press to apply the first point of the
stitching width.
* The setting can also be applied by applying an
extended touch in the adjustment area with the
sensor pen.
f
With the sensor pen, touch the second
point for the stitching width.
→ The distance from the left reference line to the
touched position appears in the stitching width
setting screen.
→ The stitch preview on the upper left side of the
screen is updated according to the specified setting.
→ The guideline marker moves to the touched position
and flashes.
g
Press to apply the second point of the
stitching width.
* The setting can also be applied by long touching an
adjustment area with the sensor pen.
→ The needle moves to the specified position to start
sewing.
→ The stitch selection screen appears again, and the
stitch width and “L/R Shift” change according to the
settings specified with the sensor pen.
Note
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press , and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
Memo
• The position can be precisely adjusted by
touching the adjustment areas with the
sensor pen.
Note
• If the distance between the specified first
and second points is wider than the
maximum stitch width for the selected stitch
pattern, the second point cannot be
specified. Specify a location closer to the
first point.
• If the distance between the specified first
and second points is narrower than the
minimum stitch width for the selected stitch
pattern, the second point cannot be
specified. Specify a location further away
from the first point.
Note
• With multiple patterns that have been
combined, the specified stitching width is
applied to the pattern with the largest stitch
width. With patterns other than combined
patterns, the stitch width is adjusted to the
stitching width specified for the pattern with
the largest stitch width.
• With multiple patterns that have been
combined, the settings specified for the
stitch width and “L/R Shift” in the stitch
selection screen are for the first pattern to
be sewn. The value may differ from the
stitch width setting.
• With twin needle sewing, the stitching width
is specified with the left needle as the
reference.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Sewing Basics
105
2
Using the Sensor Pen to Specify
the Sewing End Point
Before start sewing, test the pattern first from steps
a to c to see if the stitch can be used with this
function. Before starting to sew, mark the end
point.
a
Start sewing after a stitch has been selected,
and then stop the machine when the
desired sewing end point enters the sensor
pen touch range.
b
Press .
→ The sensor functions screen appears.
c
Press .
→ The sewing end point setting screen appears.
Note
• In order to specify the end point of a longer
piece of fabric more accurately, use the
sensor pen to touch the end point twice. Be
sure to touch the same point.
• Before starting to sew, mark the end point
of this longer piece of fabric.
Note
• If the needle drop point is being specified
with the sensor pen within 70 mm (approx.
2-3/4 inches) from the sewing end point, the
machine will not require the second touch.
After completing step
d, continue with
step
h. However, the actual sewing end
point may be slightly different than the
specified location.
In order to specify the location accurately,
stop the machine at a location more than
70 mm (approx. 2-3/4 inches) away from
the sewing end point before specifying it for
the first time.
Memo
• If the needle drop point is greater than
100 mm (approx. 4 inches) from the
selected ending point using the sensor pen,
a more accurate position can be specified
the second time that the point is touched.
Note
• If is not available, the sewing end
point cannot be specified with the selected
stitch pattern. Select a different stitch
pattern.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
106
d
With the sensor pen, touch the location to
be specified as the sewing end point.
→ The distance from the current needle position to the
touched location appears.
a It shows how many times you need to touch the
sewing end point, once or twice.
b Press to erase the specified sewing end point.
c Press to begin sewing at the beginning of the
pattern.
d Press to stop specifying a setting with the sensor
pen.
e Press when sewing the same distance as the
previous time to recall the previous setting.
→ See “Reusing the Previous Setting” on page 108.
f Press to select whether or not sewing is ended
with a complete pattern.
→ See “Stitch End Mode Key” on page 106.
Stitch End Mode Key
Touch once Touch twice
b
d
a
c
e
f
Note
• The displayed distance is not the length of a
straight line connecting the current needle
position and the location touched with the
sensor pen. It is the length of a
perpendicular intersection for the location
touched with the sensor pen and the sewing
line.
a Displayed distance
• The following error message appears if the
area outside of the sensor pen touch range
is touched. Press , and then touch
within the sensor pen touch range.
• When sewing with this setting, be sure to
gently hold the fabric and feed it straight.
• When using the sensor pen to specify the
sewing end point, be sure to hold the pen in
the same way as when it was calibrated,
otherwise the actual end point may be
different from the point that you specified.
• For best results, sew test stitching using the
same material and stitch pattern as those in
the actual project.
The end of stitching is not adjusted.
When the end point is reached, sewing
stops immediately, even if the stitch
pattern is not complete.
The length of the stitch pattern is
adjusted so that sewing will stop at the
specified end point with a complete
pattern.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
Sewing Basics
107
2
e
Press , and then continue sewing.
* The setting can also be applied by extending the
touching with the sensor pen in the adjustment area
with the sensor pen.
→ When a sewing end point setting is specified,
appears in the upper-left corner of the screen.
→ The machine automatically stops with the needle in
the fabric, at about half the distance to the specified
sewing end point, and the sewing end point setting
screen appears.
f
With the sensor pen, touch again the
location to be specified as the sewing end
point.
→ The distance from the current needle position to the
touched location appears.
g
Press to apply the sewing end point
setting.
* The setting can also be applied by extending the
touching with the sensor pen in the adjustment area
with the sensor pen.
h
Start sewing again.
* The machine stops at the specified end point
automatically.
Note
• The stitch end mode key is not available
with the following situations.
- When only is shown. The
adjustment of the stitch end is not
available with the selected stitch, and only
one icon will be shown.
- When the stitch end mode key is grayed
out.
- When specifying the sewing end point at
the point that needs adjustment more
than 20% of the length of a pattern, to
finish a pattern completely.
• In order to end sewing with a complete
pattern, we recommend reducing the size of
the pattern. Sewing with a long pattern may
not end with a complete pattern.
Note
• By using the sensor pen to touch the
sewing end point twice, the distance will be
accurately specified. Be sure to touch the
same point.
• The following error message appears if the
location touched the second time is
different than the location touched the first
time. Touch the correct location.
• The stitch end mode key cannot be used
when specifying the sewing end point for
the second time.
USING SENSOR FUNCTIONS WITH SEWING STITCH
108
■ Reusing the Previous Setting
When using the same fabric and pattern to sew the
same length, the previous setting can be used again,
instead of using the sensor pen to specify the sewing
end point each time.
To use the previous setting, repeat steps
a through
c then press in step d, instead of using the
sensor pen.
* If was pressed, it is unnecessary to specify
the sewing end point for the second time. Continue
with step
h to continue sewing until the machine
automatically stops at the sewing end point.
* Be sure to press to begin sewing at the
beginning of the stitch pattern.
Note
• This resume function will only repeat the
sewing distance that has been assigned
within the 200 mm (approx. 8 inches)
distance from the needle point to the
sewing end point.
If you are already sewing and you stop the
machine to specify the ending point, when
pressing
to duplicate the previous
setting the machine will only repeat the
distance from where you stop the machine
to the ending point.
You can change the sewing end point after
pressing by touching the new end
point with the sensor pen. For a more
accurate result, however, it is
recommended to specify the end point
again from the beginning.
• The sewing end point cannot be recalled in
the following situations. (The key is not
available.)
- When the machine has been turned off.
- When a pattern is changed, added or
deleted.
- When the stitch length is changed.
- When a pattern is flipped vertically.
- When the dual feed foot is attached/
detached.
- When the feed position lever of the dual
feed foot is raised/lowered.
• To cancel the previous setting, press
. Continue the procedure from step
d.
• The sewing end point can be recalled;
however, if the sewing conditions have
changed, for example, a different fabric is
used, the sewing end point must be
specified again from the beginning.
Chapter 3
Utility Stitches
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES............................. 110
■ Utility Stitch LCD Screen ....................................................... 110
■ Key Functions......................................................................... 111
■ Stitch Selection Screens..........................................................112
Selecting a Stitch.....................................................................113
■ Using the Mirror Image Key .................................................. 113
■ Returning to the Beginning of the Stitch................................. 114
■ Sewing Continuous/Single Stitch Sewing................................ 114
■ Using the Image Key............................................................... 114
Saving Your Stitch Settings .....................................................115
■ Saving Settings........................................................................115
■ Retrieving Saved Settings........................................................ 115
SEWING THE STITCHES........................................ 116
Straight Stitches ......................................................................116
■ Changing the Needle Position (Left or Middle Needle Position
Stitches Only) ........................................................................ 118
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle Plate or
Bobbin Cover (with Mark)...................................................... 118
■ Aligning the Fabric with the Vertical Stitch
Alignment “V” Foot................................................................119
■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate
and the Straight Stitch Foot.................................................... 119
■ Basting ................................................................................... 120
Dart Seam ...............................................................................121
Gathering................................................................................121
Flat Fell Seam..........................................................................122
Pintuck....................................................................................123
Zigzag Stitches .......................................................................124
■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ...................................... 124
■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ........................................... 124
■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt) .................................................. 124
■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ..................................124
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a Zigzag Stitch) ................. 125
Elastic Zigzag Stitches ............................................................125
■ Tape Attaching ......................................................................125
■ Overcasting............................................................................ 126
Overcasting ............................................................................126
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G” ..................................... 126
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J” ....................................... 127
■ Overcasting Using the Side Cutter (Sold Separately).............. 127
■ When Sewing Straight Stitches While Using
the Side Cutter (Sold Separately)............................................ 129
Quilting ..................................................................................129
■ Piecing ..................................................................................131
■ Quilting ................................................................................. 131
■ Appliqué ................................................................................ 132
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches ...................................................133
■ Free Motion Quilting.............................................................. 133
■
Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion Echo Quilting Foot “E”
..... 137
Blind Hem Stitches .................................................................138
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of the Hem Fold .................140
■ If the Needle does not Catch the Hem Fold ........................... 140
Appliqué ................................................................................141
■ Appliqué Sharp Curves .......................................................... 141
■ Appliqué Corners ................................................................... 141
Shelltuck Stitches ...................................................................142
Scallop Stitches ......................................................................142
Crazy Quilting ........................................................................143
Smocking Stitches ..................................................................143
Fagoting .................................................................................144
Tape or Elastic Attaching .......................................................145
Heirloom ............................................................................... 146
■ Hemstitching (1) (Daisy Stitch) ..............................................146
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))........................................146
■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))........................................147
Zigzag Couching .................................................................... 147
■ Prepare for the Zigzag Couching ............................................147
■ Sewing Zigzag Couching.........................................................148
One-step Buttonholes ............................................................ 149
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics ...........................................................152
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do Not Fit into the Button
Holder Plate ...........................................................................152
Four-step Buttonholes ............................................................ 153
■ Darning ..................................................................................154
Bar Tacks ............................................................................... 155
■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics......................................................156
Button Sewing ....................................................................... 156
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons........................................................157
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button ............................................157
Eyelet ..................................................................................... 157
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
..... 158
Zipper Insertion ..................................................................... 159
■ Centered Zipper .....................................................................159
■ Inserting a Side Zipper ...........................................................160
Edge Sewing .......................................................................... 162
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
110
■ Utility Stitch LCD Screen
Press a key with your finger to select the stitch pattern, to select a machine function, or to select an
operation indicated on the key.
* All key functions of the LCD are explained in the “Key Functions” table on the following page.
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Needle position
setting display
Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop position.
Single needle/down position
Single needle/up position
Twin needle/down position
Twin needle/up position
65, 95
b Presser foot display Shows the presser foot code. Attach the presser foot indicated in this
display before sewing.
70
c Selected stitch
display
Shows the name and code number of the selected stitch. 113
d Stitch preview Shows a preview of the selected stitch. When shown at 100%, the stitch
appears in the screen at nearly its actual size. Press to display the
stitch preview and the camera view together to check how the stitch will be
sewn on the actual fabric.
98, 113
e Pattern display size Shows the approximate size of the pattern selected.
: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern
: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern
* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type of
fabric and thread that is used.
113
f Stitch selection
screen
Press the key for the pattern you want to sew. Use
to change to different stitch groups.
113
g
Page key
Press or , to move the pages of stitch selection screen, one page
at a time. You can scroll up and down the pages faster by touching the
screen.
112
a
b
c
d
f
e
g
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
Utility Stitches
111
3
■ Key Functions
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Utility stitch key Press this key to select a straight stitch, zigzag stitch, buttonhole, blind hem
stitch, or other stitches commonly used in garment construction.
113
b Character/Decorative
stitch key
Press this key to select character or decorative stitch patterns. 170
c Image key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern. 114
d Free motion mode
key
Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.
The presser foot is raised to an appropriate height and the feed dog is lowered
for free motion quilting.
133
e Mirror image key Press this key to create a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern. If the key
display is light gray, a mirror image of the selected stitch pattern cannot be
sewn.
113
f Needle mode
selection key (single/
double)
Press this key to select twin needle sewing mode. The sewing mode changes
between single needle mode and twin needle mode each time you press the
key. If the key display is light gray, the selected stitch pattern cannot be sewn
in the twin needle mode.
65
g Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the stitch. 114
h Single/Repeat sewing
key
Press this key to choose single stitches or continuous stitches. 114
i Sensor function key Press this key to use the sensor function. 100
j Edge sewing key Using the built-in camera, press this key to measure the width of the area from
the edge of the fabric to the stitch and set the camera for edge sewing.
162
k Retrieve key Press this key to retrieve a saved pattern. 115
l Manual memory key Change the stitch pattern settings (zigzag width and stitch length, thread
tension, automatic thread cutting or automatic reinforcement stitching, etc.),
then save them by pressing this key. Five sets of settings can be saved for a
single stitch pattern.
115
m Reset key Press this key to return the selected stitch pattern saved settings to the default
settings.
90-92
n Thread tension key Shows the automatic thread tension setting of the currently selected stitch
pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to change the thread tension
settings.
92
o “L/R Shift” key
Press to shift the stitch pattern to the right or press to shift the pattern
to the left. This feature is not available for all patterns. Only those applicable
will be shifted. The machine default setting is highlighted.
91
a
e
j
k
l
m
n
r
q
b c
d
g
f
i
h
op
t
s
u
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
112
■ Stitch Selection Screens
There are 6 categories of Utility Stitches.
p Stitch width and
stitch length key
Shows the zigzag width and stitch length settings of the currently selected
stitch pattern. You can use the plus and minus keys to adjust the zigzag width
and stitch length settings.
90
q Guideline marker key Press this key to display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The
guideline marker makes it easier to align stitches with the fabric edge or other
marker on the fabric.
94
r Pivot key Press this key to select the pivot function. When the pivot function is selected,
stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot
automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is
automatically lowered.
• If this key appears as , the pivot function cannot be used.
95
s Automatic thread
cutting key
Press this key to set the automatic thread cutting function. Set the automatic
thread cutting function before sewing to have the machine automatically sew
reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on the
pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches) and trim the threads after
sewing.
93
t Automatic
reinforcement stitch
key
Press this key to use the automatic reinforcement stitching (reverse stitching)
setting. If you select this setting before sewing, the machine will automatically
sew reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on
the pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches).
85
u Thread color change
key
Press this key to change the thread color displayed on the screen. 114
Straight/Overcasting Decorative Stitches Heirloom Stitches
Buttonholes/Bar tacks Multi-directional Sewing Quilting Stitches
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
Utility Stitches
113
3
Selecting a Stitch
a
Turn the main power to ON and press
to display the utility stitches.
→ Either “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight
stitch (Middle)” is selected, depending on the setting
selected in the settings screen.
b
Use to select
the category you want.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view previous page.
a Preview of the selected stitch
b Stitch selection screen
c Percentage size of view
c
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
■ Using the Mirror Image Key
Depending on the type of utility stitch you select,
you may be able to sew a horizontal mirror image of
the stitch.
If is lit when you select a stitch, it will be
possible to make a mirror image of the stitch.
Press to create a horizontal mirror image of the
selected stitch.
The key will display as .
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
a
b
c
Note
• If is light gray after you select a stitch,
you cannot create a horizontal mirror image
of the selected stitch due to the type of
stitch or type of presser foot recommended
(this is true of buttonholes, multi-directional
sewing, and others).
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
114
■ Returning to the Beginning of the
Stitch
Even if you stopped stitching while sewing, you can
return to the beginning of the stitch pattern. This
function is useful after trial sewing or when the
stitching is sewn incorrectly.
Press before start sewing, to return to the
beginning of the stitch.
a Stop stitching
b Re-start stitching
■ Sewing Continuous/Single Stitch
Sewing
Press to select continuous sewing or single
stitch sewing.
■ Using the Image Key
You can display an image of the selected stitch. You
can check and change the colors of the image of the
screen.
a
Press .
→ An image of the selected stitch is displayed.
b
Press to change the thread color of
the stitch on the screen.
You can select from 4 colors: blue, red, black or
yellow.
* Press to display an enlarged image of the
stitch.
a Stitch screen
c
Press to go back to the original
screen.
Memo
• The color changes every time you press
.
Note
• If stitches are wider or larger than display,
press darkened arrows to move the stitch
pattern for better visibility.
a
SELECTING UTILITY STITCHES
Utility Stitches
115
3
Saving Your Stitch Settings
The settings for the zigzag stitch width, stitch
length, thread tension, automatic thread cutting,
automatic reinforcement stitching, etc., are preset
in the machine for each stitch. However, if you
have specific settings that you wish to reuse later
for a stitch, you can change the settings so that
they can be saved for that stitch. Five sets of
settings can be saved for a single stitch.
■ Saving Settings
a
Select a stitch. (Example: )
b
Specify your preferred settings.
c
Press .
→ The settings are saved and the original screen
automatically appears.
■ Retrieving Saved Settings
a
Select a stitch.
b
Press .
c
Press the numbered key of the settings to be
retrieved.
* Press to return to the original screen
without retrieving settings.
a Numbered keys
d
Press .
→ The selected settings are retrieved, and the original
screen automatically appears.
Memo
• If you try to save settings when there are
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,
the message “The pockets are full. Delete a
pattern” will appear. Close the message
and delete a setting referring to page 115.
Memo
• When a stitch is selected, the last settings
retrieved are displayed. The last settings
retrieved are retained even if the machine
was turned off or a different stitch was
selected.
Memo
• To save new settings when there are
already 5 sets of settings saved for a stitch,
press . Press the numbered key of the
setting to be deleted. Press , press
and then . The new setting will
be saved in place of the recently deleted
setting.
• You can delete all the saved settings by
pressing .
a
SEWING THE STITCHES
116
Straight Stitches
a Left needle position
b Middle needle position
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
* Attach presser foot “N” when you select .
SEWING THE STITCHES
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Straight stitch (Left)
Straight stitch (Left)
Straight stitch (Middle)
Straight stitch (Middle)
Triple stretch stitch
Stem stitch
Decorative stitch
Basting stitch
Memo
• If the selected stitch has a double mark “ ”
at the top of the key display, you can sew
reverse stitches holding the “Reverse
Stitch” button (see page 85).
• If the selected stitch has a dot mark “ ” at
the top of the key display, you can sew
reinforcement stitches holding the
“Reinforcement Stitch” button.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
117
3
c
Hold the thread tail and fabric with your
left hand, and rotate the handwheel with
your right hand to insert the needle into the
fabric.
a Sewing start position
d
Lower the presser foot, and hold the
“Reverse Stitch” button or the
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew 3-4
stitches.
→ The machine sews reverse stitches or reinforcement
stitches.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to sew
forward.
a Reverse stitches or reinforcement stitches
→ The machine will begin sewing slowly.
f
When sewing is completed, hold the
“Reverse Stitch” button or the
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew 3-4
reverse stitches or reinforcement stitches at
the end of the seam.
g
After sewing, press the “Thread Cutter”
button to trim the threads.
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
Memo
• When the automatic thread cutting and
automatic reinforcement stitch keys on the
screen are selected, reverse stitches or
reinforcement stitches will be sewn
automatically at the beginning of sewing
when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed.
Press the “Reverse Stitch” button or the
“Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew
reverse stitches or reinforcement stitches
and trim the thread automatically at the end
of sewing.
SEWING THE STITCHES
118
■ Changing the Needle Position (Left
or Middle Needle Position Stitches
Only)
When you select left or middle needle position
stitches, you can use and in the stitch
width display to change the position of the needle.
Match the distance from the right edge of the presser
foot to the needle with the stitch width, then align
the edge of the presser foot with the edge of the
fabric during sewing for an attractive finish.
a Stitch width
Example: Left/Middle needle position stitches
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on
the Needle Plate or Bobbin Cover
(with Mark)
While sewing, align the edge of the fabric with the
16 mm (approx. 5/8 inch) mark on the needle plate
or bobbin cover (with mark) depending on the
needle position (left or middle (center) needle
position stitches only).
For stitches with a left needle position
(Stitch width: 0.0 mm)
a Seam
b Presser foot
c Centimeters
d Inches
e Needle plate
f 16 mm (5/8 inch)
For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
(Stitch width: 3.5 mm)
a Seam
b Presser foot
c Inches
d Bobbin cover (with mark)
e 16 mm (5/8 inch)
12.0 mm
(approx.
1/2 inch)
8.5 mm
(approx.
11/32
inch)
6.5 mm
(approx.
1/4 inch)
5.0 mm
(approx.
3/16 inch)
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
119
3
■ Aligning the Fabric with the Vertical
Stitch Alignment “V” Foot
Sew while keeping the right edge of the fabric
aligned with a desired position of markings on the
vertical stitch alignment “V” foot.
You can also use the vertical stitch alignment “V”
foot for setting a stitch width using the built-in
camera (see page 162).
a Seam
b Vertical stitch alignment “V” foot
c Markings
■ Using the Straight Stitch Needle
Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot
The straight stitch needle plate and the straight stitch
foot can only be used for straight stitches (middle
needle position stitches). Use the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot when sewing
thin fabrics or when sewing small pieces which tend
to sink into the hole of the regular needle plate
during sewing. The straight stitch foot is perfect to
reduce puckering on lightweight fabrics. The small
opening on the foot provides support for the fabric
as the needle travels through the fabric.
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle and turn the main power to OFF
or press to lock all keys and buttons.
b
Remove the needle and the presser foot
holder (see page 71 through 75).
c
Remove the flat bed attachment or the
embroidery unit if either are attached.
d
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you.
a Needle plate cover
e
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.
a Bobbin case
f
Use the multi-purpose screwdriver included
with the machine to unscrew and remove
the regular needle plate.
* Use the multi-purpose screw driver setting the
position to “2”. (see page 24)
g
Set the straight stitch needle plate in place
and use the multi-purpose screwdriver to
tighten the plate.
a Round hole
a 2.25 mm (1/8 inch)
b 4.25 mm (3/16 inch)
c 6.25 mm (1/4 inch)
d 8.5 mm (5/16 inch)
CAUTION
• Always use the straight stitch foot in
combination with the straight stitch needle
plate.
SEWING THE STITCHES
120
h
Insert the bobbin case in its original
position, and then attach the needle plate
cover.
i
After reinstalling the needle plate cover,
select any of the straight stitches.
j
Insert needle and attach the straight stitch
foot.
a Notch
b Pin
k
Press to unlock all keys and buttons,
and then start sewing.
* After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot, and reinstall
the regular needle plate, the needle plate cover and
the presser foot “J”.
■ Basting
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Keep pressing the “Reverse Stitch” button
or the “Reinforcement Stitch” button to
sew 4 stitches of reinforcement stitches,
then press “Start/Stop” button to continue
sewing.
c
Sew while keeping the fabric straight.
d
End the basting with reinforcement stitches.
Note
• Align the two screw holes on the needle
plate with the two holes on the machine.
Use the multi-purpose screw driver
included with the machine to secure the
screws in the needle plate.
Note
• Selecting other stitches will cause an error
message to be displayed.
Memo
• When using the straight stitch needle plate,
many straight stitches become middle
needle position stitches. If a straight stitch
is selected that is not applicable for use
when the straight stitch needle plate is
attached, an error message will be
displayed to prevent the use of this stitch.
You cannot change the needle position
using the width display.
• Always secure the needle plate before
inserting the bobbin case into its original
position.
CAUTION
• Slowly rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before sewing and make
sure that the needle is not contacting the
straight stitch foot and straight stitch needle
plate.
Memo
• To prevent puckering on fine fabrics, use a
fine needle, size 75/11, and a short stitch
length. For heavier fabrics, use a heavier
needle, size 90/14, and longer stitches.
Memo
• When you use the basting stitch for
gathering, do not use a reinforcement stitch
at the beginning; you should lift the presser
foot, rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), pull up the bobbin
thread and pull a length of top and bobbin
thread out from the rear of the machine.
• You can set the stitch length between 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm (approx.
1-3/16 inches)
a Between 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm
(approx. 1-3/16 inches)
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
121
3
Dart Seam
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew a reverse stitch at the beginning of the
dart and then sew from the wide end to the
other end without stretching the fabric.
a Basting
c
Cut the thread at the end leaving 50 mm
(approx. 1-15/16 inches), and then tie both
ends together.
* Do not sew a reverse stitch at the end.
d
Insert the ends of the thread into the dart
with a hand sewing needle.
e
Iron the dart to one side so that it is flat.
Gathering
Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and the thread tension to
approximately 2.0 (weaker tension).
* If you press after pressing and
then , the stitch length will be set
automatically to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and the
thread tension will be automatically set to 2.0.
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches) (see page
61).
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)
SEWING THE STITCHES
122
d
Sew two rows of straight stitches parallel to
the seam line, then trim excess thread
leaving 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches).
a Seam line
b 10 to 15 mm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)
c About 50 mm (approx. 1-15/16 inches)
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, then tie the
threads.
f
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
g
Sew on the seam line and remove the
basting stitch.
Flat Fell Seam
Use for reinforcing seams and finishing edges
neatly.
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew the finish line, then cut half of the seam
allowance from the side on which the flat
fell seam will lie.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reverse stitches
will be sewn automatically at the beginning of
sewing. Press the “Reinforcement Stitch” button to
sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the thread
automatically at the end of sewing.
a About 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch)
b Wrong side
c
Spread the fabric out along the finish line.
a Finish line
b Wrong side
d
Lay both seam allowances on the side of the
shorter seam (cut seam) and iron them.
a Wrong side
e
Fold the longer seam allowance around the
shorter one, and sew the edge of the fold.
a Wrong side
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
123
3
Finished flat fell seam
a Surface
Pintuck
a
Mark along the folds on the wrong side of
the fabric.
a Wrong side
b
Turn the fabric and iron the folded parts
only.
a Surface
c
Select and attach presser foot “I”.
d
Sew a straight stitch along the fold.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reverse stitches
will be sewn automatically at the beginning of
sewing. Press the “Reinforcement Stitch” button to
sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the thread
automatically at the end of sewing.
a Width for pintuck
b Wrong side
c Surface
e
Iron the folds in the same direction.
SEWING THE STITCHES
124
Zigzag Stitches
Zigzag stitches are useful for overcasting,
appliqué, patchwork, and many other
applications.
Select a stitch, and attach presser foot “J”.
If the stitch which you select has a double mark
“ ” at the top of the key display, you can sew
reverse stitches by holding the “Reverse Stitch”
button. (see page 85)
If the stitch which you select has a dot mark “ ” at
the top of the key display, you can sew
reinforcement stitches by holding the
“Reinforcement Stitch” button (see page 85).
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
■ Overcasting (Using a Zigzag Stitch)
Sew the overcasting along the edge of the fabric
while positioning the right-hand side needle drop
point just outside the edge of the fabric.
a Needle drop position
■ Appliqué (Using a Zigzag Stitch)
Attach the appliqué material using a temporary
spray adhesive or basting, and then sew it.
* Sew a zigzag stitch while positioning the right-hand
side needle drop point just outside the edge of the
fabric.
■ Patchwork (for Crazy Quilt)
Turn back the desired width of fabric and position it
over the lower fabric, then sew so that the stitch
bridges both pieces of fabric.
■ Sewing Curves (Using a Zigzag
Stitch)
Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine
stitch. Sew slowly, keeping the seams parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Zigzag stitch (Left)
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
125
3
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a
Zigzag Stitch)
a
Remove the bobbin cover from the machine
(see page 59).
b
Thread the gimp thread through the hole in
the cord guide bobbin cover from top to
bottom. Position the thread in the notch at
the back of the cord guide bobbin cover.
a Notch
b Gimp thread
c
Snap the cord guide bobbin cover into
place, making sure that the gimp thread can
be fed freely.
* Make sure there are no restrictions when feeding the
thread.
d
Set the zigzag width from 2.0-2.5 mm
(approx. 1/16 - 3/32 inch).
e
Attach presser foot “N”.
f
Position the fabric right side up on top of
the cord and place the cord to the rear of
the machine under the presser foot.
a Fabric (right side)
b Gimp thread
g
Lower the presser foot and start sewing to
make a decorative finish.
Elastic Zigzag Stitches
Use elastic zigzag stitches for tape attaching,
overcasting, darning, or a wide variety of other
uses.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach presser foot “J”.
■ Tape Attaching
While stretching the tape flat, sew it to the fabric.
a Tape
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
2 steps elastic zigzag
2 steps elastic zigzag
3 steps elastic zigzag
SEWING THE STITCHES
126
■ Overcasting
Use this stitch to sew overcasting on the edge of
stretch fabrics. Sew the overcasting along the edge
of the fabric while positioning the right-hand side
needle drop point just outside the edge of the fabric.
Overcasting
Use for the edge of seams in skirts or trousers, and
the edge of all cuttings. Use presser foot “G”,
presser foot “J”, or the side cutter attachment
depending on the kind of overcasting stitch you
select.
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “G”
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “G”.
b
Lower the presser foot so that the presser
foot guide is set flush against the edge of the
fabric.
c
Sew along the presser foot guide.
a Guide
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sewing
when you are finished, and raise the presser
foot and needle to remove the fabric by
pulling it back.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
CAUTION
• After the stitch width is adjusted, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may break and cause injury.
a The needle should not touch the center bar
• If the presser foot is raised to its highest level,
the needle may strike the presser foot.
CAUTION
• Pull the fabric to the back of the machine after
finished sewing. By pulling the fabric to the
front or side, the center bar of the presser foot
“G” may break.
a Center bar
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
127
3
■ Overcasting Using Presser Foot “J”
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew with the needle dropping slightly off
the edge of the fabric.
a Needle drop position
■ Overcasting Using the Side Cutter
(Sold Separately)
By using the side cutter, you can do overcasting
while cutting the fabric.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Follow the steps on page 70 to remove the
presser foot.
c
Thread the needle (see page 62).
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
Overcasting stitch
Single diamond overcast
Single diamond overcast
Note
• Fine adjustment of the stitching on the
fabric can be done with “L/R Shift”. Before
sewing your project, be sure to sew trial
stitches using the same conditions as in the
actual project.
Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch
fabrics, decrease the pressure of the
presser foot.
CAUTION
• Recommended stitches are noted “S” in the
lower right corner, therefore sure to only
select one of these stitches listed below. Using
another stitch may cause the needle to hit the
presser foot and break, possibly causing injury.
Note
• Thread the needle manually when using the
side cutter, or only attach the side cutter
after threading the needle using the
“Automatic Threading” button.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
With side cutter
With side cutter
With side cutter
With side cutter
With side cutter
SEWING THE STITCHES
128
d
Position the fork on the side cutter’s
operating lever onto the needle clamp
screw.
a Needle clamp screw
b Operating lever
e
Position the side cutter so that the side
cutter pin is aligned with the notch in the
presser foot holder, and then lower the
presser foot.
a Notch in presser foot holder
b Pin
→ The side cutter is attached.
f
Raise the presser foot and pull out a long
section of the upper thread. Pass it below
the presser foot and pull it out in the fabric
feed direction.
a Presser foot
b Upper thread
g
Make a cut of approximately 20 mm
(approx. 3/4 inch) in the fabric.
a 20 mm (approx. 3/4 inch)
h
Position the fabric so that the right side of
the cut is on top of the guide plate and the
left side of the cut is underneath the presser
foot.
a Guide plate (lower knife)
b Presser foot
c Upper thread
i
Lower the presser foot and start.
→ A seam allowance is cut while the stitching is sewn.
Memo
• Make sure that the fork of the operating
lever is set onto the needle screw firmly.
Memo
• If the fabric is not positioned correctly, the
fabric will not be cut.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
129
3
■ When Sewing Straight Stitches While
Using the Side Cutter (Sold
Separately)
The seam margin should be approximately 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch).
a Seam margin
Quilting
You can make beautiful quilts quickly and easily
with this machine. When making a quilt, you will
find it convenient to use the knee lifter and foot
controller to free your hands for other tasks
(“Using the Multi-Function Foot Controller (Only
for supplied models)” on page 83 and /or “Using
the Knee Lifter” on page 96).
The 30 quilting stitches Q-01 through Q-30 and
the utility stitches with “P” or “Q” indicated on
their key are useful for quilting.
The “P” or “Q” at the bottom of the key display
indicates that these stitches are intended for (“Q”)
quilting and (“P”) piecing.
• When using the side cutter, sew
between low and mid-speed and do
not touch the knives or operation
lever of the side cutter while sewing
to avoid equipment damage or
injury.
a Guide plate (lower knife)
b Upper knife
c Operation lever
Note
• If the width has been adjusted, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the
side cutter. If the needle touches the side
cutter, it might cause the needle to break.
Memo
• The fabric will not be cut if the whole fabric
is simply spread out underneath the presser
foot guide plate. Set the fabric as explained
in step
h from the previous section, and
then start sewing.
• One layer of 13 oz. denim can be cut.
• Clean the side cutter after use to avoid
having dust and scraps of thread build up in
the cutter area.
• Add a small amount of oil as required to the
cutting edge of the cutter.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecing stitch (Left)
Hand-look quilting (Middle)
Basting stitch
SEWING THE STITCHES
130
Stem stitch
Quilting appliqué zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Zigzag stitch (Left)
2 steps elastic zigzag
3 steps elastic zigzag
Quilting appliqué stitch
Shell tuck edge
Blanket stitch
Quilting stippling
Overcasting stitch
Tape attaching
Serpentine stitch
Feather stitch
Fagoting cross stitch
Couching stitch
Patchwork double overlock stitch
Smocking stitch
Rick-rack stitch
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitch
Hemstitching
Hemstitching
Single diamond
overcast
Overcasting stitch
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecing stitch (Left)
Hand-look quilting
Quilting appliqué zigzag stitch
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stippling
Memo
• When a stitch pattern in the Quilting
Stitches category (Q-02 through Q-30) is
selected, a finer stitch width can be set than
is available with stitch patterns in other
categories.
For example: Stitch Q-03 has 57 needle
positions and stitch Q-19 has 29 width
selections.
Note
• The width range of stitch setting is only
available in the Quilting stitch “Q” quilting
category.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
131
3
■ Piecing
Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called
piecing. When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make
sure the seam allowance is 6.5 mm (approx.
1/4 inch).
a
Select or and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Align the edge of the fabric with the edge of
the presser foot, and start sewing.
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
along the left edge of the presser foot with
selected, the width should be set to 5.50 mm
(approx. 7/32 inch).
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
along the left edge of the presser foot with
selected, the width should be set to 1.50 mm
(approx. 1/32 inch).
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
* To change the needle position, use or in
the width display.
■ Quilting
Sewing the quilt top, batting, and backing together is
called quilting. You can sew the quilt with the dual
feed foot to keep the quilt top, batting, and backing
from sliding. The dual feed foot has a motorized belt
that moves together with the feed dogs in the needle
plate during sewing.
For straight line quilting, use the dual feed foot and
the straight stitch needle plate. Always select a
straight stitch (middle needle position) when using
the straight stitch needle plate.
a
Select , or .
b
Attach the dual feed foot (see page 72).
c
Place one hand on each side of the presser
foot to hold the fabric secure while sewing.
Memo
• Using a straight stitch (middle needle
position) makes it easier to sew smoothly
(see page 116).
• In the case Q-01(center, at width 3.5 mm) is
selected, if the guideline marker is set at
10.0 mm (3.5 mm plus 6.5 mm, close to 1/4
inch), you can sew piecing by referring to
the guideline marker.
Memo
• Sew at slow to medium speed.
• Always check to be sure that your quilting
surface is securely basted before beginning
to sew. Specialized machine quilt needles
and threads are also available for machine
quilting.
SEWING THE STITCHES
132
■ Appliqué
a
Trace the pattern onto the appliqué fabric
and then cut around it, leaving a 3 to 5 mm
(approx. 1/8 to 3/16 inch) seam allowance.
a Seam allowance: 3 to 5 mm
(approx. 1/8 to 3/16 inch)
b
Place a piece of stabilizer cut to the finished
size of the appliqué design onto the fabric,
and then fold over the seam margin using
an iron. Clip curves when necessary.
c
Turn the appliqué over, and attach the
stabilizer with basting pins or a basting
stitch.
d
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
e
Use the quilting appliqué stitch to attach
the appliqué. Sew around the edge while
dropping the needle as close to the edge as
possible.
a Appliqué
b Needle drop position
You can use the appliqué technique to attach
appliqué designs like the three pictured below.
CAUTION
• Be careful that the needle does not strike a
basting pin during sewing. Striking a pin can
cause the needle to break, resulting in injury.
a Dresden plate
b Stained glass
c Sunbonnet sue
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
133
3
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches
For better fabric control, use the foot controller to
sew with satin stitches. Set the speed control slide to
control the stitch width to make subtle changes in
the stitch width during sewing.
a
Attach the foot controller (see page 83).
b
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
c
Press in the length display to shorten
the stitch length.
d
Press to use the speed control slide to
control the stitch width.
e
Set the “Width Control” to “ON”.
f
Press .
→ The display will return to the original screen.
g
Start sewing.
* You can adjust the stitch width during sewing by
moving the sewing speed controller. Slide the lever
to the left, and the stitch width becomes narrower.
Slide it to the right, the stitch width becomes wider.
The size of the width changes equally on both sides
of the middle needle position.
a narrower
b wider
Example: Changing the width
h
When you are finished sewing, set the
“Width Control” back to “OFF”.
■ Free Motion Quilting
With free motion quilting, the feed dogs can be
lowered by pressing , so that the fabric can be
moved freely in any direction.
For free motion quilting, use free motion quilting
foot “C” or free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
depending on the stitch that is selected, and set the
machine to free motion sewing mode. In this mode,
the presser foot is raised to the necessary height for
free motion sewing.
We recommend attaching the foot controller and
sewing at a consistent speed. You can adjust the
sewing speed with the speed control slide on the
machine.
Memo
• The setting will vary according to the kind of
fabric and the thickness of the thread, but a
length of 0.3 to 0.5 mm (approx. 1/64 to 1/
32 inch) is best for satin stitches.
Memo
• You can use the speed control slide to
adjust the stitch width. Use the foot
controller to adjust the sewing speed.
SEWING THE STITCHES
134
Using Free motion Quilting Foot “C”
Use the free motion quilting foot “C” with straight
stitch needle plate for free motion sewing.
Free motion quilting foot “C”
a
Attach the straight stitch needle plate (see
page 119).
a Round hole
b
Select or .
c
Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
→ The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised
to the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
CAUTION
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result.
• When using free motion quilting foot “C”, be
sure to use the straight stitch needle plate and
sew with the needle in middle (center) needle
position. If the needle is moved to any position
other than the middle (center) needle position,
the needle may break, which may result in
injuries.
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
in the machine settings screen. Press
to display “Free Motion Foot Height” of the
settings screen. Press or to select
the height that the quilting foot is raised
above the fabric. Increase the setting by
pressing , for example, when sewing
very stretchy fabric, so that it is easier to
sew.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper
thread tension. Test with a sample piece of
fabric that is similar to your chosen fabric.
C
C
Memo
• Notice this needle plate has a round hole for
the needle.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
135
3
a Free motion quilting foot “C”
→ When stitch Q-01 or 1-31 is selected, free motion
quilting foot “C” is indicated in the upper-left corner
of the screen.
d
Remove the presser foot holder (see page
71).
e
Attach free motion quilting foot “C” at the
front with the presser foot holder screw
aligned with the notch in the quilting foot.
a Presser foot holder screw
b Notch
f
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
holder screw using the multi-purpose
screwdriver with your left hand.
a Presser foot holder screw
g
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/32
inch) in length.
a Stitch
h
Press to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
i
After sewing, make sure to remove the
straight stitch needle plate and presser foot
“C”, and reinstall the regular needle plate
and the needle plate cover.
Note
• Make sure that the quilting foot is attached
properly and not slanted.
a
b
a
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included multi-purpose screwdriver.
Otherwise, the needle may touch the quilting
foot, causing it to bend or break.
Note
• Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” can
also be used with the straight stitch needle
plate. We recommend using free motion
open toe quilting foot “O” with free motion
sewing of fabrics of uneven thicknesses.
• When using the straight stitch needle plate,
all straight stitches become middle needle
position stitches. You cannot change the
needle position using the width display.
Memo
• Normally, the feed dogs are raised for
regular sewing.
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
results. The technique requires practice.
SEWING THE STITCHES
136
Using free motion Open Toe Quilting Foot “O”
The free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is used
for free motion quilting with zigzag or decorative
stitches or for free motion quilting of straight lines on
fabric with an uneven thickness. Various stitches
can be sewn using free motion open toe quilting foot
“O”. For details on the stitches that can be used,
refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
a
Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
→ The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised
to the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
b
Select a stitch.
c
Remove the presser foot holder (see page
71).
d
Attach free motion open toe quilting foot
“O” by positioning the pin of the quilting
foot above the needle clamp screw and
aligning the lower-left of the quilting foot
and the presser bar.
a Pin
b Needle clamp screw
c Presser bar
e
Hold the quilting foot in place with your
right hand, and tighten the presser foot
holder screw using the multi-purpose
screwdriver with your left hand.
* Use the multi-purpose screw driver setting the
position to “1”. (see page 24)
a Presser foot holder screw
f
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/32
inch) in length.
a Stitch
Memo
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper
thread tension (see page 92). Test with a
sample piece of quilting fabric.
Memo
• When stitch Q-01 or 1-31 is selected, free
motion quilting foot “C” is indicated in the
upper-left corner of the screen. When the
other stitches are selected, free motion
open toe quilting foot “O” is indicated in the
screen.
O
O
Note
• Make sure that the quilting foot is not
slanted.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included multi-purpose screwdriver.
Otherwise, the needle may touch the quilting
foot, causing it to bend or break.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
137
3
g
Press to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion
Echo Quilting Foot “E”
Sewing quilting lines at equal distances around a
motif is called echo quilting. The quilting lines,
which appear as ripples echoing away from the
motif, are the distinguishing characteristic of this
quilting style. Use the free motion echo quilting foot
“E” for echo quilting. Using the measurement on the
presser foot as a guide, sew around the motif at a
fixed interval. We recommend attaching the foot
controller and sewing at a consistent speed.
Free motion echo quilting foot “E” measurement
a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
b 9.5 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
a
Select .
b
Press to set the machine to free motion
sewing mode.
→ The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised
to the necessary height, then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
c
Follow the steps on page 70 “Removing the
Presser Foot” to remove the presser foot.
d
Remove the presser foot holder (see page
71) and the screw.
e
Position the free motion echo quilting foot
“E” on the left side of the presser bar with
the holes in the quilting foot and presser bar
aligned.
Memo
• Do not be discouraged with your initial
results. The technique requires practice.
CAUTION
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result.
E
E
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified
in the machine settings screen. Press
to display “Free Motion Foot Height” of the
settings screen (see page 33). Press or
to select the height that the quilting foot
is raised above the fabric. Increase the
setting by pressing , for example, when
sewing very soft fabric, so that it is easier to
sew.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it
may be necessary to adjust the upper
thread tension (see page 92). Test with a
sample piece of quilting fabric.
SEWING THE STITCHES
138
f
Tighten the screw with the included multi-
purpose screwdriver.
* Use the multi-purpose screw driver setting the
position to “1”. (see page 24)
g
Using the measurement on the quilting foot
as a guide, sew around the motif.
a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
Finished project
h
Press to cancel the free motion sewing
mode.
→ Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
Blind Hem Stitches
Secure the bottoms of skirts and pants with a blind
hem. Two stitches are available for blind hem
stitching.
a
Turn the skirt or pants wrong side out.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Bottom side
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included multi-purpose screwdriver.
Otherwise, the needle may touch the quilting
foot, causing it to bend or break.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Blind hem stitch
Blind hem stitch stretch
Memo
• When the size of cylindrical pieces is too
small to slide onto the arm or the length is
too short, the fabric will not feed and
desired results may not be achieved.
2
1
3
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
139
3
b
Fold the fabric along the desired edge of the
hem, and press.
c
Use a chalk to mark on the fabric about 5
mm (3/16 inch) from the edge of the fabric,
and then baste it.
d
Fold back the fabric inside along the
basting.
e
Unfold the edge of fabric, and position the
fabric with the wrong side facing up.
f
Attach blind hem foot “R”.
g
Select or .
h
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the
free-arm.
i
Slide the item that you wish to sew onto the
free arm, make sure that the fabric feeds
correctly, and then start sewing.
a Free arm
j
Position the fabric with the edge of the
folded hem against the guide of the presser
foot, and then lower the presser foot lever.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Fold of hem
c Guide
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of Fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e 5 mm (3/16 inch)
f Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e 5 mm (3/16 inch)
f Basting
g Basting point
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1
2
1
2
1
3
3
4
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
1
3
6
5
1
1
2
7
4
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e Basting point
f Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
6
3
4
SEWING THE STITCHES
140
k
Adjust the stitch width until the needle
slightly catches the fold of the hem.
a Needle drop point
When you change the needle drop point, raise the
needle, and then change the stitch width.
<Stitch Width>
a Thick fabric
b Normal fabric
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of
the Hem Fold
The needle is too far to the left.
Press to decrease the stitch width so that the
needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
■ If the Needle does not Catch the
Hem Fold
The needle is too far to the right.
Press to increase the stitch width so that the
needle slightly catches the fold of the hem.
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
l
Sew with the fold of the hem against the
presser foot guide.
m
Remove the basting stitching and reverse
the fabric.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
Memo
• Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left
needle drop point does not catch the fold. If
the needle catches too much of the fold, the
fabric cannot be unfolded and the seam
appearing on the right side of the fabric will
be very large, leaving an unattractive finish.
If you experience either of these cases,
follow the instructions below to solve the
problem.
1
2
1
2
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
141
3
Appliqué
a
Use a temporary spray adhesive, fabric glue
or a basting stitch to attach the appliqué to
the fabric.
* This will keep the fabric from moving during
sewing.
a Appliqué
b Fabric glue
b
Select or .
* Adjust the stitch length and width to correspond to
the appliqué shape, size, and quality of material (see
page 90).
c
Attach presser foot “J”. Check that the
needle drops slightly off the edge of the
appliqué, then start sewing.
a Appliqué material
a Needle drop position
■ Appliqué Sharp Curves
Stop the machine with the needle in the fabric
outside the appliqué. Raise the presser foot and turn
the fabric a little bit at a time while sewing for an
attractive finish to the seam.
■ Appliqué Corners
Stop the machine with the needle in the right
position of the outside (or inside) corner of the
appliqué. Raise the presser foot and pivot the fabric
to align the fabric edge. Lower the presser foot and
continue stitching.
a Outside corner
b Inside corner
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• Placing a lightweight tear away stabilizer
beneath the stitching area will improve the
stitch placement along the edge of the
appliqué fabric.
SEWING THE STITCHES
142
Shelltuck Stitches
Shelltuck stitches give an attractive appearance of
shells along the curve of a collar. This stitch
pattern can be used for edging the neckline or
sleeves of dresses and blouses.
a
Select .
b
Increase the upper thread tension for an
attractive scallop finish to the shelltuck
stitches (see page 92).
c
To make rows of shell tuck stitches, fold the
fabric in half along the bias.
d
Attach presser foot “J”. Set the needle drop
point slightly off the edge of the fabric, and
start sewing.
a Needle drop position
e
Unfold the fabric, and iron the tucks to one
side.
Scallop Stitches
This wave-shaped satin stitch is called the scallop
stitch. Use this stitch to decorate the edges of
blouse collars and handkerchiefs or use it as a hem
accent.
a
Select .
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• If the upper thread tension is too weak, the
shelltuck stitches will not scallop.
Memo
•Use a thin fabric.
Memo
• To make shell tucks at the edge of a collar
or neckline, follow the pattern’s instructions
and then use this stitch to make a
decorative finish on the collar or neckline.
Memo
• A temporary spray adhesive may be
necessary for lightweight fabrics. Test sew
the fabric before sewing a project.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
143
3
b
Attach presser foot “N”. Sew scallop
stitches along the edge of the fabric.
* Do not sew directly on the edge of the fabric.
c
Trim along the seam, making sure not to cut
the stitches.
Crazy Quilting
For a decorative look called “Crazy Quilting”, the
following stitches can be sewn on top of a pressed
seam allowance.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
With the right sides facing each other, sew
two pieces of fabric together, and then
press open the seam allowance.
a Straight stitch
b Seam margins
c 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
d Wrong side
c
Select a stitch for top stitching.
d
Place the fabric right side up in the
machine, and center the presser foot over
the seam when sewing.
a Right side of fabric
Smocking Stitches
Use smocking stitches for decorative sewing on
clothes, etc.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and loosen the upper thread
tension to approximately 2.0 (see “Setting
the Stitch Length” on page 91 and “Setting
the Thread Tension” on page 92).
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
d
Sew the seams, leaving approximately
10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch) between the
seams, then trim excess thread, leaving
50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
a Approximately 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
Memo
• Use a seam sealant to secure the edges of
the scallop stitches.
SEWING THE STITCHES
144
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, and then smooth
the gathers by ironing them.
f
Select or .
g
Sew the spaces between the straight seams.
h
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
Fagoting
When there is a space between two fabrics with
thread sewn over the space to join the fabrics
together, it is called fagoting. Use this stitch when
sewing blouses or children’s clothes.
a
Baste two pieces of fabric onto thin paper,
leaving a space of 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
between the fabrics.
* If you draw a line down the middle of the thin paper
or water-soluble stabilizer, sewing is easier.
a 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
b Paper
c Basting stitches
b
Select or .
c
Attach presser foot “J”. Align the center of
the presser foot with the middle of the
space between the fabrics and begin
sewing.
a Basting stitches
d
When sewing is finished, gently tear the
paper away.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• Use a thick thread.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
145
3
Tape or Elastic Attaching
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser
foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx.
3/16 inch), and loosen the upper thread
tension to 2.0 (see “Setting the Stitch
Length” on page 91 and “Setting the Thread
Tension” on page 92).
c
Sew two rows of straight stitches on the
right side of the fabric, then pull the bobbin
thread to create the necessary gather.
d
Place the tape over the gather, and hold it
in place with basting pins.
a Tape
e
Select or .
f
Sew over the tape (or elastic).
g
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
Memo
• Be sure that neither automatic
reinforcement nor automatic thread
cutting is selected.
Memo
• Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
and pull up the bobbin thread. Holding the
top and bobbin thread, pull a length of
thread out from the rear of the machine. (Be
sure that the presser foot is raised.)
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
SEWING THE STITCHES
146
Heirloom
■ Hemstitching (1) (Daisy Stitch)
Use for sewing tablecloths, decorative hems, and
decorative stitching on shirt fronts.
a
Insert a type 130/705H, size 100/16 Wing
needle.
* This specialty sewing needle is not furnished with
your machine. Must be purchased separately.
b
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “N”.
* Select any stitch between 3-01 and 3-25.
c
Start sewing.
Example: Illustration of finished product
■ Hemstitching (2) (Drawn Work (1))
a
Pull out several threads from one area on a
piece of fabric to open the area.
* Pull out 5 or 6 threads to leave a 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) area open.
b
Select .
c
Attach presser foot “N”. With the right side
of the fabric facing up, sew one edge of the
open area.
d
Press to create a mirror image of the
stitch.
Memo
• Use a light to medium weight homespun
fabric with a little stiffness.
CAUTION
• The “Automatic Threading” button cannot be
used. Thread the wing needle by hand, from
front to back. Using the “Automatic
Threading” button may result in damage to the
machine.
• A more attractive finish can be obtained if you
use a “130/705H Wing” needle when sewing
these patterns. If using a wing needle and the
stitch width has been set manually, check that
the needle will not touch the presser foot by
carefully rotating the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before starting to sew.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• Loosely woven fabrics work best for this.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
147
3
e
Match beginning needle drop points on the
opposite edge of the open area to keep the
stitching symmetrical.
■ Hemstitching (3) (Drawn Work (2))
a
Pull out several threads from both sides of
the 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) area which
are not yet open.
* Pull out four threads, leave five threads, and then
pull out four threads. The width of five threads is
approximately 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less.
a Approx. 4 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) or less
b Four threads (pull out)
c Five threads (leave)
b
Select .
c
Sew the decorative stitch in the center of
the five threads created above.
Zigzag Couching
You can easily sew decorative stitching using yarn,
etc.
■ Prepare for the Zigzag Couching
a
Attach the spool stand to the machine.
* Refer to “Using the Spool Stand” on page 58.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Memo
• A wing needle can be used for Hemstitching
(3).
CAUTION
• When using yarn, we recommend selecting
yarn of weight 4 (MEDIUM ). If the yarn is
extremely thin or thick, has an unusual shape
(flat or furry), or more than 2 yarns, the best
finishing results may not be achieved, or
injuries or damage may result.
Note
• Sew test stitches on the fabric before
sewing on your project.
• We recommend using a stabilizer material
when sewing stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave, or
fabrics which cause fabric shrinkage.
SEWING THE STITCHES
148
b
Insert the top left yarn guide into the slot on
the top left of the machine.
a Slot
c
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
d
Attach the dual feed foot to the machine
without attaching the toe of the couching
dual feed foot.
* Refer to “Attaching the Dual Feed Foot” on page 72.
e
Pass the yarn, etc. through the telescopic
thread guide and the yarn guide (1) to (2).
f
Thread the yarn, etc. to the couching toe.
Pass the yarn through the loop in the yarn
threader wire needle and then pass the
threader from top to bottom through the
hole on the couching toe.
g
Attach the toe of the couching dual feed
foot shown below to the dual feed foot.
h
Pull out the yarn for about 100 mm
(4 inches) to the back of the machine.
i
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
■ Sewing Zigzag Couching
a
Select .
b
Measure the width of the yarn, etc. and set
the stitch width according to the width of
the yarn, etc.
Note
• Make sure that the yarn, etc. does not
become entangled as you work.
Note
• Make sure that there are enough width to
wrap over the yarn, etc.
• You can adjust the stitch width while
checking the camera view. Refer to
“Checking the Needle Location in the
Screen” on page 98.
a Zigzag stitch
b Yarn
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
149
3
c
Rotate the handwheel to set the needle in
the sewing start position. Start sewing on
the right side of the yarn.
d
Make sure that the yarn, etc. passes straight
through the slit in the back of the toe of the
couching dual feed foot, and then lower the
presser foot.
a Slit
e
Set the sewing speed to the medium speed.
f
Press “Start/Stop” button to start sewing.
* While lightly holding down the fabric with both
hands, adjust the sewing direction.
One-step Buttonholes
With one-step buttonholes, you can make
buttonholes appropriate to the size of your button.
Memo
• The multi-function foot controller can also
be very useful for sharp angle sewing when
set to single stitch sewing. For details on
the multi-function foot controller, refer to
page 84.
• Pivoting is also useful when rotating fabric
with both hands.
• When guideline marker is set to on, it is
easy to sew zigzag couching straight.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Narrow rounded buttonhole
Wide round ended buttonhole
Tapered round ended buttonhole
Round ended buttonhole
Round ended buttonhole
Round double ended buttonhole
Narrow squared buttonhole
Wide squared buttonhole
Squared buttonhole
Stretch buttonhole
Heirloom buttonhole
Bound buttonhole
Keyhole buttonhole
Tapered keyhole buttonhole
Keyhole buttonhole
SEWING THE STITCHES
150
One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of
the presser foot to the back, as shown below.
a Reinforcement stitching
a
Select a buttonhole stitch, and attach
buttonhole foot “A”.
b
Mark the position and length of the
buttonhole on the fabric.
a Marks on fabric
b Buttonhole sewing
c
Pull out the button holder plate on the
presser foot, and insert the button that will
be put through the buttonhole. Then tighten
the button holder plate around the button.
a Button holder plate
d
Align the presser foot with the mark on the
fabric, and lower the presser foot.
a Mark on the fabric
b Marks on the presser foot
Memo
• The maximum buttonhole length is about
28 mm (approx. 1-1/16 inches) (diameter +
thickness of the button).
2
1
Memo
• The size of the buttonhole is determined by
the size of the button in the button holder
plate.
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole
foot backward as far as possible as shown
in the illustration, making sure that there is
no gap behind the part of the foot marked
“A”. If the buttonhole foot is not slid back as
far as possible, the buttonhole will not be
sewn at the correct size.
A
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
151
3
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
a Buttonhole lever
a Metal bracket
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then start sewing.
* Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the
buttonhole is sewn.
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
g
Insert a pin along the inside of one of the
bar tacks, and then insert the seam ripper
into the center of the buttonhole and cut
towards the pin.
a Basting pin
b Seam ripper
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
CAUTION
• When using the seam ripper to open the
buttonhole, do not put your hand or finger in
the path of the ripper. The ripper may slip and
cause injury. Do not use the seam ripper in any
other way than how it is intended.
Memo
• For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet
punch to make a hole in the rounded end of
the buttonhole. Then insert a pin along the
inside of one of the bar tacks, insert a seam
ripper into the hole made with the eyelet
punch, and cut towards the pin.
a Eyelet punch
b Basting pin
SEWING THE STITCHES
152
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics
When sewing on stretch fabric with or , sew
the buttonhole stitches over a gimp thread.
a
Hook the gimp thread onto the back of
presser foot “A”. Insert the ends into the
grooves at the front of the presser foot, and
then temporarily tie them there.
a Upper thread
b
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
c
Once sewing is completed, gently pull the
gimp thread to remove any slack, and trim
off any excess.
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that do
Not Fit into the Button Holder Plate
Use the markings on the presser foot scale to set the
size of the buttonhole. One mark on the presser foot
scale equals 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).
Add the button diameter and thickness together, and
then set the plate at the calculated value.
a Presser foot scale
b Button holder plate
c Completed measurement of diameter + thickness
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Memo
• Set the width of the satin stitches to the
width of the gimp thread, and set the
buttonhole width to be 2-3 times the width
of the gimp thread.
Memo
• After using the seam ripper to cut open the
threads over the buttonhole, trim off the
threads.
Memo
• For example, for a button with a diameter of
15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch) and a thickness
of 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch), the scale
should be set at 25 mm (approx. 1 inch).
a 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
b 15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch)
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
153
3
Four-step Buttonholes
You can sew 4-step buttonholes using the
following 4 stitches together. You can sew any
desired length for the buttonhole when using 4-
step buttonholes. 4-step buttonholes are a good
option when attaching oversize buttons.
Four-step buttonholes are sewn as shown below.
a
Mark the position and length of the
buttonhole on the fabric.
a Marks on fabric
b Buttonhole sewing
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”, and select
stitch to sew the left side of the
buttonhole.
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
d
Sew the desired length for the buttonhole
and press the “Start/Stop” button again.
e
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and
press the “Start/Stop” button.
→ The machine will automatically stop after sewing
the bar tack.
f
Select stitch to sew the right side of the
buttonhole, and press the “Start/Stop”
button to begin sewing.
g
Sew the right side of the buttonhole and
press the “Start/Stop” button again.
* Sew the right side of the buttonhole the same length
as the left.
h
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and
then press the “Start/Stop” button.
→ The machine will automatically sew off the bar tack
tie and stop when the bar tack is complete.
i
Raise the presser foot and remove the
fabric.
j
Refer to page 151 to open the buttonhole.
Note
• When changing the stitch settings, make
sure that all stitch settings are changed to
match.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
4 steps buttonhole 1
4 steps buttonhole 2
4 steps buttonhole 3
4 steps buttonhole 4
SEWING THE STITCHES
154
■ Darning
Use darning stitches for mending and other
applications.
Darning is performed by sewing from the front of the
presser foot to the back as shown below.
a Reinforcement stitches
a
Select a stitch, and attach buttonhole foot
“A”.
b
Set the scale to the desired length of the
darning.
a Presser foot scale
b Completed length measurement
c Width 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
c
Check that the needle drops at the desired
position and lower the presser foot, making
sure the upper thread passes underneath
the buttonhole foot.
d
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
a Buttonhole lever
a Metal bracket
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Darning
Darning
Memo
• The maximum length for darning is 28 mm
(approx. 1-1/16 inches).
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Set the presser foot so that there is no gap
behind the section marked with an “A” (the
shaded area in the illustration below). If
there is a gap, the size of the darning will
not be correct.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
155
3
e
Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then press the “Start/Stop” button to
start the machine.
→ Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
Bar Tacks
Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be subject
to strain, such as pocket corners.
a
Select .
b
Attach buttonhole foot “A” and set the
scale to the length of the bar tack you wish
to sew.
a Presser foot scale
b Completed length measurement
c 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
c
Set the fabric so that the pocket moves
toward you during sewing.
d
Check the first needle drop point and lower
the presser foot.
a 2 mm (approx. 1/16 inch)
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Bar tack
Memo
• Bar tacks can be between 5 mm (approx.
3/16 inch) and 28 mm (approx. 1-1/16
inches). Bar tacks are usually between 5
mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 10 mm (approx.
3/8 inch).
Note
• Pass the thread underneath the presser
foot.
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole
foot backward as far as possible as shown
in the illustration, making sure that there is
no gap behind the part of the foot marked
“A”. If the buttonhole foot is not slid back as
far as possible, the bar tack will not be sewn
to the correct size.
SEWING THE STITCHES
156
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is
positioned behind the metal bracket on the
buttonhole foot.
a Metal bracket
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
begin sewing.
→ When sewing is completed, the machine will sew
reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.
■ Bar Tacks on Thick Fabrics
Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside
the fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot
and allow for easier and even feeding.
a Presser foot
b Thick paper
c Fabric
Button Sewing
Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached, using
the machine.
a
Select .
→ The feed dogs are lowered automatically.
b
Raise the presser foot.
c
Attach button sewing foot “M”, slide the
button along the metal plate and into the
presser foot, and lower the presser foot.
a Button
b Metal plate
d
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check that the needle
goes into each hole correctly.
* If the needle does not reach the holes on the left
side, adjust the stitch width.
* To attach the button more securely, repeat the
process.
Memo
• If automatic thread cutting is turned on
before you start sewing, both threads are
automatically cut after the reinforcement
stitches are sewn. If the fabric does not feed
(for example, because it is too thick),
increase the stitch length setting.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Button sewing
Note
• Do not use the automatic thread cutting
function when sewing buttons. Otherwise,
you will lose the thread ends.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
157
3
e
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and
start sewing.
→ The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
f
From the wrong side of the fabric, pull the
end of the bobbin thread to pull the upper
thread through to the wrong side of the
fabric. Tie the two thread ends together and
cut the threads.
g
After the button is attached, select another
stitch and rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
■ Attaching 4 Hole Buttons
Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the
presser foot and move the fabric so that the needle
goes into the next two holes, and sew them in the
same way.
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button
a
Pull the shank lever toward you before
sewing.
a Shank lever
b
Pull the two ends of the upper thread
between the button and the fabric, wind
them around the shank, and then tie them
firmly together.
c
Tie the ends of the bobbin thread from the
beginning and end of sewing together on
the wrong side of the fabric.
d
Cut off any excess thread.
Eyelet
Use this stitch for making belt holes and other
similar applications.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
button during sewing. The needle may break
and cause injury.
Note
• When sewing is completed, be sure to
select the other stitch and rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
to raise the feed dogs.
Stitch Stitch name Presser foot
Eyelet
Star eyelet
SEWING THE STITCHES
158
a
Select or .
b
Use in either the stitch width
display or the stitch length display to
choose the size of the eyelet.
* Actual size
a Large 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
b Medium 6 mm (approx. 15/64 inch)
c Small 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
c
Attach monogramming foot “N”, then
rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check the needle
drop position.
a Needle drop position
d
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
→ When sewing is finished, the machine sews
reinforcement stitches and stops automatically.
e
Use the eyelet punch to make a hole in the
center of the stitching.
Multi-directional Sewing
(Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or
emblems to pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc.
a
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the
free-arm.
b
Select and attach monogramming foot
“N”.
Note
• Only one size is available for .
Note
• If the stitch pattern comes out poorly, make
adjustments to “SEWING STITCH
PATTERNS” on page 175.
Memo
• Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the
free-arm, and then sew in the order shown
in the illustration.
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
159
3
c
Set the needle in the fabric at the sewing
start point, and sew seam “1” as shown.
a Start Point
d
Select and sew seam “2” as shown.
* The fabric will move sideways, guide the fabric by
hand to keep sewing straight.
e
Select and sew seam “3” as shown.
→ The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.
f
Select and sew seam “4” as shown.
→ The seam will be connected to the starting point of
seam 1.
Zipper Insertion
■ Centered Zipper
Use for bags and other such applications.
a
Select .
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch (see page 120) and sew to
the top of the fabric.
a Basting stitches
b Reverse stitches
c End of zipper opening
d Wrong side
c
Press the seam allowance open and attach
the zipper with a basting stitch in the
middle of each side of the zipper tape.
a Basting stitches
b Zipper
c Wrong side
Memo
• For details on each stitch, refer to the
“STITCH SETTING CHART” at the end of
this manual.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
SEWING THE STITCHES
160
d
Remove presser foot “J”. Align the right
side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with the
presser foot holder, and attach the zipper
foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
e
Topstitch 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 to
3/8 inch) from the seamed edge of the
fabric, then remove the basting.
■ Inserting a Side Zipper
Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses.
a
Select .
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening. Change to
a basting stitch and sew to the top of the
fabric.
a Reverse stitches
b Wrong side of fabric
c Basting stitches
d End of zipper opening
c
Press the seam allowance open and align
the folded hem along the teeth of the
zipper, while maintaining 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) of sewing space.
a Zipper pull tab
b Wrong side of fabric
c Zipper teeth
d End of zipper opening
e 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
d
Remove presser foot “J”.
CAUTION
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If another
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and
possibly causing injury.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
161
3
e
Align the right side of the pin in zipper foot
“I” with the presser foot holder, and attach
the presser foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
f
Set the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) margin.
g
Starting from the end of the zipper opening,
sew to a point about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, then
stop the machine.
h
Pull down the zipper slider, then continue
sewing to the edge of the fabric.
a 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
b 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
i
Close the zipper, turn the fabric over, and
sew a basting stitch.
a Front of the skirt (wrong side of fabric)
b Basting stitches
c Front of the skirt (right side of fabric)
d Back of the skirt (right side of fabric)
j
Remove the presser foot, and reattach it so
that the left side of the pin is attached to the
presser foot holder.
* When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the right side of the presser foot.
When sewing the right side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the left side of the presser foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop position
k
Set the fabric so that the left edge of the
presser foot touches the edge of the zipper
teeth.
l
Sew reverse stitches at the top of the
zipper, then continue sewing.
m
Stop sewing about 50 mm (approx.
2 inches) from the edge of the fabric, leave
the needle in the fabric, and remove the
basting stitches.
CAUTION
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If another
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and
possibly causing injury.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
SEWING THE STITCHES
162
n
Open the zipper and sew the rest of the
seam.
a Basting stitches
b 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch)
c Reverse stitches
d 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
Edge Sewing
Using the built-in camera, the width of the area
from the edge of the fabric to the stitching line can
be measured and set for edge sewing.
This function can be used when the edge of the
fabric is straight or a gentle curve.
a Straight
b Curved
a
Select a stitch.
* Edge sewing using the built-in camera cannot be
used with patterns where appears in gray
when the pattern is selected.
Note
• Clean stitching cannot be sewn if this
function is used when the edge of the fabric
has corners as shown below.
• When edge sewing using the built-in
camera, make sure that the room is evenly
lit. If the brightness in the room changes
while edge sewing, the built-in camera may
not be able to detect the edge of the fabric.
• The built-in camera detects the contrast
between the fabric and the background.
Therefore, observe the following
precautions.
– If the edge of the fabric is fraying, cut off
any excess fabric threads.
– If the fabric has a complicated pattern, is
sheer or is glossy, such as a vinyl
material, the built-in camera may not be
able to detect it correctly.
• For best results, iron the fold when folding
the edge of the fabric for edge sewing.
• When “Width Control” on page 1/9 of the
settings screen is set to “ON” or when
“Needle Position - Stitch Placement” on
page 4/9 is set to “ON”, the built-in camera
cannot be used with edge sewing. If either
of these parameters are set to “ON”,
appears gray and cannot be selected.
Before using the built-in camera for edge
sewing, set “Width Control” and “Needle
Position - Stitch Placement” in the settings
screen to “OFF”.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
163
3
b
Attach the vertical stitch alignment foot
“V”.
c
Peel off the transparent sheet of the edge
sewing sheet.
d
Place the edge sewing sheet on top of the
needle plate cover.
Align the guides on the edge sewing sheet with the
sides of the needle plate cover, and then adjust the
position of the edge sewing sheet so that its cutout
aligns with the edges of the opening for the feed dogs.
Position the edge sewing sheet so that there is no gap
between it and the edges of the opening for the feed
dogs.
a Edge sewing sheet
b Guides on edge sewing sheet
c Sides of needle plate cover
a Edge sewing sheet
b Feed dogs
c Between the feed dogs and the edge sewing sheet
e
Press .
CAUTION
• When edge sewing with the built-in camera,
be sure to use the vertical stitch alignment foot
“V”. In order to maintain a fixed distance from
the edge of the fabric, the needle will slightly
move to either side, even when sewing with a
straight stitch. If a different presser foot is
used, it may be hit by the needle, causing the
needle to break or resulting in injuries.
V
Note
• If the metal needle plate is visible between
the feed dogs and the edge sewing sheet,
the fabric may be incorrectly detected by
the built-in camera.
Memo
• Before using the edge sewing sheet, peel
off the transparent sheet. After use, affix the
edge sewing sheet to the transparent sheet
to prevent it from collecting dust.
a Transparent sheet
• Be sure to install a fully wound bobbin
before starting to use the edge sewing
feature and built-in camera. If you need to
change the bobbin while edge sewing,
remove the edge sewing sheet carefully and
place it again after changing the bobbin.
SEWING THE STITCHES
164
→ Depending on the stitch, the straight stitch with the
middle (center) needle position is selected,
regardless of the preset stitch width.
* Regardless of the setting selected in the machine
settings screen, the brightness of the light changes to
“5”.
f
When the message shown below appears,
check that the vertical stitch alignment foot
“V” is attached and that the edge sewing
sheet is positioned, and then press .
→ Then the edge sewing window appears.
g
Place the fabric under the presser foot.
h
Move the fabric to the desired position for
edge sewing. Position the fabric so that its
edge is as straight as possible.
a Fabric
i
Check that the built-in camera is correctly
detecting the fabric.
* Press to change the colors of the fabric edge
indicator line and starting point according to the
color of the fabric. Each press of this key changes
the color of the fabric edge indicator line to red
Note
• After is pressed, the stitch width and
stitch length cannot be changed. Change
the stitch width and stitch length before
pressing .
• Some decorative stitches will function with
the edge sewing. When selecting a stitch, if
it is not applicable to this function, an error
message will appear.
Note
• Before pressing , install the vertical
stitch alignment foot “V” and position the
edge sewing sheet; otherwise, the built-in
camera cannot detect the fabric.
If is pressed before the edge sewing
sheet is positioned, the message shown in
step
f appears again.
• After pressing , do not place your
hands or any other object near the needle
plate until the message “Recognizing…”
disappears.
Note
• When pinning the fabric, insert the pins as
shown below. If the head of the pin extends
off the edge of the fabric, the fabric may not
be correctly detected.
a Basting pin
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
165
3
(with a blue starting point), blue (with a black
starting point) or black (with a red starting point).
a Key for changing the color of the fabric edge
indicator line
b Fabric edge indicator line
When the Built-In Camera Can Detect the Edge of
the Fabric
The fabric edge indicator line appears correctly
following the edge of the fabric.
a Fabric edge indicator line
When the Fabric Edge Indicator Line Does Not
Appear
The built-in camera cannot detect the edge of the
fabric.
Press , and then perform the procedure again
starting with step
a.
When the Fabric Edge Indicator Line Is Not
Aligned With the Edge of the Fabric
The fabric edge indicator line that appears is not
aligned with the edge of the fabric. The fabric at the
beginning of sewing is not straight.
Try to straighten the edge of the fabric at the
beginning of sewing (so it is parallel with the edge of
the presser foot).
a
b
a
Note
• If a straight part of fabric edge indicator line
(shown below) does not follow the edge of
the fabric, edge sewing cannot be sewn
correctly.
a Straight part
b Fabric
a
b
SEWING THE STITCHES
166
j
While checking the screen for the distance
from the fabric edge to the edge sewing
position, move the fabric to the desired
position.
* The starting point of the fabric edge indicator line
shows the position for the start of sewing. The actual
position for the start of sewing is directly below the
needle and parallel to the starting point.
a Distance from edge of fabric
Example: When a straight stitch is selected
(example: )
a Middle needle position
b Stitching
c Edge of fabric
d Width of edge sewing
k
Lower the presser foot.
→ The distance from the edge of the fabric to the seam
is set.
a
Note
• Distances between 1.5 mm (about 1/16
inch) and 38.5 mm (about 1-1/2 inches) can
be measured. The distance is displayed in
the screen in 0.5 mm (about 1/64 inch)
increments.
• The distance is displayed in millimeters.
However, depending on the measurement
setting, it can also be displayed in inches.
• If “-_- mm” appears as the distance and no
inch measurement is displayed, the built-in
camera is not able to detect the edge of the
fabric.
• When a straight stitch is selected, use the
scale on the edge sewing sheet as a guide
for positioning the fabric for edge sewing.
a Scale on the edge sewing sheet
Memo
• If the knee lifter is used to lower the presser
foot, the fabric can be held in place with
both hands so the fabric does not move
when the presser foot is lowered.
SEWING THE STITCHES
Utility Stitches
167
3
l
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start edge
sewing.
→ Sewing starts with the set distance to the edge of the
fabric maintained.
* While sewing, use the red scale marks on the
vertical stitch alignment foot “V” as a guide to keep
a fixed distance from the edge of the fabric.
a Red scale marks
* When sewing starts, a still image from the built-in
camera is displayed.
m
When sewing is between 10 and 20 mm
(about 3/8 and 3/4 inch) from the edge of
the fabric, sewing stops automatically and
the following message appears. To stop
sewing, press .
* When this message appears, edge sewing (with the
seam wizard function) is canceled.
Note
• While sewing, do not place anything,
including your hands, within 2 mm (about 1/
16 inch) from the edge of the fabric,
otherwise the edge of the fabric cannot be
detected correctly. When guiding the fabric
with your hands, place them outside of the
object-free area and more than 2 mm (about
1/16 inch) from the edge of the fabric.
a Approximately 2 mm (about 1/16 inch)
b Fabric
c Edge of fabric
Note
• To continue sewing to the edge of the
fabric, do not press when the
message shown above appears. With the
above message displayed, press the “Start/
Stop” button to sew.
Memo
• When edge sewing is finished, store the
edge sewing sheet affixed to the
transparent sheet in order to prevent it from
collecting dust.
SEWING THE STITCHES
168
Chapter 4
Character/Decorative Stitches
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS ............................ 170
■ Stitch Selection Screens .........................................................171
Selecting Decorative Stitch Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/7mm Satin Stitch Patterns/
Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative Stitch Patterns .......................172
Alphabet Characters/Japanese characters...............................172
■ Deleting Characters................................................................173
■ Adjusting the Character Spacing ............................................ 173
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS................................. 175
Sewing Attractive Finishes .....................................................175
Basic Sewing ...........................................................................175
Making Adjustments ...............................................................176
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS ................................ 178
■ Key Functions......................................................................... 178
Changing the Size ...................................................................180
Changing the Length (for 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ....180
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image ...........................................180
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ......................................180
Sewing a Pattern Continuously ..............................................180
Changing Thread Density (for Satin Stitch Patterns Only) ......181
Returning to the Beginning of the Pattern ...............................181
Checking the Image ................................................................182
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS ......................... 183
Before Combining ...................................................................183
Combining Various Stitch Patterns .........................................183
Combining Large and Small Stitch Patterns ............................184
Combining Horizontal Mirror Image Stitch Patterns ..............185
Combining Stitch Patterns of Different Length........................186
Making Step Stitch Patterns (for 7mm Satin Stitch
Patterns Only) ........................................................................186
■ More Examples.......................................................................187
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION....................... 189
Stitch Data Precautions...........................................................189
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used.................................... 189
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used...................... 189
■ Connecting Your Machine to the PC ...................................... 189
■
Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
.... 189
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ....................190
■ If the Memory is Full .............................................................. 190
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB Media.......................................190
Saving Stitch Patterns in the Computer...................................191
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ..........192
Recalling from USB Media ......................................................193
Recalling from the Computer ..................................................194
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
170
Press , then to display the screen below.
.
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
a Decorative stitch patterns
b 7mm decorative stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
c Satin stitch patterns
d 7mm satin stitch patterns. You can set stitch length and width.
e Cross stitch
f Utility decorative stitch patterns
g Alphabet characters (gothic font)
h Alphabet characters (handwriting font)
i Alphabet characters (outline)
j Cyrillic font
k Japanese character
l Press this key to create your own stitches with the “MY CUSTOM STITCH” function (see page 200)
m Patterns stored in “MY CUSTOM STITCH” (see page 206)
n Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see page 192)
o Patterns saved in USB media (see page 193)
p Patterns saved on the computer (see page 194)
Note
• If the screen is locked ( ), unlock the screen by pressing . While the screen is locked, no
other key can be operated.
a
b
c
e
f
p
k
o
j
d
g
n
l
h
i
m
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
171
4
■ Stitch Selection Screens
There are 11 categories of Character/Decorative stitch patterns. If appears, there is more than one stitch
selection screen for that category.
Decorative Stitch Patterns 7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns
Satin Stitch Patterns 7mm Satin Stitch Patterns
Cross Stitch Utility Decorative Stitch
Patterns
Alphabet Characters
(Gothic Font)
Alphabet Characters
(Handwriting Font)
Alphabet Characters
(Outline)
Cyrillic font Japanese character
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
172
Selecting Decorative Stitch
Patterns/7mm Decorative Stitch
Patterns/Satin Stitch Patterns/
7mm Satin Stitch Patterns/
Cross Stitch/Utility Decorative
Stitch Patterns
a
Select the category of the pattern you want
to sew.
b
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to sew.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view the previous page.
* Touch the bar that appears between and
to leap multiple pages at one time.
* To select a different stitch pattern, press .
When the current stitch pattern is erased, select the
new stitch pattern.
→ The selected pattern is displayed.
Alphabet Characters/Japanese
characters
Entering characters from the groups shown below,
for example “Blue Sky”.
a
Press , , , or to
select a font.
b
Press to change the selection screens.
c
Press and then enter “B”.
d
Press and then enter “lue”.
Memo
• There are four fonts for alphabet character
stitching and one font for Japanese
character stitching.
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
173
4
e
Press to enter a space.
f
Press again and enter “S”.
g
Press and then enter “ky”.
a Jumping stitch
* Remove the jumping stitches after sewing.
* If you want to continue entering characters in a
different font, press , and then repeat from
step a.
■ Deleting Characters
a
Press to delete the last character.
b
Select the correct character.
■ Adjusting the Character Spacing
The space between the characters can be adjusted.
a
Press .
→ The character spacing window appears.
a
Memo
• Characters are deleted individually starting
with the last character entered.
SELECTING STITCH PATTERNS
174
b
Press to adjust character spacing.
* Press to increase the character spacing and
press to decrease the character spacing.
Example:
* Each setting equals a specific distance between
characters.
Value: 0
Value: 10
Value mm
00
10.18
20.36
30.54
40.72
50.9
61.08
71.26
81.44
91.62
10 1.8
Memo
• The default setting is “0”. No number less
than “0” can be set.
• Changing character spacing by this
method, pertains to all characters. Spacing
changes are valid not only while entering
characters but also before and after the
entering of characters.
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
175
4
Sewing Attractive Finishes
To achieve attractive results when sewing character/decorative stitches, check the table below for the
proper fabric/needle/thread combinations.
Basic Sewing
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Place the fabric under the presser foot, pull
the upper thread out to the side, and then
lower the presser foot.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
Note
• Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch, so
you should always sew a few trial stitches before beginning your project.
• When sewing satin stitch patterns, there may be shrinking or bunching of stitches, so be sure to
attach a stabilizer material.
• Guide the fabric with your hand to keep the fabric feeding straight and even during sewing.
Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach stabilizer on the
wrong side of the fabric. If you do not wish to do so, place the fabric on a thin paper such as tracing paper.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
c Thin paper
Thread #50 - #60
Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the Ball point needle (golden colored)
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine needle 90/14
Presser foot Monogramming foot “N”.
Using another presser foot may give inferior results.
CAUTION
• When sewing 7 mm satin stitch patterns and
the stitches are bunched, lengthen the stitch
length. If you continue sewing when the
stitches are bunched, the needle may bend or
break (“Setting the Stitch Length” on page 91).
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
176
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop
sewing.
f
Keep pressing the “Reverse Stitch” button
or the “Reinforcement Stitch” button to
sew 4 stitches of reinforcement stitches.
Making Adjustments
Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly,
depending on the type or thickness of fabric, the
stabilizer material used, sewing speed, etc. If your
sewing does not turn out well, sew trial stitches
using the same conditions as the real sewing, and
adjust the stitch pattern as explained below. If the
pattern does not turn out well even after making
adjustments based on the pattern, make
adjustments for each pattern individually.
a
Press and select .
b
Attach monogramming foot “N” and sew
the pattern.
Memo
• If the fabric is pulled or pushed during
sewing, the pattern may not turn out
correctly. Also, depending on the pattern,
there may be movement to the left and right
as well as front and back. Guide the fabric
with your hand to keep the fabric feeding
straight and even during sewing.
Memo
• When sewing character stitches, the
machine automatically sews reinforcement
stitches at the beginning and end of each
character.
• When sewing is completed, trim any excess
thread between letters.
Note
• When sewing some patterns, the needle will
temporarily pause in the raised position
while the fabric is fed due to the operation
of the needle bar separation mechanism
which is used in this machine. At such
times, a clicking sound different from the
sound generated during sewing will be
heard. This sound is normal and is not the
sign of a machine malfunction.
SEWING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
177
4
c
Compare the finished pattern to the
illustration of the correct pattern below.
d
Press , and then adjust the pattern with
the “Fine Adjust Verti.” or “Fine Adjust
Horiz.” displays.
* If the pattern is bunched:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will lengthen.
* If the pattern has gaps:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will shorten.
* If the pattern is skewed to the left:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
→ The displayed value increases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the right.
* If the pattern is skewed to the right:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
→ The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the left.
e
Sew the stitch pattern again.
* If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make
adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern
comes out correctly.
f
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
• You can sew with the setting screen on the
display.
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
178
■ Key Functions
You can create just the finish you want using the editing functions. Make patterns larger or smaller, make mirror
images, etc.
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Note
• Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the
displayed keys are available when a pattern is selected.
i
e
d
s
r
q
p
o
n
m
l
k
j
h
gf
c
b
a
t
u
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
179
4
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Pattern display size Show the approximate size of the pattern selected.
: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern
: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern
* The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type of
fabric and thread that is used.
113
b Automatic
reinforcement stitch
key
Press this key to turn on the automatic reinforcement stitching mode. 85
c Automatic thread
cutting key
Press this key to turn on the automatic thread cutting mode. 93
d Pivot key Press this key to select the pivot function. When the pivot function is selected,
stopping the machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot
automatically. In addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is
automatically lowered.
• If this key appears as , the pivot function cannot be used.
• Be sure the needle position on page 4 of Machine Settings is set to the
down position.
95
e Guideline marker key Press this key to display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The
guideline marker makes it easier to align stitches with the fabric edge or other
marker on the fabric.
94
f Stitch width and
stitch length key
Shows the stitch width and stitch length of the selected stitch pattern. The
machine default settings are highlighted.
90-92
g “L/R Shift” key
Press to shift the stitch pattern to the right or press to shift the
pattern to the left. This feature is not available on all patterns. Only those
applicable will be shifted. The machine default setting is highlighted.
91
h Thread tension key Shows the thread tension setting for the selected stitch pattern. The machine
default settings are highlighted
92
i Memory key Use this key to save stitch pattern combinations. 190
j Sensor function key Press this key to use the sensor function. 100
k Elongation key When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press this key to choose from 5
automatic length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch
length settings.
180
l Delete key When you make a mistake selecting a stitch pattern, use this key to delete the
mistake. When you make a mistake in combining stitch patterns, use this key
to delete stitch patterns.
172, 173
m Needle mode
selection key
(Single/Double)
Press this key to choose single needle sewing or twin needle sewing. 65
n Size selection key Use this key to select the size of the stitch pattern (large, small). 180
o Vertical mirror image
key
After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a vertical mirror image
of the stitch pattern.
180
p Horizontal mirror
image key
After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a horizontal mirror
image of the stitch pattern.
180
q Single/Repeat sewing
key
Press this key to choose single stitches or continuous stitches. 180
r Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the
pattern.
181
s Free motion mode
key
Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.
The feed dog is lowered and presser foot is raised to a height appropriate for
free motion quilting.
133
t Thread density key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to change the thread density of
the pattern.
181
u
Character spacing
key
Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. 173
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
180
Changing the Size
Select a stitch pattern, then press to change
the size of the stitch pattern. The stitch pattern will
be sewn in the size highlighted on the key.
Actual Stitch Pattern Size
* The size differs depending on the fabric and threads.
Changing the Length (for 7mm
Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press
to choose from 5 automatic length settings,
without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch
length settings.
Creating a Vertical Mirror Image
To create a vertical mirror image, select a stitch
pattern then press .
Creating a Horizontal Mirror
Image
To create a horizontal mirror image, select a stitch
pattern then press .
Sewing a Pattern Continuously
Press to select continuous sewing or single
stitch sewing.
Memo
• If you continue entering stitch patterns after
changing the size, those patterns will also
be sewn in that size.
• You cannot change the size of combined
stitch patterns once the stitch pattern is
entered.
Memo
• To finish a complete motif while sewing the
pattern continuously, you can press the
key while sewing. The machine will
automatically stop when the motif is
finished.
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
181
4
Changing Thread Density
(for Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
After selecting a satin stitch pattern, press to
select your preferred thread density.
Returning to the Beginning of the
Pattern
When sewing character/decorative stitches, you
can return to the beginning of the pattern after trial
sewing or when the stitching is sewn incorrectly.
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine, and then press .
→ Sewing returns to the beginning of the selected
pattern (“W”) from the point where sewing was
stopped.
b
Press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
sewing.
CAUTION
• If the stitches bunch when thread density is
changed to , return the thread density to
. If you continue sewing when the stitches
are bunched, the needle may bend or break.
Memo
• Even if you select a new pattern after
changing the thread density, the thread
density remains the same until you change
it.
• You cannot change thread density for a
combined pattern after additional patterns
are added.
Memo
• If this key is pressed while sewing is
stopped, patterns can be added at the end
of a combined stitch pattern. (In this
example, “!” is added.)
EDITING STITCH PATTERNS
182
Checking the Image
You can display an approximate size image of the
selected stitch pattern. You can also check and
change the colors of the image on the screen.
a
Press .
→ An image of the selected pattern is displayed.
b
Press to change the thread color in
the image to red, blue, black or yellow.
→ The color changes every time you press the button.
c
Press to display the enlarged image.
d
Use / / / to view any part of the
image that extends out of the viewable
display area.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
• You can also sew from this screen when the
presser foot symbol is displayed.
• Image of some patterns will display in
default size only.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
183
4
You can combine many varieties of stitch patterns, such as character stitches, cross stitches, satin stitches,
or stitches you design with MY CUSTOM STITCH function (see chapter 5 for information about MY
CUSTOM STITCH). You can also combine stitch patterns of different sizes, mirror image stitch patterns,
and others.
Before Combining
Single stitch sewing is automatically selected for sewing combined patterns. If you want to sew the
pattern continuously, press after finishing the stitch pattern combination.
When changing sizes, creating mirror images, or making other adjustments to a combined stitch pattern,
be sure to edit the selected stitch pattern before selecting the next one. You cannot edit a stitch pattern
once the next stitch pattern is selected.
Combining Various Stitch
Patterns
Example:
a
Press .
b
Select .
c
Press .
→ The display returns to the stitch selection screen.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
184
d
Press .
e
Select .
f
Press to sew the pattern continuously.
Combining Large and Small
Stitch Patterns
Example:
a
Press .
→ The large size stitch will be selected.
b
Press again, then press to select
the small size.
→ The pattern is displayed in a smaller size.
Memo
• Patterns are deleted individually starting
with the last pattern entered by pressing
.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
185
4
c
Press to sew continuously.
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
Combining Horizontal Mirror
Image Stitch Patterns
Example:
a
Press .
b
Press again, then press .
→ The pattern is flipped along a vertical axis.
c
Press .
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
186
Combining Stitch Patterns of
Different Length
Example:
a
Press , then press once.
→ The length of the image is set to .
b
Select again, then press 3 times.
→ The length of the image is set to .
c
Press .
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
Making Step Stitch Patterns (for
7mm Satin Stitch Patterns Only)
You can use the keys with 7mm satin
stitch patterns to create a step effect, also called
step stitch patterns.
* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the left.
* Press to move the stitch pattern a distance
equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to the right.
Example:
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
Character/Decorative Stitches
187
4
a
Press .
b
Press .
→ The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
c
Press again.
d
Press .
→ The next stitch pattern will move to the left.
e
Press .
→ The entered pattern is repeated.
■ More Examples
Press → → → → .
Press → → → → →
→ → → .
COMBINING STITCH PATTERNS
188
Press → → → .
Press → → → → → →
→ → .
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Character/Decorative Stitches
189
4
Stitch Data Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using stitch data other than that created and saved in this
machine.
■ Types of Stitch Data that can be Used
• In the Character/Decorative Stitch memory, “.pmv”, “.pmx” and “.pmu” stitch data files can be used with this
machine. “.pmu” stitch data files can be retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the file, it is
saved as a “.pmv” stitch data file.
• Using data other than that created using this machine or the machine which create “.pmu” data file, may
cause the machine to malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB external media. Use external media that meets the following
specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only from;
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of USB media with the USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
•Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• xD-Picture Card
• To create file folders, use a computer.
■ Connecting Your Machine to the PC
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the stitch data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains special
characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We recommend
using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9, “-”, and “_”.
• Stitch data in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If stitch data is stored in a folder in “Removable
Disk”, that stitch data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Note
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB Devices/Media, and it will take about 5 to 6
seconds to recognize the Devices/Media. (Time will differ depending on the USB Device/Media).
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
190
Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Machine’s Memory
You can save often used stitch patterns in the
machine’s memory. A total of about 1 MB of stitch
patterns can be saved in the machine’s memory.
a
Press .
b
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the
pattern is saved, the display returns to the original
screen automatically.
■ If the Memory is Full
If the following screen appears while you are trying
to save a pattern on the machine’s memory, the
memory is too full to hold the currently selected
stitch pattern. To save the stitch pattern in the
machine’s memory, you have to delete a previously
saved stitch pattern. Press , and then refer to
“Retrieving Stitch Patterns from the Machine’s
Memory” on page 192.
Saving Stitch Patterns to USB
Media
When sending stitch patterns from the machine to
USB media, plug the USB media into the
machine’s top USB port.
a
Press .
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will
lose the stitch pattern you are saving.
Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a stitch
pattern.
• See page 192 for information on retrieving a
saved stitch pattern.
Memo
• USB media is commercially available, but
some USB media may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for
more details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the
USB media Reader/Writer into the
machine’s USB port.
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Character/Decorative Stitches
191
4
b
Insert the USB media into either of the USB
ports on the machine.
a USB port
b USB media
c
Press .
* Press when connecting the USB media to
the USB port for mouse.
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the
pattern is saved, the display returns to the original
screen automatically.
Saving Stitch Patterns in the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the stitch
patterns can be temporarily retrieved from and
saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in your
computer. A total of about 3 MB of stitch patterns
can be saved in the “Removable Disk”, but the
saved stitch patterns are deleted when the
machine is turned OFF.
For Computers and Operating Systems, see
“Connecting Your Machine to the PC” on
page 189.
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
b
Turn on your computer and select
“Computer (My Computer)”.
* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports
on the computer and machine whether or not they
are turned on.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in
“Computer (My Computer)” on the computer.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will
lose some or all of the pattern you are
saving.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will
lose the stitch pattern you are saving.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it
is difficult to insert the connector, do not
insert it with force and check the orientation
of the connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
192
c
Press .
d
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
→ The stitch pattern will be temporarily saved to
“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My
Computer)”.
e
Select the stitch pattern’s .pmv file and
copy the file to the computer.
Retrieving Stitch Patterns from
the Machine’s Memory
a
Press .
→ The pocket selection screen appears.
b
Choose a stitch pattern to retrieve.
* If the entire saved stitch pattern is not displayed,
press the thumbnail.
* Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
a Saved stitch patterns
Note
• Do not turn off the machine while the
“Saving…” screen is showing. You may
lose the data.
a
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Character/Decorative Stitches
193
4
c
Press .
* Press to delete the stitch pattern.
→ The selected stitch pattern is retrieved and the
sewing screen will be displayed.
Recalling from USB Media
You can recall a specific stitch pattern from either
direct USB media or a folder in the USB media. If
the stitch pattern is in a folder, check each folder
to find the stitch pattern.
a
Insert the USB media into either of the USB
ports on the machine (see page 190).
a USB port
b USB media
b
Press .
* Press when connecting the USB media to the
USB port for mouse.
→ Stitch patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
194
c
Press when there is a subfolder to sort
two or more stitch patterns to USB media,
the stitch pattern in the subfolder is
displayed.
* Press to return to the original screen without
recalling.
a Folder name
b Stitch patterns in a folder show only the first
pattern of any combined patterns.
c Path
→ The path shows the current folder at the top of the
list.
Stitch patterns and a subfolder within a folder are
displayed.
* Press to return to the previous folder.
* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
d
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to recall.
e
Press .
* Press to delete the stitch pattern. The pattern
will be deleted from the USB media.
→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing
screen will be displayed.
Recalling from the Computer
For Computers and Operating Systems, see
“Connecting Your Machine to the PC” on
page 189.
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine (see page 191).
b
On the computer, open “Computer (My
Computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.
a
c
b
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Character/Decorative Stitches
195
4
c
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
Disk”.
→ Stitch pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to
the machine.
d
Press .
→ The stitch patterns in the computer are displayed on
the selection screen.
e
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want
to recall.
* Press to return to the original screen without
recalling.
f
Press .
* Press to delete the stitch pattern.
The pattern will be deleted from the “Removable
Disk” folder in your computer.
→ The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the sewing
screen will be displayed.
Note
• While data is being written, do not
disconnect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.
Note
• The pattern recalled from the computer is
only temporarily written to the machine. It is
erased from the machine when the machine
is turned off. If you wish to keep the stitch
pattern, store it in the machine (“Saving
Stitch Patterns in the Machine’s Memory”
on page 190).
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
196
Chapter 5
MY CUSTOM STITCH
DESIGNING A STITCH ......................................... 198
ENTERING STITCH DATA..................................... 200
■ Key Functions......................................................................... 200
■ Moving a Point ......................................................................202
■ Moving Part or All of the Design ........................................... 203
■ Inserting New Points ............................................................. 204
Editing Stitch Stored in the Machine .......................................204
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES ................... 206
Storing Custom Stitches in Your List .......................................206
■ If the Memory is Full ............................................................. 206
Retrieving Stored Stitches .......................................................206
DESIGNING A STITCH
198
By using the MY CUSTOM STITCH function, you
can register stitches you have created yourself.
You can also sew designs combining MY
CUSTOM STITCH creations with built-in
characters (see page 183).
a
Draw the stitch design on the grid sheet
(part code SA507, GS3:X81277-151).
b
Decide the spacing of the stitch.
* By adjusting the spacing of a stitch, you can create
various patterns with one stitch.
c
Place points where the pattern intersects
with the grid, and connect all the points
with a line.
d
Determine the x and y coordinates of each
of the marked points.
DESIGNING A STITCH
Memo
• Stitches that you create with MY CUSTOM
STITCH can be a maximum of 7 mm
(approx. 9/32 inch) wide and 37 mm
(approx. 1-1/3 inches) long.
• Stitches can be designed more easily with
MY CUSTOM STITCH if you first draw the
stitch on the included grid sheet.
Memo
• Simplify the design so that it can be sewn
as a continuous line. For a more attractive
stitch, close the design by intersecting lines.
If the design is to be repeated and linked,
the start point and end point of the design
should be at the same height.
Memo
• This will determine the stitch design that will
be sewn.
DESIGNING A STITCH
199
MY CUSTOM STITCH
5
Examples of Custom Stitches
Stitch123456789101112131415
01218222321171412963136
003610131413111314131063
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
12 41 43 40 41 38 35 32 30 32 35 41 45 47 44
00471113141310630047
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
45 47 50 54 56 55 51 45 70
11131413106300
Stitch123456789101112131415
0 3032323233353537353230302926
0017101211812141411538
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
24 18 13 12 13 10 12 8 12 7 12 6 10 5 10
1013141412111098663202
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
16 19 23 22 17 22 23 19 42
1006106000
Stitch123456789101112131415
03581217202427293132302724
0581113141413121196310
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
21 18 16 15 15 16 18 21 25 28 33 37 41 43 44
0135810121314141311850
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Stitch123456789101112131415
05458781111111611740
773770773773037
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
4 7 11 16 21 20 21 24 23 24 27 27 27 32 27
11 14 11 7 7 11 7 7 14 7 7 11 7 7 11
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
23 20 16 20 23 27 32
141173037
ENTERING STITCH DATA
200
■ Key Functions
a This area displays the stitch being created.
b Displays the number of the present set point over the total number of points in the stitch.
c Displays the y-coordinate of over the x-coordinate of .
ENTERING STITCH DATA
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
d Single/triple stitching
key
Press this key to select whether one or three stitches will be sewn
between two points.
201
e Point delete key Press this key to delete a selected point. 202
f Return key Press this key to exit the entering stitch data screen. —
g Test key Press this key to sew a test of the stitch. 202, 206
h MY CUSTOM STITCH
memory key
Press this key to store the stitch being created. 206
i Block move key Press this key to group points together and move them together. 203
j Insert key Press this key to insert new points on the stitch design. 204
k Set key Press this key to set a point on the stitch design. 201-203
l
Arrow keys
Use these keys to move over the display area.
201-204
m
Point-to-point key
Use these keys to move from point to point on the stitch, or to
the first or last point entered on the stitch.
202-204
n Stitch edit key Press this key to edit the utility stitches in the machine.
204
o Grid direction key Press this key to change the direction of the grid sheet. 201
p Enlarger key Press this key to see an enlarged version of the stitch being created. 201
q Image key Press this key to view an image of the stitch. 202
a
m
i
h
g
b
d
f
c
e
q
l
k
j
o
n
p
ENTERING STITCH DATA
201
MY CUSTOM STITCH
5
a
Press and then .
b
Press .
c
Use to move to the coordinates
of the first point on the grid sheet.
* Press to change the direction of the grid
sheet.
* Press to enlarge the image of the stitch being
created.
a Currently selected point/Total number of points
b Coordinates of
d
Press to add the point indicated by .
* To insert coordinates with the touch pen, move the
tip of the pen to a desired point. Once you release
the pen from the screen a point will be entered into
the graph at those coordinates. The number of the
currently selected points along with the total
number of points will be displayed.
e
Select whether one stitch or three stitches
will be sewn between the first two points.
* To sew three stitches, press the key so that it appears
as .
f
Use to move to the second point
and press .
a
b
ENTERING STITCH DATA
202
g
Repeat the steps above for each point that
you have drawn on the grid sheet until the
stitch design is drawn on the screen as a
continuous line.
* Press to delete a selected point entered.
* Press to sew a test-run of the stitch.
* Press to return to the original screen.
* Press to view an image of the stitch.
■ Moving a Point
a
Press or to move to the point
that you want to move.
* To move to the first point, press .
* To move to the last point, press .
b
Use to move the point.
* You can also move by using the touch pen.
Memo
• If you have entered points that are too close
together, the fabric may not feed properly.
Edit the stitch data to leave a larger space
between points.
• If the stitch design is to be repeated and
linked, make sure that linking stitches are
added so that the stitch designs will not
overlap.
a Linking stitches
• You can touch on the grid sheet to set the
point, or you can also use a USB mouse.
ENTERING STITCH DATA
203
MY CUSTOM STITCH
5
■ Moving Part or All of the Design
a
Press or to move to the first
point of the section that you want to move.
* To move to the first point, press .
* To move to the last point, press .
b
Press .
→ The selected point and all points that were entered
after it are selected.
c
Press or to move the section.
d
Press .
→ The section will be moved.
ENTERING STITCH DATA
204
■ Inserting New Points
a
Press or to move to a place on
the design where you want to add a new
point.
* To move to the first point, press .
* To move to the last point, press .
b
Press .
→ A new point is entered and moves to it.
c
Use to move the point.
* You can also move by using the touch pen.
Editing Stitch Stored in the
Machine
a
Press .
ENTERING STITCH DATA
205
MY CUSTOM STITCH
5
b
Select the stitch category and stitch that
you want to edit.
* Press or to display the other stitches.
→ Selected stitch is displayed in the grid sheet.
c
Press .
→ Edit the stitch as you like.
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES
206
Storing Custom Stitches in Your
List
Stitch patterns created using the MY CUSTOM
STITCH function can be stored for later use. Once
you finish entering the stitch data, press ,and
choose where to save data. The “Saving…”
message appears and the stitch will be stored.
Before storing a stitch, press to sew a test-
run of the stitch.
■ If the Memory is Full
If the following message appears after is
pressed, the stitch pattern cannot be stored because
either the machine’s memory is full or the stitch
pattern being stored is larger than the amount of
space available in the memory. To be able to store
the stitch pattern in the machine’s memory, a
previously stored stitch pattern must be deleted.
Refer to “Retrieving Stored Stitches” on page 206.
Retrieving Stored Stitches
a
Press .
b
Select the device to retrieve the pattern
from.
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES
Memo
• Storing a stitch pattern takes a few
seconds.
• For details on retrieving a stored stitch
pattern, see page 206.
Note
• Do not turn off the machine while the
“Saving…” message is displayed, otherwise
the stitch pattern data being saved may be
lost.
Memo
• You can also retrieve the stitches by the
procedure to retrieve the Decorative/
Character stitches. Refer to the page 192 to
194.
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES
207
MY CUSTOM STITCH
5
c
Select the stitch pattern.
* Press to return to the previous screen
without retrieving.
d
Press to start editing the pattern.
* To delete the stored stitch pattern, press .
* You can start sewing in this screen.
USING STORED CUSTOM STITCHES
208
Chapter 6
Basic Embroidery
BEFORE EMBROIDERING..................................... 210
Embroidery Step by Step ........................................................210
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED pointer ..............211
Attaching the Embroidery Unit ..............................................211
■ About the Embroidery Unit .................................................... 211
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit ............................................. 212
SELECTING PATTERNS.......................................... 214
■ Copyright Information ........................................................... 214
■ Pattern Selection Screens ...................................................... 215
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/Decorative Alphabet Patterns/
Utility Embroidery Patterns/Bobbin Work Patterns ................216
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns....................................217
Selecting Frame Patterns.........................................................219
Selecting Patterns from Embroidery Cards ..............................219
■ About Embroidery Card Reader (Sold Separately) and
USB Card Writer Module*...................................................... 219
■ About Embroidery Cards (Sold Separately)............................. 219
Recalling from USB Media ......................................................221
Recalling from the Computer ..................................................222
EDITING PATTERNS ............................................. 224
■ Key Functions......................................................................... 225
Previewing the Pattern ...........................................................226
Moving the Pattern .................................................................226
Rotating the Pattern ................................................................227
Changing the Size of the Pattern .............................................228
■ Changing the Size and the Density of the Pattern .................. 229
■ Changing the Size by Dragging............................................... 229
Creating a Horizontal Mirror Image ......................................229
Changing Font Type ................................................................230
Editing Letters (Size/Font Type) ..............................................230
Changing the Density (Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only) ........................................................................231
Changing the Colors of Alphabet Character Patterns .............232
Changing the Configuration of Alphabet Character Patterns
....233
Deleting the Pattern ...............................................................233
Displaying Patterns in the Screen Magnified ...........................234
■ Selecting the Percent of Magnification................................... 234
Changing Alphabet Character Spacing....................................235
Separating Combined Character Patterns ...............................235
Changing the Thread Color ....................................................236
Creating a Custom Thread Table.............................................237
■ Adding a Color to the Custom Thread Table from the List ..... 238
■ Saving the Custom Thread Table to USB media...................... 239
■ Recalling the Custom Thread Table data from USB media ..... 239
Choosing a Color from the Custom Thread Table ...................240
Find New Color Schemes With the Color Shuffling Function
.....241
Designing Repeated Patterns...................................................243
■ Sewing Repeated Patterns ...................................................... 243
■ Repeating One Element of a Repeated Pattern.......................245
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns.............................................246
■ Assigning Thread Marks..........................................................246
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly......................................247
Duplicating a Pattern ..............................................................249
After Editing............................................................................249
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN ................. 250
■ Key Functions......................................................................... 251
COMBINING PATTERNS .......................................252
Editing Combined Patterns ..................................................... 252
■ Selecting combined embroidery patterns................................254
Sewing Combined Patterns..................................................... 255
PREPARING THE FABRIC.......................................256
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric ............ 256
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame ........................ 257
■ Types of Embroidery Frames ..................................................257
■ Inserting the Fabric.................................................................258
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet ...................................................259
Embroidering Small Fabrics or Fabric Edges .......................... 259
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics.....................................................259
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners...............................................260
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape................................................260
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME .............261
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame............................................261
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION..............263
Checking the Needle Drop Point With
the Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer......................... 263
■ Adjusting the LED Pointer ......................................................263
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the LED Pointer............................264
Aligning the Embroidering Position Using the Built-In Camera
.... 264
Using the Built-In Camera to Align the Embroidering Position
..... 266
Specifying the Embroidering Position With the Sensor Pen ... 268
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position by the Pattern Edge........269
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position by the Pattern Center.....270
Checking the Pattern Position ............................................... 271
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN .............................273
Embroidering Attractive Finishes............................................ 273
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover .............................................274
Embroidering Patterns ............................................................ 274
Spool Stand LED..................................................................... 276
■ When Not Using the Spool Stand LED ....................................276
Using Appliqués ..................................................................... 276
■ 1. Creating the Appliqué Piece................................................277
■ 2. Sewing the Appliqué Position on the Base Fabric................277
■ 3. Affixing the Appliqué Piece to the Base Fabric ...................278
■ 4. Embroidering the Remainder of the Pattern........................279
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY
PROCESS................................................................280
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread ......................................... 280
If the Thread Breaks During Sewing ...................................... 281
Restarting from the Beginning ............................................... 282
Resuming Embroidery After Turning Off the Power ............... 282
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
210
Embroidery Step by Step
Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for embroidery.
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Step 3
Step 1, 2
Step 7 Step 5
Step 4
Step 6, 8
Step 9
Step # Aim Action Page
1 Presser foot attachment Attach embroidery foot “W+”. 211
2 Checking the needle Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. * 77
3 Embroidery unit attachment Attach the embroidery unit. 211
4 Bobbin thread setup For the bobbin thread, wind embroidery bobbin thread and set it in place. 54
5 Fabric preparation Attach a stabilizer material to the fabric, and hoop it in the embroidery frame. 256
6 Pattern selection Turn the main power to ON, and select an embroidery pattern. 214
7 Embroidery frame attachment Attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit. 261
8 Checking the layout Check and adjust the size and position of the embroidery. 263
9 Embroidery thread setup Set up embroidery thread according to the pattern. 62
* It is recommended that a 90/14 needle should be used when embroidering on heavy weight fabrics or stabilizing products (for example;
denim, puffy foam, etc.). Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14 is not recommended for embroidery.
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Basic Embroidery
211
6
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W+”
with LED pointer
a
Remove the presser foot and presser foot
holder. For details, refer to “CHANGING
THE PRESSER FOOT” on page 70.
b
Position the embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer on the presser foot bar by
aligning the notch of the presser foot to the
large screw.
Side view
c
Hold the embroidery foot in place with
your right hand, and then use the included
multi-purpose screwdriver to securely
tighten the presser foot holder screw.
a Presser foot holder screw
d
Plug the connector of the embroidery foot
“W+” with LED pointer into the jack on the
back left side of your machine.
e
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
■ About the Embroidery Unit
CAUTION
• When attaching a presser foot, always press
on the screen. You may accidentally
press the “Start/Stop” button and possibly
cause injury.
• Be sure to use embroidery foot “W+” with LED
pointer or “W” (optional) when doing
embroidery. Using another presser foot may
cause the needle to strike the presser foot,
causing the needle to bend or break and
possibly cause injury.
CAUTION
• Use the included multi-purpose screwdriver to
firmly tighten the screw of the presser foot
holder. If the screw is loose, the needle may
strike the presser foot and possibly cause
injury.
CAUTION
• Do not move the machine with the embroidery
unit attached. The embroidery unit could fall
off and cause injury.
• Keep your hands and foreign objects away
from the embroidery carriage and frame when
the machine is embroidering. Otherwise,
injury may result.
• To avoid distorting your embroidery design, do
not touch the embroidery carriage and frame
when the machine is embroidering.
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
212
a
Turn the main power to OFF, and remove
the flat bed attachment.
b
Insert the embroidery unit connection into
the machine connection port. Push lightly
on the connection port cover until the unit
clicks into place.
a Embroidery unit connection
b Machine connection port
c
Turn the main power to ON.
→ The following message will appear.
d
Press .
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit
a
Press , then press .
→ The carriage will move to the removal position.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
Note
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches
with the embroidery unit attached. Touch
and . The feed dog will
automatically raise for utility and decorative
stitching.
• Be sure to turn off the power before
installing the embroidery unit. Otherwise,
the machine may be damaged.
• Do not touch the inner connector of the
embroidery unit. The pins on the
embroidery unit connection may be
damaged.
• Do not apply strong force to the embroidery
unit carriage or pick up the unit by the
carriage. Otherwise, the embroidery unit
may be damaged.
• Store the embroidery unit in a safe place to
prevent damage to the unit.
Note
• Be sure there is no gap between the
embroidery unit and the sewing machine. If
there is a gap, the embroidery patterns will
not embroider with the correct registration.
• Do not push on the carriage when installing
the embroidery unit onto the machine.
Moving the carriage may damage the
embroidery unit.
CAUTION
• Always remove the embroidery frame before
pressing . Otherwise, the frame may
strike the embroidery foot, and possibly cause
injury.
Note
• Be sure to turn off the machine before
removing the embroidery unit, otherwise
damage to the machine may result.
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Basic Embroidery
213
6
c
Press the release button, and pull the
embroidery unit away from the machine.
a Release button
CAUTION
• Do not carry the embroidery unit by holding
the release button compartment.
SELECTING PATTERNS
214
■ Copyright Information
The patterns stored in the machine and patterns sold separately are intended for private use only. Any public or
commercial use of copyrighted patterns is an infringement of copyright law and is strictly prohibited.
There are many character and decorative embroidery patterns stored in the machine’s memory (see the “QUICK
REFERENCE GUIDE” for a full summary of patterns in the machine’s memory). You can also use patterns sold
separately.
Once the machine has finished the initialization and the carriage has moved to the start position, the pattern
selection screen will display.
If another screen is displayed, press , then to display the screen below.
SELECTING PATTERNS
a Embroidery patterns
b Character patterns
c Decorative alphabet patterns
d Frame patterns
e Utility embroidery patterns
f Bobbin work patterns (see page 381)
g Pattern type selection keys
h My Design Center (see page 338)
i Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (see
page 315)
j Patterns saved in USB media (see page 221)
k Patterns saved on the computer (see page 222)
l Press this key to position the embroidery unit for
storage
a
l
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
SELECTING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
215
6
■ Pattern Selection Screens
There are 6 categories of patterns in this machine.
Embroidery patterns
Frame patterns
Alphabet characters
Utility embroidery patterns
Decorative alphabet patterns Bobbin work patterns
SELECTING PATTERNS
216
Selecting Embroidery Patterns/
Decorative Alphabet Patterns/
Utility Embroidery Patterns/
Bobbin Work Patterns
a
Press the category tab and then press the
pattern type selection key or pattern key
you want to embroider.
* Refer to “How to Create Bobbin Work” on page 371
about the bobbin work embroidery.
a Pattern category tab
b Pattern type/pattern selection key
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
embroider.
* Press to view the next page.
* Press to view the previous page.
* Press the category tab to return to the previous
screen.
→ The selected pattern is displayed.
c
Press to create a mirror image of the
pattern as needed.
* If a mistake has been made when selecting the
pattern, press to return to the previous
screen, and select the pattern you want to
embroider.
* Press to darken the screen background for
the pattern with bright thread colors, to get a clearer
image.
d
Press or touch the selected pattern.
→ The pattern selected is outlined in red on the “Edit”
display.
e
Press to edit the selected pattern.
* Refer to “EDITING PATTERNS” on page 224 about
the “Edit” display.
a
b
SELECTING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
217
6
f
Press .
→ The embroidering screen is displayed.
g
Press to edit the pattern before
embroidering in this “Embroidery” screen.
* Refer to “VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN” on
page 250.
* To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press .
h
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
* See “Embroidering Patterns” on page 274.
Selecting Alphabet Character
Patterns
Example: Entering “Blue Sky”.
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the font you want to
embroider.
c
Press the tab to select a character type.
d
Press and then enter “B”.
* If you want to change the size of a character, select
the character and then press to change the size.
The size changes each time you press the key, from
large to medium to small.
* If you make a mistake, press to erase the
mistake.
* If the pattern is too small to see clearly, you can use
the key to check it.
Memo
• If you continue adding characters after
changing the size, the new characters will
be entered in the new size.
• You cannot change the size of the entered
characters after combining character stitch
patterns.
SELECTING PATTERNS
218
e
Press and enter “lue”.
f
Press to enter a space.
g
Press again and enter “S”.
h
Press and then enter “ky”.
i
Press .
→ The embroidering screen is displayed.
j
Follow the steps from e - h of “Selecting
Embroidery Patterns/Decorative Alphabet
Patterns/Utility Embroidery Patterns/
Bobbin Work Patterns” on page 216.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
219
6
Selecting Frame Patterns
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the frame shape you want
to embroider in the top part of the screen.
a Frame shapes
b Frame patterns
→ Various frame patterns are displayed at the bottom
part of the screen.
c
Press the key of the frame pattern you want
to embroider.
* If you make a mistake selecting the pattern, press the
key of the pattern you want to embroider.
→ The selected pattern is displayed on the screen.
d
Press .
→ The embroidering screen is displayed.
e
Follow the steps from e to h of “Selecting
Embroidery Patterns/Decorative Alphabet
Patterns/Utility Embroidery Patterns/
Bobbin Work Patterns” on page 216.
Selecting Patterns from
Embroidery Cards
■ About Embroidery Card Reader (Sold
Separately) and USB Card Writer
Module*
• Use only an embroidery card reader designed for
this machine. Using an unauthorized embroidery
card reader may cause your machine to operate
incorrectly.
* If you have purchased the PE-DESIGN Ver5 or later,
PE-DESIGN NEXT, PE-DESIGN Lite, PED-BASIC or
PE-DESIGN PLUS, you can plug the included USB
card writer module into the machine as an
embroidery card reader, and recall patterns.
■ About Embroidery Cards (Sold
Separately)
• Use only embroidery cards manufactured for this
machine. Using unauthorized cards may cause
your machine to operate incorrectly.
• Embroidery cards sold in foreign countries
cannot be used with this machine.
• Store embroidery cards in the hard case.
a
b
Note
• Embroidery patterns cannot be saved from
the machine to an embroidery card inserted
into a connected USB card writer module*.
SELECTING PATTERNS
220
a
Plug the optional embroidery card reader/
USB card writer module into the USB port
on the machine.
a USB port
b Embroidery card reader/USB card writer module
b
Insert the card completely into the card
reader/USB card writer module.
* Insert the embroidery card so that the end with a
printed arrow is facing up.
c
Press .
→ The patterns on the embroidery card are displayed
on the selection screen.
d
Press the key of the pattern you want to
recall.
* Press to return to the original screen.
e
Press .
Note
• Two embroidery USB card readers/USB
card writer modules cannot be used with
this machine at the same time. If two
embroidery USB card readers/USB card
writer module are inserted, only the
embroidery USB card reader/USB card
writer module inserted first is detected.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
221
6
Recalling from USB Media
You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from
either direct USB media or a folder in the USB
media. If the pattern is in a folder, check each
folder to find the embroidery pattern.
a
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the machine.
a USB port
b USB media
b
Press .
→ Embroidery patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.
c
Press when there is a subfolder to sort
two or more stitch patterns to USB media,
the embroidery pattern in the subfolder is
displayed.
a Folder name
b Embroidery patterns in USB media
c Path
* The path to show the current folder at the top of the
list.
Embroidery patterns and subfolders within a folder
are displayed.
* Press to return to the previous folder.
* Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
d
Press the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.
* Press to return to the original screen.
Note
• The processing speed may vary by quantity
of data.
a
b
c
SELECTING PATTERNS
222
e
Press .
* Press to delete the pattern from the USB
media.
→ The Embroidery Edit screen is displayed.
Recalling from the Computer
Refer to “Connecting Your Machine to the PC” on
page 312 for the available computer operating
systems.
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine (see page 314).
b
On the computer, open “Computer (My
Computer)” then go to “Removable Disk”.
c
Move/copy the pattern data to “Removable
Disk”.
→ Pattern data in “Removable Disk” is written to the
machine.
d
Press .
→ The patterns in the computer are displayed on the
selection screen.
Note
• While data is being written, do not
disconnect the USB cable.
• Do not create folders within “Removable
Disk”. Since folders are not displayed, stitch
pattern data within folders cannot be
recalled.
SELECTING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
223
6
e
Press the key of the pattern you want to
recall.
f
Press .
* Press to delete the pattern from the computer.
→ The Embroidery Edit screen is displayed.
EDITING PATTERNS
224
a Shows the size of the entire combined pattern.
b Shows the size of the pattern currently selected.
c Shows the distance from the center of the frame.
d Shows the degree of rotation for the pattern.
e Shows the color sequence and stitching times of each step of the pattern currently selected.
EDITING PATTERNS
Memo
• If a key display is darkened, you cannot use that function with the selected pattern.
b
a
e
c
d
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
225
6
■ Key Functions
Using these keys, you can edit the pattern as you like. Press to display the editing window.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Move key Press to display the pattern moving window. 226
b Size key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. Patterns can be enlarged or
reduced.
228
c Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, ten
degrees or ninety degrees at a time.
227
d Thread palette key Press this key to change the colors of the displayed pattern. 236
e Border key Press this key to make and edit a repeating pattern. 243
f Duplicate key Press this key to duplicate a pattern. 249
g Density key Press this key to change the density of frame patterns or character patterns. 231
h Horizontal mirror
image key
Press this key to make a horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern. 229
i Multi color key Press this key to change the color of individual characters in a pattern. 232
j Array key Press this key to change the configuration of a character pattern. 233
k Character spacing
key
Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. 235
l Font Type key Press to change the font type after entering all the characters. 230
m Separate key Press to display the pattern separate window. You can separate the combined
character patterns to adjust the spacing or edit separately afterwards.
235
n Letter Edit key Press to edit characters after entering all. You can change the size or font type. 230
o Embroidery key Press this key to call up the embroidering screen. 249
p Memory key Press this key to save a pattern in the machine’s memory, USB media or a
computer.
313, 314
q Pattern select key When a combined pattern is selected, use these keys to select a part of the
pattern to edit.
254
r Delete key Press this key to delete the selected pattern (the pattern outlined by the red
box).
233
s Add key Press this key to add another pattern to the editing pattern. 249
s
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
r p oq
EDITING PATTERNS
226
Previewing the Pattern
a
Press .
→ An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered
appears.
b
Press to select the frame
used in the preview.
* Frames displayed in dark gray cannot be selected.
* Press to enlarge the image of the pattern.
* The pattern can be sewn as it appears in the
following display.
c
Press .
Moving the Pattern
The pattern can be moved to the desired position
by dragging on the screen using your finger, the
touch pen or connected mouse without displaying
the editing window. If you need some fine
adjustment, move the pattern from the editing
window.
a
Press to display the pattern move
window.
b
Select the desired pattern by pressing
, if there are several patterns on the
screen.
c
Use to move the pattern in the
direction shown by the arrow. Press to
center the pattern.
a Distance from the center
b Pattern select key
The pattern can also be moved by dragging it.
If a USB mouse is connected, move the mouse to
position the pointer on the desired pattern, and
then select and drag the pattern. The pattern can
also be dragged by selecting it directly in the
screen with your finger or the touch pen.
d
Press .
Memo
• You can begin sewing from this screen by
pressing the “Start/Stop” button.
a
b
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
227
6
Rotating the Pattern
a
Press .
b
Select the angle of rotation for the pattern.
* Press to return the pattern to its original
position.
a Degree of rotation
c
Press .
Rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the left.
Rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the right.
Rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the left.
Rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the right.
Rotate the pattern 1 degree to the left.
Rotate the pattern 1 degree to the right.
Rotate the pattern 0.1 degree to the left.
Rotate the pattern 0.1 degree to the right.
0°
Memo
• You can rotate the pattern by rotating the
mouse wheel. Rotate the mouse wheel
away from you to rotate the pattern 10
degrees to the left. Rotate the mouse wheel
toward you to rotate the pattern 10 degrees
to the right.
• You can move patterns using on
the window.
a
EDITING PATTERNS
228
Changing the Size of the Pattern
a
Press .
b
Select the direction in which to change the
size.
a Size of the pattern
c
Press .
Enlarge the pattern proportionately.
Decrease the pattern proportionately.
Stretch the pattern horizontally.
Decrease the pattern horizontally.
Stretch the pattern vertically.
Decrease the pattern vertically.
Return the pattern to its original appearance.
Memo
• Some patterns or characters can be
enlarged more than others.
• Some patterns or characters can be
enlarged to a greater degree if they are
rotated 90 degrees.
• You can change the size of the pattern by
rotating the mouse wheel. Rotate the
mouse wheel away from you to shrink the
pattern. Rotate the mouse wheel toward
you to enlarge the pattern.
• You can move patterns using on
the window.
a
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
229
6
■ Changing the Size and the Density of
the Pattern
You can change the pattern size while maintaining
the desired thread density. The machine recalculates
the stitch density automatically. With this function,
the pattern will be enlarged or reduced at a larger
ratio than with normal pattern resizing.
a
Press in the size window.
* Press : When changing the size, the
pattern keeps the original density.
* Press : When you want to increase or
decrease the density of the design.
b
Change the density.
* Press to make the pattern less dense.
* Press to make the pattern more dense.
c
Select the direction in which to change the
size.
d
Press .
■ Changing the Size by Dragging
You can also change the pattern size by dragging the
red point on the pattern image using your finger,
touch pen or connected mouse.
Creating a Horizontal Mirror
Image
Press so it appears as to create a
horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern.
Press again to return the pattern to normal.
Note
• Be sure to sew trial embroidery using same
fabric and threads as project in order to
check the sewing results.
• This function cannot be used with alphabet
character patterns, frame patterns or border
patterns. However, a border pattern can be
edited after this function has been used.
• Patterns with a large number of stitches
(about 100,001 or more) cannot be resized
while maintaining a desired thread density.
The maximum limit for the number of
stitches differs depending on the data size
of pattern.
Note
• If the pattern is enlarged and there is space
between stitches, a better effect can be
achieved by increasing the thread density.
• If the pattern is reduced and the stitching is
too thick, a better effect can be achieved by
reducing the thread density.
Note
• You can change the pattern size with one
finger. Using two or more fingers does not
work.
EDITING PATTERNS
230
Changing Font Type
a
Press .
b
Select the font type.
→ All the characters in the screen change into the
selected font type.
* Press or to display the font type that is not
on the screen.
c
Press .
→ The new font is selected.
Editing Letters (Size/Font Type)
a
Press .
b
Select a letter you want to edit by pressing
or .
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
231
6
c
Change the size of letters.
→ Selected letter will be resized.
* Press if the resize keys are not displayed.
d
Select the direction in which to change the
size, or press .
→ Refer to “Changing the Size of the Pattern” on
page 228 about selecting the direction.
e
Press to change font type, and then
select the font type.
→ Selected letter's font type will be changed.
f
Press .
Changing the Density
(Alphabet Character and Frame
Patterns Only)
The thread density for some alphabet character
and frame patterns can be changed.
A setting between 80% and 120% in 5%
increments can be specified.
a
Press .
EDITING PATTERNS
232
b
Change the density.
* Press to make the pattern less dense.
* Press to make the pattern more dense.
a Normal
b Fine (stitches closer together)
c Coarse (stitches farther apart)
→ The pattern density changes each time you press a
button.
c
Press .
Changing the Colors of Alphabet
Character Patterns
Combined alphabet character patterns can be
sewn with each letter in a different color. If “Multi
Color” is set, the machine stops after each
character is sewn so that the thread can be
changed to a different color.
a
Press so that it appears as .
* Press the key again to return to the original setting.
b
Press .
c
After a character is sewn, change the thread
color, and then sew the next character.
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
233
6
Changing the Configuration of
Alphabet Character Patterns
a
Press .
b
Select the layout. (Example: )
When selecting an arc, use and to
change the degree of the arc.
* Press to make the arc flatter.
* Press to make the arc rounder.
c
Press .
Deleting the Pattern
Press to delete the pattern from the screen.
Memo
• When selecting , and
change to and . You can
increase or decrease the incline.
• You can move patterns using on
the window.
EDITING PATTERNS
234
Displaying Patterns in the Screen
Magnified
a
Press to magnify the image.
* The image is magnified by 125%, 150% and 200%
as you press .
b
Check the displayed pattern.
→ Use to scroll through the display in
any direction.
c
Press to return the pattern image to the
normal size (100%).
■ Selecting the Percent of
Magnification
a
Press .
b
Press the percent of magnification you
desire.
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
235
6
Changing Alphabet Character
Spacing
a
Press .
b
Select the spacing.
* Press to increase the character spacing.
* Press to decrease the character spacing.
* Press to return the pattern to its original
appearance.
c
Press .
Separating Combined Character
Patterns
Combined character patterns can be separated to
adjust the character spacing or to separately edit
the patterns after all characters have been entered.
a
Press .
Memo
• You can move patterns using on
the window.
Note
• It is not recommended to edit data and
transfer to other or older version machines.
Some features do not apply in other
machines, so problems may occur.
• Character spacing can be reduced only
when characters are arranged normally on a
straight line.
Memo
• The spacing between characters can be
reduced to 50% of the narrowest character
in the group.
EDITING PATTERNS
236
b
Use to select where the pattern is
to be separated, and then press to
separate it. For this example, the pattern
will be separated between “C” and “D”.
c
Press .
Changing the Thread Color
You can change the thread color by moving the
color to be changed to the top of the sewing order
and selecting a new color from the thread colors in
the machine.
a
Press .
→ The thread color palette screen displays.
b
Press the thread color key you want to
change.
*Press to display the thread color that is not
on the screen.
→ The selected thread color image is displayed.
a Selected thread color image
b 64 Embroidery thread color table
Note
• A separated character pattern cannot be
combined again.
Memo
• You can move patterns using on
the window.
b
a
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
237
6
c
Press or color tip to choose a
new color from the color palette.
* To return to the original color, press . If
multiple colors have been changed, this command
will return all colors to their original colors.
a Color palette
→ The selected color appears at the top of the sewing
order.
→ The display shows the changed colors.
d
Press .
Creating a Custom Thread Table
You can create a custom thread table containing
the thread colors that you most often use by
selecting thread colors from the machine’s
extensive list of thread colors from nine different
thread brands. You can select any color and move
the color to your custom thread table.
a
Press and then press .
b
Use or press directly to
choose where to add a color on the custom
thread table.
* You can scroll through 100 colors at a time using
and on the custom thread table.
c
Use to select one of the thread
brands in the machine.
Memo
• To select a color from the Custom Thread
Table, “Choosing a Color from the Custom
Thread Table” on page 240.
Note
• Some machines may already have an
additional 300 Robison-Anton thread colors
contained in the custom thread table. 300
Robison-Anton thread colors table data can
be downloaded from our website
“ http://support.brother.com
”.
a
EDITING PATTERNS
238
d
Use to
enter a color’s 4-digit number.
* If you make a mistake, press to erase the
entered number, and then enter the correct number.
a Custom thread table
b Select the thread brand.
c Choose where to add a color.
d Press to recall the custom thread table
data (see page 239).
e Enter a color’s 4-digit number.
e
Press .
a Thread brand
b Entered thread color number
→ The selected thread color is set in the custom thread
table.
f
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
thread colors are specified.
* To delete a specified color from the palette, press
.
* To delete all the specified color from the palette,
press .
g
Press .
■ Adding a Color to the Custom
Thread Table from the List
a
Press and then press .
b
Press to display the thread list.
c
Use to select a thread color.
a Thread list
b Thread brand
d
Press .
Note
• If is not pressed, the thread color
number will not be changed.
a
d
c
e
b
b
a
Note
• You can save the created custom thread
table data. Refer to “Saving the Custom
Thread Table to USB media” on page 239
for the detailed procedure.
b
a
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
239
6
e
Repeat the previous steps until all desired
thread colors are specified.
* To delete a specified color from the palette, press
.
* To delete all the specified color from the palette,
press .
f
Press .
■ Saving the Custom Thread Table to
USB media
You can save a custom thread table data file to USB
media.
a
Press and then press .
b
Set your desired colors in the custom thread
table according to the procedure in
“Creating a Custom Thread Table” on
page 237.
c
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the machine.
a USB port
b USB media
d
Press .
→ Select the USB port, and then the “Saving…” screen
is displayed. When the data is saved, the display
returns to the original screen automatically.
■ Recalling the Custom Thread Table
data from USB media
You can recall a custom thread table data from USB
media.
a
Insert the USB media containing the custom
thread table data into the USB port.
a USB port
b USB media
Note
• Custom thread table data can only be saved
to USB media. You cannot save the data in
the machine’s memory or to your computer.
• Custom thread table data is saved as “.pcp”
data file.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will
lose some or all of the data you are saving.
Note
• Do not store two or more “.pcp” data file in
USB media. You can only recall one custom
thread table data at a time.
EDITING PATTERNS
240
b
Press and then press .
c
Press .
→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the data
is loaded to the machine, the display returns to the
original screen automatically.
d
The recalled custom thread table is
displayed on the screen.
Choosing a Color from the
Custom Thread Table
You can select a color from the up to 300 thread
colors you have set in the custom thread table.
a
Press .
→ The thread color palette screen displays.
b
Press the thread color key you want to
change.
*Press to display the thread color that is not
on the screen.
→ The selected thread color image is displayed.
c
Press .
a Custom thread change key
→ The custom thread table will appear.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will
lose some or all of the data you are saving.
a
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
241
6
d
Press to choose a new color
from the custom thread table.
* Use and to scroll through the custom thread
table.
* Press to return to the original color.
* You can choose colors from the custom thread table
by directly touching the screen with the touch pen
or your finger.
a Custom thread table
→ The display shows the changed colors.
e
Press .
Find New Color Schemes With
the Color Shuffling Function
With the color shuffling function, the machine
suggests new color schemes for the embroidery
pattern that you have selected. After you select the
desired effect from the four available (“Random”,
“Vivid”, “Gradient” and “Soft”), sample color
schemes for the selected effect are displayed.
a
Press .
→ The thread color palette screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The color shuffling screen appears.
c
Select the color table and the number of
colors you want to create the pattern with.
a Thread table (64 colors)
b Custom thread table (300 colors)
c Number of colors to be used.
a
Note
• This function may not be available
depending on the pattern you select (ex. a
bordered embroidery pattern, a pattern
which can not be flipped).
If the alarm sounds when the color shuffling
key is pressed, select another pattern.
a
b
c
EDITING PATTERNS
242
d
Select the number of colors you want to use
and then select the desired effect.
a Effects for schemes
→ If you select “Random” or “Gradient”, the color
specifying screen will appear.
* If you select “Vivid” or “Soft”, proceed to step
f.
e
Press and specify the thread color to
use in the desired effect.
* If you don’t need to specify the thread color, just set
to .
“Manual” setting for “Random”
You can select up to 6 colors to be used in the
“Random” effect.
The effect will be created using the selected
colors.
a Select colors from the pallet.
b Selected colors are listed.
Note
• Selection for the desired number of colors
must stay within the range for the number of
thread changes for the pattern you
selected.
• If an error message appears in this step,
refer to page 405.
• If you have not set any color in the custom
thread table, the color shuffling key will be
grayed out. In that case, use the thread
table (64 colors) instead or set some colors
in the custom thread table. Refer to
“Creating a Custom Thread Table” on
page 237 for the detail.
a
a
b
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
243
6
“Manual” setting for “Gradient”
You can select one color to be used in the
“Gradient” effect.
The effect will be created with a color you select.
a Select a color from the pallet.
b Selected color is displayed.
f
Press .
g
Press the desired color scheme from
samples.
* Press to display the new schemes.
a Press to review the previous schemes.
h
Press and then, select the displayed
color scheme.
* Press to return to the previous screen.
* You can continue selecting color schemes from the
selected page prior to pressing .
* Press or to display the other color schemes.
→ The thread color palette screen will appear.
Designing Repeated Patterns
■ Sewing Repeated Patterns
Using the border function, you can create stitches
using repeated patterns. You can also adjust the
spacing of the patterns within a repeated pattern
stitch.
a
Press .
Note
• Maximum 10 pages of schemes can be
reviewed. After 10 pages of schemes, the
oldest page is deleted every time you press
.
a
b
a
EDITING PATTERNS
244
b
Select the direction in which the pattern
will be repeated.
a Vertical direction
b Horizontal direction
c Repeating and deleting vertical keys
d Repeating and deleting horizontal keys
e Spacing keys
→ The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
c
Use to repeat the pattern on the left
and to repeat the pattern on the right.
* To delete the left pattern, press .
* To delete the right pattern, press .
d
Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.
* To widen spacing, press .
* To tighten spacing, press .
a Press to change a repeated pattern back to
one single pattern.
e
Complete repeated patterns by repeating
steps
b through d.
f
Press .
e
a
c
e
b
d
Memo
• You can only adjust the spacing of patterns
included in the red frame.
Memo
• When there are two or more patterns, all
patterns will be grouped together as one
pattern in the red frame.
• When changing the direction in which the
pattern will be repeated, all of the patterns
in the red frame will automatically be
grouped as one repeating unit. Press
to change a repeated pattern back to one
single pattern. See the following section on
how to repeat one element of a repeated
pattern.
a
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
245
6
■ Repeating One Element of a
Repeated Pattern
By using the Cut function, you can select one
element of a repeated pattern and repeat only that
single element. This function allows you to design
complex repeated patterns.
a
Choose the direction in which the repeated
pattern will be cut.
* Press to cut horizontally.
* Press to cut vertically.
→ The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
b
Use and to select the cut line.
→ The cut line will move.
c
Press .
→ The repeated pattern will be divided into separate
elements.
d
Press .
e
Use and to select the element to
repeat.
f
Repeat the selected element.
g
Press .
Note
• Once you have cut a repeated pattern into
separate elements, you cannot return to the
original repeated pattern.
• Each element can be edited separately in
the edit screen. See “Selecting combined
embroidery patterns” on page 254.
EDITING PATTERNS
246
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns
Press to automatically change the sewing
order of colors in combined border embroidery
patterns so that the same color can be continuously
sewn. This allows you to continue sewing without
repeatedly changing the upper thread or changing
the sewing order manually.
■ Assigning Thread Marks
By sewing thread marks, you can easily align
patterns when sewing a series. When sewing is
finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the shape of
an arrow will be sewn using the final thread. When
sewing a series of patterns, use the point of this
arrow for positioning the following designs to be
sewn.
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press to select the thread mark to be
sewn.
Memo
• In combined stitch patterns that contain two
or more border patterns or other patterns
combined with border patterns, the sewing
order of only the border patterns is
changed.
• When a group of two or more patterns using
border patterns is repeated, the sewing
order is changed so that the same color can
be sewn continuously in each pattern.
Memo
• When repeatedly sewing individual patterns,
thread marks can be sewn around the
perimeter of the pattern only.
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
247
6
d
Press .
Embroidering the Pattern
Repeatedly
After creating the repeated pattern, rehoop the
embroidery frame and keep sewing for the next
pattern.
a
Select the boarder pattern with the thread
mark at the center of the end of the pattern.
* Refer to “Assigning Thread Marks” on page 246.
b
Press , then .
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
→ When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is
sewn with the last thread color.
d
Remove the embroidery frame.
e
Rehoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.
Memo
• When there are two or more elements, use
and or and to select a
pattern that you want to assign a thread
mark(s) to.
Memo
• The optional border frame allows you to
easily rehoop the fabric without removing
the embroidery frame from the machine.
Note
• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the
embroidering area for the next pattern is
within the embroidering area of the
embroidery sheet.
a Pattern embroidered first
b Position of pattern to be embroidered next
c Embroidering area of embroidery sheet
EDITING PATTERNS
248
f
Attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then touch .
g
Touch to set the starting point to the
center of the pattern.
h
Touch .
i
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot.
j
Press .
k
Press .
l
Press the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the thread mark on
the fabric is aligned on the starting point in
the camera view window.
a Grid lines
b Thread mark on the fabric
c Positioning keys
Memo
• Press to enlarge the camera view. By
enlarging the camera view, you can make a
close adjustment for the needle drop
position moving the embroidery frame little
by little.
a
c
b
EDITING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
249
6
m
If the pattern position cannot be aligned
using the positioning keys, rehoop the
fabric, and then try again to align the
position with the positioning keys.
n
Press to return to the previous
screen.
o
Remove the thread mark.
p
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
Duplicating a Pattern
a
Press .
→ The duplicate is positioned over the original pattern.
a Duplicated pattern
After Editing
a
Press .
* To combine the pattern with other patterns, select
(see page 252).
* See page 273 for more information about sewing
patterns.
Note
• When embroidering the repeated pattern,
you cannot rotate the pattern in the camera
view window. If the pattern is rotated in the
camera view window, you cannot sew the
pattern properly aligned even if the thread
mark and the starting point are aligned in
the camera view window.
Note
• If multiple patterns are displayed in the
screen, only the pattern selected using
and is duplicated.
• Move and edit each duplicated pattern
individually.
Memo
• If you want to return to the edit screen after
pressing , press .
a
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN
250
a Shows the presser foot code.
Attach embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer or “W” (optional) for all embroidery projects. When the foot presser
symbol is displayed on the screen, you are able to sew.
b Shows the embroidery frames that can be used for the selected pattern. Be sure to use the proper frame (see page
257).
c Shows the size of the selected pattern.
d Shows a preview of the selected pattern.
e Shows the boundary for embroidering with the selected frame in the settings screen. (see page 306)
f Shows how many stitches are in the selected pattern and how many stitches have been sewn so far.
g Shows the time necessary to sew the pattern, and the time already spent sewing the pattern (not including time for
changing and automatically trimming the thread).
h Shows the number of colors in the selected pattern, and the number of the color currently being sewn.
i Shows how far the sewing position is from the center (when you move the sewing position).
j Shows the degree of rotation of the pattern.
k Shows the part of the embroidery that will be sewn with the first thread color.
l Shows the order for thread color changes and the embroidering time for each thread color.
* The displayed time is the approximate time that will be required. The actual embroidering time may be longer than the
displayed time, depending on the embroidery frame that is used. In addition, the amount of time required to change
thread colors is not included.
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN
Note
• There is an explanation of additional key functions on the next page.
c
l
a
d
e
i
j
f g h
k
b
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN
Basic Embroidery
251
6
■ Key Functions
Using these keys, you can move or rotate pattern, etc. Press to display the editing window.
e
b
f
m
r
noq p
d
c
g
h
i
j
k
l
a
Note
• Some operations or functions are not
available for certain patterns. If the key
display is darkened, you cannot use that
function or operation with the selected
pattern.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
a Needle point check
key
Press this key to check the needle drop point with the light of the LED pointer. 263
b Fabric image save key Press this key to save the currently displayed fabric image. 286
c Fabric scan key Press this key to scan the fabric to align the embroidery position. 286
d Image key Press this key for a preview of the sewn image. 226
e Move key Press to display the pattern moving window. 226
f Uninterrupted
embroidery key
Press this key to embroider the selected pattern with a single color. 286
g Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern 0.1 degree, 1
degree, 10 degrees or 90 degrees at a time.
227
h Basting key Press to add the basting stitch to the pattern. You can set the desired basting
distance.
290
i Appliqué key Press to create an appliqué piece using the selected pattern. 291
j Embroidery
positioning key
Press this key to align the embroidering position using the built-in camera. 266
k Pattern connect key Press to start pattern connecting embroidering. You can connect the patterns
accurately using the built-in camera.
321
l Sensor function key Press this key to use the sensor function. 268
m Memory key Press this key to save a pattern in the machine’s memory, USB media or a
computer.
313, 314
n Trial key Press this key to check the position of the pattern.The embroidery frame moves
to the desired position so you can check that there is enough space to sew the
pattern.
271
o Starting point key Press this key to move the needle start position to align the needle with the
pattern position.
307, 308
p Forward/Back key Press this key to move the needle forward or back in the pattern; useful if the
thread breaks while sewing or if you want to start again from the beginning.
281-283
q Cut/Tension key Press this key to specify automatic thread cutting, thread trimming or the
thread tension. For embroidery, these functions are set automatically.
301-304
r Return key Press this key to return to the pattern type selection screen. —
COMBINING PATTERNS
252
Editing Combined Patterns
Example: Combining alphabet characters
with an embroidery pattern and
editing
a
Press to select an embroidery
pattern.
b
Select .
c
Press or touch the selected pattern.
COMBINING PATTERNS
COMBINING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
253
6
d
Press .
e
Press to enter the alphabet
characters.
* Press to return to the previous screen.
f
Select and enter “LOVE”.
→ The characters you enter will be displayed in the
center of the display.
g
Press .
h
Press to change the layout of the
characters. Press .
* See page 233 for more information about changing
the layout.
i
Use to move the characters.
* With a USB mouse, your finger or the touch pen,
drag the characters to move them.
COMBINING PATTERNS
254
j
Press to change the color of the
characters.
* See page 236 for more information about changing
the color.
k
When all editing is finished, press .
■ Selecting combined embroidery
patterns
If multiple patterns have been combined, use
to select the pattern to be edited. If a USB mouse is
connected, the pattern can be selected by clicking
it. Move the mouse to position the pointer over the
desired pattern, and then click the left mouse
button. In addition, patterns can be selected by
directly touching the screen with your finger or
touch pen.
Memo
• Use to select patterns that are
overlapping and cannot be selected by
clicking them or by touching the screen.
COMBINING PATTERNS
Basic Embroidery
255
6
Sewing Combined Patterns
Combined patterns will be embroidered in the
order they were entered. In this example, the
embroidery order will be as follows:
→
a
Embroider by following the color
order on the right side of the display.
→ After the hart are embroidered, the [+] cursor will
move to the “LOVE” part of the pattern.
b
Embroider .
→ When “LOVE” is embroidered, the display returns to
the embroidering screen.
Note
• Follow the directions in “Embroidering
Patterns” on page 274.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
256
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers
(Backing) to the Fabric
a
Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger
than the embroidery frame being used.
a Size of the embroidery frame
b Iron-on stabilizer (backing)
b
Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the
wrong side of the fabric.
a Fusible side of stabilizer
b Fabric (wrong side)
PREPARING THE FABRIC
CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.
• When using layers with thicker batting etc., you can sew more attractive embroidery by adjusting the
embroidery presser foot height in the embroidery settings screen (see below).
• In the case of thick terry cloth towels we recommend that you place a piece of water soluble stabilizer on
the top surface of the towel. This will help to reduce the nap of the toweling and result in more attractive
embroidery.
Note
• Press , and select page 7 to use and in the “Embroidery Foot Height” display in the
embroidery settings screen. Adjust the presser foot height for thick or puffy fabrics.
• To increase the space between the presser foot and the needle plate, set the “Embroidery Foot
Height” to a larger number, 1.5 mm setting is used for most embroidery.
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery
when sewing stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics
which cause pattern shrinkage. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury. Not using
a stabilizer material may result in a poor finish
to your project.
Memo
• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such
as towel or corduroy, use water soluble
stabilizer (sold separately) for best results.
The water soluble stabilizer material will
dissolve completely in water, giving the
project a more attractive finish.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
Basic Embroidery
257
6
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame
■ Types of Embroidery Frames
Other optional embroidery frames can be used. When choosing frames that do not appear on the screen, be sure
to check the design size of the embroidery field of the optional frame. Check with your authorized Brother dealer
for frame compatibility.
Select a frame that matches the pattern size. Included frame options are displayed on the LCD.
a Highlighted: Can be used
b Shaded: Cannot be used
Super large Extra Large Large Medium
Embroidery field
36 cm × 24 cm
(approx. 14 inches × 9-1/2
inches)
Embroidery field
30 cm × 20 cm
(approx. 12 inches × 8 inches)
Embroidery field
18 cm × 13 cm
(approx. 7 inches × 5 inches)
Embroidery field
10 cm × 10 cm
(approx. 4 inches × 4 inches)
Use when embroidering patterns
larger than 30 cm × 20 cm
(approx. 12 inches × 8 inches).
Use when embroidering
connected or combined
characters or patterns, or when
embroidering large patterns.
Use when embroidering patterns
between 10 cm × 10 cm (approx.
4 inches × 4 inches) and
18 cm × 13 cm (approx. 7 inches
× 5 inches).
Use when embroidering patterns
under 10 cm × 10 cm
(approx. 4 inches × 4 inches).
CAUTION
• If you use a frame that is too small, the presser foot may strike the frame during sewing and cause injury.
ab
PREPARING THE FABRIC
258
■ Inserting the Fabric
a
Lift-up and loosen the frame adjustment
screw and remove the inner frame.
a Frame adjustment screw
b Inner frame
b
Lay the fabric right side up on top of the
outer frame.
Re-insert the inner frame making sure to align the
inner frame’s with the outer frame’s .
a Inner frame’s
b Outer frame’s
c Frame adjustment screw
c
Slightly tighten the frame adjustment screw,
and then remove the slack in the fabric by
pulling on the edges and corners. Do not
loosen the screw.
d
Gently stretch the fabric taut, and tighten
the frame adjustment screw to keep the
fabric from loosening after stretching.
* After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is
taut.
* Make sure the inside and outside frames are even
before you start embroidering.
a Outer frame
b Inner frame
c Fabric
e
Return the frame adjustment screw to its
initial position.
Note
• If the fabric is not securely held in the
embroidery frame, the embroidery design
will sew out poorly. Insert the fabric on a
level surface, and gently stretch the fabric
taut in the frame. Follow the steps below to
insert the fabric correctly.
Memo
• Stretch the fabric from all four corners and
all four edges. While stretching the fabric,
tighten the frame adjustment screw.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
Basic Embroidery
259
6
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet
When you want to embroider the pattern in a
particular place, use the embroidery sheet with the
frame.
a
With a chalk pencil, mark the area of the
fabric you want to embroider.
a Embroidery pattern
b Mark
b
Place the embroidery sheet on the inner
frame. Align the guide lines on the
embroidery sheet with the mark you made
on the fabric.
a Inner frame
b Guide line
c
Gently stretch the fabric so there are no
folds or wrinkles, and press the inner frame
into the outer frame.
a Inner frame
b Outer frame
d
Remove the embroidery sheet.
Embroidering Small Fabrics or
Fabric Edges
Use an embroidery stabilizer to provide extra
support. After embroidering, remove the stabilizer
carefully. Attach the stabilizer as shown in the
following examples. We recommend using a
stabilizer for embroidery.
■ Embroidering Small Fabrics
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
Memo
• You can use the included multi-purpose
screw driver setting the position to “3”,
when you loosen or tighten the frame
adjustment screw.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
260
■ Embroidering Edges or Corners
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small
piece of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray
adhesive, attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
■ Embroidering Ribbons or Tape
Secure with double-sided tape or a temporary spray
adhesive.
a Ribbon or tape
b Stabilizer
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
Basic Embroidery
261
6
a
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
raise the presser foot.
b
Align the embroidery frame guide with the
right edge of the embroidery frame holder.
a Embroidery frame holder
b Embroidery frame guide
c
Slide the embroidery frame into the holder,
making sure to align the embroidery frame’s
with the holder’s .
a Arrow mark
d
Lower the frame-securing lever to be level
with the frame to secure the embroidery
frame in the embroidery frame holder.
a Frame-securing lever
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame
a
Raise the frame-securing lever.
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
Note
• Wind and insert the bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame.
CAUTION
• If the frame-securing lever is not lowered, the
following message appears. You cannot start
sewing until you lower the frame-securing
lever.
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
262
b
Pull the embroidery frame toward you.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Basic Embroidery
263
6
The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the embroidery frame. If the pattern needs to be
repositioned for better placement on the garment, you can check the layout before starting embroidery.
Checking the Needle Drop Point
With the Embroidery Foot “W+”
with LED Pointer
With the embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer,
you can check the needle drop position before
embroidering.
a
Press in the embroidery screen.
→ The LED pointer indicates the needle drop point.
* The LED pointer turns off automatically by lowering
the presser foot or returning to the previous page.
■ Adjusting the LED Pointer
Adjust the LED pointer if it indicates a point different
than the actual needle drop point. Before adjusting
the LED pointer, mark the actual needle drop point
on the fabric to be embroidered, and then hoop the
fabric and attach the embroidery frame.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Display page 8 of the Embroidery settings
screen.
c
Press .
→ The Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer
Adjustment screen appears.
a LED pointer adjustment
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Memo
• When the LED pointer is turned on, the
presser foot height is automatically adjusted
according to the fabric thickness.
• If is not displayed, you cannot use the
LED pointer.
Note
• With bulky fabrics, the position may not be
accurate due to the various depths of the
fabrics.
• With fabric that has a very uneven surface
such as quilting, the fabric thickness may
not be correctly measured. In this case, the
pointer indication should be used only as a
reference.
Note
• As a default, the key mentioned in the
following procedures appear in light gray
and is not available. To enable the key for
specifying the settings, attach embroidery
foot “W+” with LED pointer to the machine.
The key is enabled after the embroidery foot
is plugged in.
a
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
264
d
Use or to adjust the LED pointer so
that it indicates the actual needle drop
point.
e
Press twice to return to the original
screen.
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the LED
Pointer
a
Follow the steps from a to d to display
the embroidery foot with LED pointer
adjustment screen.
b
Use or to adjust the brightness of
the LED pointer.
c
Press twice to return to the original
screen.
Aligning the Embroidering
Position Using the Built-In
Camera
The camera built into this machine can be used to
easily align the embroidering position. This is
useful for patterns which need to be embroidered
in a particular position as shown below.
a
Use a chalk pencil to draw a cross at the
desired embroidering location.
a Chalk pencil mark
* Display the grid lines or cross grid lines in the
pattern display area to check the pattern orientation.
(Refer to “Changing the Embroidery Frame Display”
on page 306.)
b
Hoop the fabric.
c
Select the pattern on your sewing machine
and press .
Note
• The specified setting is saved in the
machine’s memory. This is useful for
positioning during continuous
embroidering.
• For normal use, return the setting to “00”.
Note
• When hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame,
make sure that the embroidery pattern will fit within
the embroidering area of the frame being used.
a Embroidering area
b Embroidery pattern size
c Chalk pencil mark
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Basic Embroidery
265
6
d
Press in the embroidering screen.
e
Press to set the starting point to the
center of the pattern.
f
Press .
g
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot.
h
Press .
i
Press the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the cross-shaped
chalk mark drawn on the fabric is displayed
in the camera view window.
a Positioning keys
j
Press to display the grid lines.
a Grid lines
b Chalk mark on the fabric
Memo
• Press to enlarge the camera view. By
enlarging the camera view, you can make a close
adjustment for the center point of the pattern
moving the embroidery frame little by little.
a
a
b
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
266
k
Adjust the orientation of the pattern by
pressing the orientation keys until the grid
lines are parallel with the chalk mark drawn
on the fabric. (Refer to “Rotating the
Pattern” on page 227.)
a Center point of the pattern
l
Press the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the center point of
the pattern in the camera view window is
aligned with the chalk mark drawn on the
fabric.
m
Press to return to the previous
screen.
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
* See “Embroidering Patterns” on page 274.
Using the Built-In Camera to
Align the Embroidering Position
The embroidering position can easily be aligned
using the machine’s built-in camera and the
included embroidery positioning sticker.
a
Affix the embroidery positioning sticker to
the location in the fabric to be
embroidered. Place the embroidery
positioning sticker so that the center of the
larger circle is at the center or edge of the
embroidery pattern.
a Embroidery positioning sticker
b Center or edge of the embroidery pattern
c Embroidery field
a
Note
• When inserting the fabric in the embroidery
frame, check that the embroidery pattern
fits within the embroidery field for the frame
that is used.
a Embroidery field
b Embroidery pattern
c Embroidery positioning sticker
• Depending on the type of fabric that is
used, a part of the embroidery positioning
sticker may remain attached when it is
peeled off. Before using the embroidery
positioning sticker, check that it can be
cleanly removed from a scrap piece of the
fabric to be used.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Basic Embroidery
267
6
b
Press to display the editing
window, and then press .
c
Following message appears. Press .
→ The embroidering position will return to the original
position, even if you changed before.
d
Select the position you want to set as the
reference point.
* Select if you want to embroider referring the
embroidery positioning sticker as the center of the
pattern.
e
Press .
f
Following message appears. Press .
→ The built-in camera automatically searches for the
embroidery positioning sticker, and then the
carriage is moved so that the selected reference
point of the embroidery pattern is aligned with the
embroidery positioning sticker. The brightness of the
machine light is dimmed while the built-in camera
searches for the embroidery positioning sticker.
Note
• Attach embroidery foot “W+” with LED
pointer before pressing . The
embroidery foot “W+” lowers and check the
fabric thickness, to help the built-in camera
recognize the embroidery positioning
sticker.
Note
• If the following warning message appears,
touch and reposition the embroidery
positioning sticker so the pattern is within
the embroidery field, and then press
again.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
268
g
A reminder message appears. Remove the
embroidery positioning sticker from the
fabric, and press .
* To remove the embroidery positioning sticker more
easily, press so that the embroidery frame
moves slightly forward and away from under the
needle. After the embroidery positioning sticker is
removed, press .
h
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
* See “Embroidering Patterns” on page 274.
Specifying the Embroidering
Position With the Sensor Pen
By using the sensor pen, the embroidering position
can be adjusted to the desired location.
a
Press , and then .
b
Press .
→ The embroidering position selection screen appears.
c
Select the reference point for positioning
the embroidery pattern.
* To align the edge of the embroidery with a pattern
or mark on the fabric, select the edge of design. If
the center of the pattern to be embroidered is
determined, select the center position.
Note
• After the included embroidery positioning
stickers are used up, optional stickers are
available. For details, refer to “Options” on
page 22.
Note
• If the message “The carriage of the
embroidery unit will move. Keep your hands
etc. away from the carriage.” appears
during the operation, ensure safety, and
then press .
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Basic Embroidery
269
6
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position
by the Pattern Edge
a
From the keys on the screen, press the edge
to be the reference for positioning.
b
Press .
c
With the sensor pen, touch the point on the
fabric corresponding to corner a in the
screen.
a Square of pattern edge
b Pattern position
d
With the sensor pen, touch the point on the
fabric corresponding to corner b in the
screen.
a Square of pattern edge
b Pattern position
e
Press to adjust the positions.
→ If you don’t need to adjust the positions, continue to
step
i.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
270
f
Press to move the LED pointer on
the fabric for adjusting the first position.
g
Press to apply the setting.
h
Press to move the LED pointer on
the fabric for adjusting the second position.
i
Press to apply the setting.
j
The preview in the screen is updated
according to the specified embroidering
position.
k
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
■ Selecting the Embroidering Position
by the Pattern Center
a
Press in the following screen.
b
With the sensor pen, touch 2 points on the
fabric corresponding to the numbers in the
center of the embroidery pattern.
a Center line of the pattern
b Pattern position
→ Specified point number turns into red.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
Basic Embroidery
271
6
c
Press to adjust the positions.
→ If you don’t need to adjust the positions, continue to
step
g.
d
Press to move the LED pointer on
the fabric for adjusting the first position.
e
Press to apply the setting.
f
Press to move the LED pointer on
the fabric for adjusting the second position.
g
Press to apply the setting.
h
The preview in the screen is updated
according to the specified embroidering
position.
i
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
Checking the Pattern Position
The embroidery frame moves and shows the
pattern position. Watch the frame closely to make
sure the pattern will be sewn in the right place.
a
Press .
→ The following screen is displayed.
Note
• When using the sensor pen to specify the
embroidering position, it may not be
possible to exactly specify the desired
location. In this case, move the embroidery
frame to align the center of the pattern with
the location indicated by the LED pointer.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
272
b
From , press the key for the position
that you want to check.
a Selected position
→ The needle will move to the selected position on the
pattern.
c
Press .
Memo
• To see the entire embroidering area, press
. The embroidery frame moves and
shows the embroidery area.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle is up when the
embroidery frame is moving. If the needle is
down, it could break and result in injury.
a
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN
Basic Embroidery
273
6
Embroidering Attractive Finishes
There are many factors that go into sewing
beautiful embroidery. Using the appropriate
stabilizer (see page 256) and hooping the fabric in
the frame (see page 257) are two important factors
mentioned earlier. Another important point is the
appropriateness of the needle and thread being
used. See the explanation of threads below.
Included with this machine are two bobbin cases.
Follow the explanation below.
Bobbin case (recommended for sewing and for
embroidering with included 60 weight bobbin
thread)
a Standard bobbin case (green marking on the
screw)
Standard bobbin case originally installed in the
machine has a green marking on the screw. We
recommend using the included embroidery
bobbin thread with this bobbin case. Do not adjust
the tension screw on this bobbin case with the
green marked screw.
Bobbin case (for prewound or other embroidery
bobbin threads)
a Bobbin case (no color on the screw)
The bobbin case with no color on the screw is set
with tighter tension for embroidery with different
weights of bobbin threads and a variety of
embroidery techniques. This bobbin case is
identified with a dark colored mark on the inside
of the bobbin cavity. The tension screw on this
case can be adjusted if necessary.
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN
Thread Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for
use with this machine.
Other embroidery threads may not
yield optimum results.
Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread
intended for use with this machine.
Memo
• If you use threads other than those listed
above, the embroidery may not sew out
correctly.
CAUTION
• When embroidering on large garments
(especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do
not let the fabric hang over the table.
Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move
freely and the embroidery frame may strike the
needle, causing the needle to bend or break
and possibly cause injury.
Place the fabric so that it does not hang off the
table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
Note
• Before embroidering, check that there is
enough thread in the bobbin. If you start to
sew your embroidery project without
enough thread in the bobbin, you will need
to rewind the bobbin in the middle of the
embroidery pattern.
• Do not leave objects in the range of motion
of the embroidery frame. The frame may
strike the object and cause a poor finish to
the embroidery pattern.
• When embroidering on large garments
(especially jackets or other heavy fabrics),
do not let the fabric hang over the table.
Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot
move freely, and the pattern may not turn
out as planned.
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN
274
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover
Under some conditions, based on the type of fabric,
stabilizer, or thread being used, there may be some
looping in the upper thread. In this case, attach the
included embroidery needle plate cover to the
needle plate. Attach the cover by inserting the two
projections on the underside of the cover into the
notches on the needle plate as shown below.
a Groove
b Projection
c Notch
To remove the embroidery needle plate cover, place
your fingernail in the groove and lift the plate out.
Embroidering Patterns
Example:
a Embroidery color order
b Cursor
a
Using the automatic needle threader,
thread the machine for the first color.
CAUTION
• Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far
as possible to attach it. If the embroidery
needle plate cover is not securely attached, it
may cause the needle to break.
Note
• Do not use the embroidery needle plate
cover for any applications other than
embroidery.
Memo
• The [+] cursor moves over the pattern,
showing which part of the pattern is being
sewn.
b
a
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN
Basic Embroidery
275
6
b
Lower the presser foot, then press the
“Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
→ When the first color is completely sewn, the machine
will automatically trim the threads and stop. The
presser foot will then automatically be raised.
On the embroidery color order display, the next
color will move to the top.
c
Remove the thread for the first color from
the machine. Thread the machine with the
next color.
d
Repeat the same steps for embroidering the
remaining colors.
a Current stitch numbers/Total stitch numbers
b Current time/Total time
c The part of pattern embroider next
d Embroidered colors/Total colors
→ When the last color is sewn, “Finished
embroidering” will appear on the display. Press
, and the display will return to the original
screen.
Memo
• If you want to get more attractive finishes,
try the procedures below;
- After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop”
button again to stop the machine.
- Trim the excess thread at the end of the
seam. If the end of the seam is under the
presser foot, raise the presser foot, then
trim the excess thread.
• If there is thread left over from the beginning
of sewing, it may be sewn over as you
continue embroidering the pattern, making
it very difficult to deal with the thread after
the pattern is finished. Trim the threads at
the beginning of each thread change.
Memo
• The Thread Trimming Function is originally
set to trim excess thread jumps (threads
linking parts of the pattern, etc.). Depending
on the type of thread and fabric that are
used, an end of upper thread may remain
on the surface of the fabric at the beginning
of the stitching. After embroidering is
finished, cut off this excess thread.
If the setting has been turned off, trim the
excess thread jumps using scissors after
the pattern is finished.
See page 304 for information on the thread
trimming function.
c
d
b
a
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN
276
Spool Stand LED
This machine is equipped with a spool stand LED.
Its lighting status and color indicate the machine
status and thread color for embroidering.
a Spool stand LED
■ When Not Using the Spool Stand
LED
a
Press .
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 5 of the Embroidery settings
screen.
d
Set “Spool Stand LED” to “OFF”.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
Using Appliqués
This machine can sew patterns that contain an
appliqué. Follow the procedure described below
to sew patterns with (appliqué piece),
(appliqué position) and
(appliqué) in the embroidery color order display.
Required materials
• Fabric for the appliqué piece
• Fabric for the appliqué base
• Stabilizer material
• Craft glue
• Embroidery thread
Memo
• Use the color in which the LED lights up as
a guide. Since the actual embroidery thread
color may differ slightly, be sure to also
check the thread color number in the LCD.
Lit Lights up in thread color for
embroidering
Lit (color changing) Indicates thread spool replacement
(then lights up in embroidery thread
color)
Flashing (red) Error
Flashing (green) End of stitching
Memo
• When embroidering a pattern with
uninterrupted embroidering, the LED lights
up in gray.
• When embroidering an appliqué pattern, the
LED light indicates no color while
embroidering “
APPLIQUE
MATERIAL”, “
APPLIQUE
POSITION” or “
APPLIQUE”.
1. Create the appliqué piece.
È
2. Sew the appliqué position on the base
fabric.
È
3. Affix the appliqué piece to the base
fabric.
È
4. Embroider the remainder of the pattern.
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN
Basic Embroidery
277
6
■ 1. Creating the Appliqué Piece
a
Select the appliqué pattern, and then
continue to the embroidering screen.
b
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong side
of the appliqué fabric.
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame, and then
attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit.
a Appliqué (cotton, felt, etc.)
b Stabilizer
c
Thread the machine with the embroidery
thread, lower the presser foot lever, and
then press the “Start/Stop” button to sew
the cutting line of the appliqué piece.
→ The outline of the appliqué piece is sewn, and then
the machine stops.
a Cutting line for appliqué piece
b Fabric for appliqué piece
d
Remove the fabric for the appliqué piece
from the embroidery frame, and then
carefully cut along the sewn cutting line.
■ 2. Sewing the Appliqué Position on
the Base Fabric
a
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong side
of the fabric for the appliqué base.
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame, and then
attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit.
Note
• If (appliqué piece),
(appliqué position) and (appliqué)
appear in the embroidery color order
display, the names and numbers of the
thread colors to be used will not appear.
Select the thread colors according to those
in the appliqué pattern.
Note
• If the appliqué piece is cut out along the
inside of the cutting line, it may not be
correctly attached to the fabric. Therefore,
carefully cut out the appliqué piece along
the cutting line.
• After cutting out the appliqué piece,
carefully remove the thread.
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN
278
b
Thread the machine with the embroidery
thread, lower the presser foot lever, and
then press the “Start/Stop” button to sew
the appliqué position.
→ The position of the appliqué is sewn, and then the
machine stops.
a Appliqué position
b Base fabric
c
Remove the embroidery frame from the
embroidery unit.
■ 3. Affixing the Appliqué Piece to the
Base Fabric
a
Lightly apply craft glue to the back of the
appliqué piece, and then attach it to the
base fabric within the outline of the
position sewn in step
b of “2. Sewing the
Appliqué Position on the Base Fabric”.
b
After the appliqué piece is attached, attach
the embroidery frame to the machine.
Thread the machine with the embroidery thread, lower
the presser foot lever, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button to sew the appliqué.
→ The appliqué piece is sewn to the base fabric, and
then the machine stops.
Note
• Do not remove the base fabric from the
embroidery frame until all sewing is finished.
Note
• If the appliqué piece is not securely
attached to the base fabric, the appliqué
piece may lift off the base fabric during
sewing, causing misalignment.
• If the appliqué piece cannot be attached to
the base fabric with craft glue, securely
baste it in place with basting stitches.
• If thin fabric is used for the appliqué piece,
reinforce and secure it in place with an iron-
on adhesive sheet. An iron can be used to
attach the appliqué piece to the appliqué
location.
• Do not remove the fabric from the
embroidery frame when attaching the
appliqué piece to the base fabric.
Memo
• Depending on the pattern that is selected,
(appliqué piece),
(appliqué position) and (appliqué)
for all three steps may not appear. If
(appliqué) appears as a color,
embroider using thread of that color.
EMBROIDERING AN PATTERN
Basic Embroidery
279
6
■ 4. Embroidering the Remainder of
the Pattern
a
Change the embroidery thread according to
the embroidery color order display, and
then finish embroidering the remainder of
the pattern.
Memo
• Since glue may become attached to the
presser foot, needle or needle plate, clean
off any glue off after finishing embroidering
the appliqué pattern.
• For best results, trim all excess threads
each time the thread color is changed.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
280
If the Bobbin Runs Out of Thread
When the bobbin begins to run out of thread
during embroidering, the machine will stop and
the message below will appear. Press and
follow the directions below to rethread the lower
threading. If very little sewing remains, you can
embroider 10 final stitches without rethreading the
machine by pressing . The machine will stop
after sewing the 10 stitches.
a
Press .
→ After the thread is automatically cut, the carriage
will move.
b
Unlock the frame-securing lever and
remove the embroidery frame.
* Be careful not to apply strong force to the fabric at
this time. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
frame.
c
Insert a wound bobbin into the machine.
(see page 59 for Setting the bobbin.)
d
Press .
→ The carriage will return to its original position.
e
Attach the embroidery frame.
f
To return to the spot in the pattern where
you stopped sewing, follow steps
c
through
i in the next section.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Note
• Be careful not to bump the embroidery unit carriage or the presser foot when removing or attaching
the embroidery frame. Otherwise, the pattern will not embroider correctly.
Note
• If “Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor” in the
General settings screen of the machine
setting mode is set to “OFF”, the message
shown above does not appear.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Basic Embroidery
281
6
If the Thread Breaks During
Sewing
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine.
b
If the upper thread is broken, redo the
upper threading. If the bobbin thread is
broken, press and follow the
directions in steps
a through e from the
previous section to reset the bobbin.
c
Press .
d
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot.
e
Press .
→ The camera view window appears.
f
Press , , , or to move the
needle back the correct number of stitches
before the spot where the thread broke.
* If you cannot move back to the spot where the
thread broke, press or
to select the color
and move to the beginning position of that color,
then use , , , or
to move ahead
to slightly before where the thread broke.
* Press to enlarge the image in the screen.
* Press to remove “ “ from the screen.
g
Press to close the camera view
window.
h
Press to return to the original screen.
i
Press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
sewing.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
282
Restarting from the Beginning
a
Press .
b
Press .
→ The embroidery frame moves, returning the needle
to the pattern’s beginning position.
c
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
lower the presser foot and start sewing.
Resuming Embroidery After
Turning Off the Power
The current color and stitch number are saved
when embroidery is stopped. The next time the
machine is turned on, you have the option to
continue or delete the pattern.
a Current stitch number when embroidery was
stopped
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Follow the instructions shown on the screen
and remove the embroidery frame.
→ The following message will appear.
Memo
• Even if the power goes out in the middle of
embroidery, the machine returns to the
point where embroidery was stopped when
the machine is turned on again.
Note
• Do not remove the embroidery unit or the
memory will no longer remember your
design.
a
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Basic Embroidery
283
6
c
Attach the embroidery frame and press
.
→ The previous embroidering screen displayed before
the machine was turned off appears.
d
Continue embroidering.
a Stitch number when embroidery is resumed
Memo
• If you want to start a new embroidery
pattern, press so the pattern
selection screen appears.
a
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
284
Chapter 7
Advanced Embroidery
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ............ 286
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Using a Single Color : Monochrome) .....................................286
Display the Fabric While Aligning the Embroidering Position
.....286
■ Specify Fabric Display from the Settings Screen..................... 288
■ Saving Scanned Image to USB Media ..................................... 288
■ Positioning the Pattern on Thick Fabric.................................. 289
Basting Embroidery .................................................................290
Creating an Appliqué Piece.....................................................291
■ Creating an Appliqué Piece .................................................... 291
■ Using a Frame Pattern for the Outline ...................................294
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY
PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS) ................... 296
Selecting a Pattern ..................................................................297
■ Checking the Combined Image............................................... 297
Outputting the Background Image and Positioning Image ......297
■ Using USB Media ................................................................... 298
■ Using a USB Cable ................................................................. 298
Printing the Background and Embroidery Position Sheet ........299
Sewing Embroidery Patterns ...................................................300
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS .............. 301
Adjusting Thread Tension........................................................301
■ Correct Thread Tension.......................................................... 301
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight ..................................................... 301
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose .................................................... 302
■ Adjusting Overall Upper Thread Tension ............................... 302
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case
(with No Color on the Screw) .................................................303
■ Correct Tension...................................................................... 303
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Loose ................................................... 303
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Tight .................................................... 303
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function (End Color Trim).....
304
Using the Thread Trimming Function (Jump Stitch Trim)........304
■ Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch Not to Trim ....................305
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed .............................................305
Changing the Thread Color Display ........................................305
Changing the Embroidery Frame Display ...............................306
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle .......................................307
Embroidering Linked Characters .............................................308
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION....................... 311
Embroidery Data Precautions .................................................311
■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used .......................... 311
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used...................... 311
■ Connecting Your Machine to the PC ...................................... 312
■
Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
.... 312
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data................................................ 312
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Machine’s Memory ...........313
■ If the Memory is Full .............................................................. 313
Saving Embroidery Patterns to USB Media..............................313
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the Computer..........................314
Retrieving Patterns from the Machine’s Memory ...................315
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS ............................. 317
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (1) .....................317
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué (2) .....................318
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns ...........................................319
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
....321
Connecting Three Patterns ..................................................... 321
Changing the Position of a Sticker.......................................... 327
CONNECTING ROTATED PATTERNS....................330
Connecting Patterns to be Joined Along an Edge.................... 332
■ Measuring the Distance That the Pattern Will Be Slid.............332
■ Trial Sewing ............................................................................333
RESUME FEATURE .................................................335
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
286
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Using a Single Color :
Monochrome)
A selected pattern can be stitched out in one color
instead of multicolor. The machine will continue
till the pattern is completed.
a
Press .
* Press the key again to return to the original setting.
→ The thread color displayed on the screen will be
grayed out.
Display the Fabric While
Aligning the Embroidering
Position
The fabric hooped in the embroidery frame can be
displayed on the LCD so that the embroidery position
can be easily aligned.
Example:
a
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame, and
then attach the frame to the embroidery
machine.
b
Select the pattern, and then press .
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Memo
• Even if uninterrupted embroidering has
been set, the automatic thread cutting
function and the thread trimming function
can be used (see page 304 and 304).
Note
• When embroidery frame (small: H 2 cm × W 6 cm (H
1 inch × W 2-1/2 inches)) is installed, the built-in
camera cannot be used to align the embroidering
position. Install medium embroidery frame or larger.
• For details on using thicker fabric such as quilting,
refer to “Positioning the Pattern on Thick Fabric”
(page 289).
Note
• When using light to medium weight fabrics, check
the settings screen to make sure “Fabric Thickness
Sensor” is set to “OFF”.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Advanced Embroidery
287
7
c
Press .
d
When the following message appears, press
.
→ The embroidery frame moves so the fabric can be
scanned.
e
When the fabric appears as a background for
the pattern, press to display the
editing window.
* The pattern can be moved to the desired position by
dragging on the screen using your finger, the touch
pen or connected mouse without displaying the
editing window. If you need some fine adjustment,
move the pattern from the editing window.
f
Press to display the pattern moving
window.
Memo
• If you do not wish the upper thread to be scanned
together with the fabric, scan the fabric without the
needle threaded with the upper thread.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
288
g
Use to align the pattern to the desired
embroidery position.
h
Press .
i
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
* See “Embroidering Patterns” on page 274.
→ When embroidery is finished, the fabric displayed in
the background disappears.
■ Specify Fabric Display from the
Settings Screen
Whether the fabric disappears or remains displayed
can be specified from the settings screen.
a Set to “ON” to leave the fabric displayed in the
background.
b When set to “OFF”, the background will disappear.
c Set to “Fine” to scan clearer than setting to “Standard”.
d Press to remove the background image
completely.
■ Saving Scanned Image to USB Media
a
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the machine.
a USB port
b USB media
Memo
• If necessary, press to display a preview in
order to check the pattern position.
Note
• The fabric background will remain if the embroidery
is not finished. In this case, erase the background
image from the settings screen.
b
a
c
d
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Advanced Embroidery
289
7
b
Press and select the USB port to save
image.
→ After the short melody, the image file will be saved
to the USB media.
c
Remove the USB media, and then check the
saved image using a computer.
→ The files for scanned images are saved with the
name “BG**.JPG” in a folder labeled “bPocket”.
* “**” in the name “BG**.JPG” will automatically be
replaced with a number between 00 and 99.
■ Positioning the Pattern on Thick
Fabric
When positioning the pattern on thick fabric such as
quilting, the fabric may not be detected correctly. In
order for the fabric to be correctly detected, its
thickness must first be measured.
a
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame, and
then attach the frame to the embroidery
machine.
b
Select the pattern, and then press .
c
Display page 9 of the Settings screen, and
then set “Fabric Thickness Sensor” to “ON”.
d
Press .
e
Press .
f
Affix the embroidery positioning sticker to the
fabric within the area indicated by the red
frame in the LCD, and then press .
g
When the following message appears, remove
the embroidery positioning sticker, and then
press .
→ The embroidery frame is moved, and the
embroidery positioning sticker affixed to the fabric is
detected.
h
Continue with step g on page 288 to align
the pattern with the desired embroidery
position.
Memo
• This feature is functional only when the fabric is
scanned. It will not affect embroidering if it is turned
on with normal embroidery.
CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to break.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
290
Basting Embroidery
Before embroidering, basting stitches can be sewn
along the outline of the pattern. This is useful for
embroidering fabric that cannot have stabilizer
material affixed with an iron or adhesive. By
stitching stabilizer material to the fabric, shrinkage
of the stitching or misaligned pattern can be
minimized.
a
Press .
b
Use and to specify the distance from
the pattern to the basting stitching.
c
Press to return to the previous
screen.
d
Press .
e
Press to select the basting setting.
→ Basting is added to the beginning of the sewing
order.
f
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
g
When embroidering is finished, remove the
basting stitching.
Note
• It is recommended to finish combining and
editing the pattern before selecting the
basting setting. If the pattern is edited after
selecting the basting setting, the basting
and pattern may become misaligned, and
the basting under the pattern may be
difficult to remove after embroidering is
complete.
Memo
• The higher the setting, the farther the
basting is from the pattern.
• The setting remains selected even if the
machine is turned off.
Note
• When is pressed, the pattern is moved
to the center. After selecting the basting
setting, move the pattern to the desired
position.
Memo
• To cancel the setting, press .
• If no pattern is selected, the key appears
gray and cannot be selected.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Advanced Embroidery
291
7
Creating an Appliqué Piece
Appliqué pieces can be created from the built-in
patterns and patterns on embroidery cards. This is
convenient for fabrics that cannot be embroidered
or when you wish to attach an appliqué to a
garment.
■ Creating an Appliqué Piece
The following pattern will be used to create an
appliqué piece.
a
Select the pattern, and edit it if necessary.
b
Press to display the settings screen.
c
Use and to specify the distance
between the pattern and the appliqué
outline.
d
Press .
e
Press .
Note
• Felt or denim fabrics are recommended to
make the appliqué piece. Depending on the
pattern and fabric used, lighter weight
fabrics may cause the stitching to appear
smaller.
• For best results, be sure to use stabilizer
material for embroidering.
• Select a frame that matches the pattern
size. Frame options are displayed on the
LCD screen.
• When making appliqué pieces, do not use
the border embroidery frame. Depending on
the pattern density and fabric used,
shrinkage of the stitching may occur.
Note
• Finish combining and editing the pattern
before selecting the appliqué setting. If the
pattern is edited after selecting the appliqué
setting, the appliqué stitching and pattern
may become misaligned.
• Since an outline is added, the pattern for an
appliqué piece (when the appliqué setting is
selected) will be larger than the original
pattern. First, adjust the size and position of
the pattern as shown below.
a Embroidering area
b Approx. 10 mm (3/8 inch)
c Pattern size
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
292
f
Press and then, press to
position the satin stitching around design.
→ The steps for creating the appliqué piece are added
to the sewing order.
g
Fuse or stick a piece of stabilizer to the
back of the felt or denim fabric to be used
as the appliqué piece.
Note
• When is pressed, the pattern is moved
to the center. After selecting the appliqué
setting, move the pattern to the desired
position.
Memo
• To cancel the setting, press .
• If no pattern is selected, the key appears
darkened and cannot be selected.
Memo
• Three steps are added to the sewing order:
appliqué cutting line, position of pattern
placement on the garment, and appliqué
stitching.
a Cutting line for appliqué
b Position of pattern placement on garment
c Appliqué stitching
Note
• An appliqué piece cannot be created if the
pattern is too large or too complicated or a
combined pattern is separated. Even if the
selected pattern fits within the embroidering
area, the entire appliqué pattern may
exceed the embroidering area when the
outline is added. If an error message
appears, select a different pattern or edit it.
Note
• For best results, be sure to use stabilizer
material for embroidering.
a
b
c
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Advanced Embroidery
293
7
h
Hoop the appliqué fabric in the embroidery
frame, attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then start embroidering.
i
After the pattern is embroidered, thread the
machine with the thread for the cutting
line, and then sew the cutting line
(APPLIQUE MATERIAL).
a Cutting line for appliqué
j
Remove the appliqué material from the
embroidery frame, and then carefully cut
along the stitching. After cutting, carefully
remove all of the cutting line thread.
k
Use two layers of adhesive water-soluble
stabilizer material with their sticky sides
together, and then hoop them in the
embroidery frame.
l
Thread the machine with the thread for the
outline from step
n, and then sew the
placement line for the appliqué position
(APPLIQUE POSITION).
a Pattern placement line
m
Lightly apply glue or spray adhesive, and
paste the appliqué piece so that it aligns
with the placement line.
Memo
• We recommend using thread for the cutting
line that is closest to the color of the fabric.
Note
• Depending on the pattern density and fabric
used, there may be shrinking of the pattern
or the appliqué may be misaligned with the
placement line. We recommend cutting
slightly outside of the cutting line.
• When using patterns that are vertically and
horizontally symmetrical, use a chalk pencil
to indicate the pattern orientation before
cutting it out.
• Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline
you just sewed. Do not cut inside the
cutting line, otherwise the appliqué fabric
will not be caught by the appliqué stitch.
Note
• If water-soluble stabilizer is used, it is not
necessary to remove the stabilizer material
after sewing the appliqué outline. To reduce
shrinkage of the pattern, we recommend
using water-soluble stabilizer.
• Put together two layers of water-soluble
stabilizer, otherwise the stabilizer material
may tear during embroidering.
Note
• Before pasting the appliqué piece down,
make sure the appliqué piece is positioned
correctly within the placement line.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
294
n
With the machine threaded using the thread
for the outline from step
l, sew the outline
(APPLIQUE).
a Outline of appliqué piece
o
After embroidering is finished, remove the
stabilizer material from the embroidery
frame.
p
Use scissors to cut the excess water-soluble
stabilizer from outside the appliqué outline.
q
Soak the appliqué piece in water to dissolve
the water-soluble stabilizer.
r
Dry the appliqué piece, and then iron it if
necessary.
■ Using a Frame Pattern for the
Outline
Using a frame pattern, the desired shape can be
added as the outline of the appliqué. To select the
desired frame, see “Selecting Frame Patterns” on
page 219.
a
Perform the operations described in steps
a through d of “Creating an Appliqué
Piece” on page 291.
b
Select the desired frame shape and pattern,
and add it to the appliqué pattern.
Memo
• The outline is sewn using satin stitching.
• Some glue may get onto the presser foot,
needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish
embroidering the appliqué pattern, and then
clean off the glue.
Note
• Do not apply a strong force when ironing,
otherwise the stitching may be damaged.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
Advanced Embroidery
295
7
c
Press to edit the frame pattern to
fit the size of the appliqué pattern.
d
Press and then press .
e
Press , and then press to
select the appliqué piece setting.
f
Press .
g
Use to select the frame pattern, and
then press and .
→ The frame pattern is deleted.
h
Press .
i
Continue with step g of “Creating an
Appliqué Piece” on page 291 to complete
the appliqué piece.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
296
Completed embroidery patterns combined with printed designs are built into this machine.
Beautiful three-dimensional embroidered designs can be created by ironing a background onto fabric or
printing it onto printable fabric, then sewing complementary embroidery on top of the background.
Using iron-on paper
Using printable fabric
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY
PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
Step1
Select a pattern to be combined with the background image.
→ See “Selecting a Pattern” on page 297.
Step2
Output from the machine the background image and the positioning image.
→ See “Outputting the Background Image and Positioning Image” on page 297.
Step3
When using iron-on paper
With a printer, print the background onto iron-on paper, and print the embroidery position sheet on plain paper. Then, iron
the background image onto fabric.
When using printable fabric
With a printer, print the background onto printable fabric, and print the embroidery position sheet on plain paper.
→ See “Printing the Background and Embroidery Position Sheet” on page 299.
Step4
Hoop in the embroidery frame the fabric with the background image ironed on or printed, check the embroidering
position, and then start embroidering.
→ See “Sewing Embroidery Patterns” on page 300.
Note
• Print the background and embroidery position sheet in their original dimensions. If an image is printed
in a different size, the sizes of the embroidery pattern and background may not match. In addition, the
built-in camera cannot detect the embroidery position mark. Make sure that the print settings are
correctly specified.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
Advanced Embroidery
297
7
Selecting a Pattern
Patterns combining embroidery and printed
designs appears with and .
a
Select a pattern combining embroidery and
printed designs.
→ Only the embroidery pattern (not the background
image of the selected embroidery pattern) is
displayed.
■ Checking the Combined Image
Press .
→ An image of the pattern combined with the
background appears.
* To return to the image of only the embroidery
design, press .
Outputting the Background
Image and Positioning Image
Use USB media or the computer to output the
following three images from the machine.
* File name may differ depending on the PDF file
selected.
• [xxx]r.pdf (Example: E_1r.pdf)
An image flipped on a vertical axis (for an iron-
on transfer)
• [xxx]n.pdf (Example: E_1n.pdf)
An image that is not flipped (for printing on
printable fabric)
• [xxx]p.pdf (Example: E_1p.pdf)
An image that is not flipped, but has positioning
marks attached (for positioning)
Memo
• Refer to the Quick Reference Guide for the
detail of patterns which enable this function.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
298
■ Using USB Media
a
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine.
b
Select the pattern, and then press .
→ The select USB output screen appears.
c
Press to select the USB port where
the USB media is inserted.
→ Two files of the background image only and one file
for aligning embroidery into position are copied
(PDF format) onto the USB media.
d
Remove the USB media where the image
data is saved from the machine, and then
copy the image data from the USB media to
the computer.
■ Using a USB Cable
a
Plug the USB cable connectors into the
corresponding USB ports on the computer
and on the machine.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon appears in “Computer
(My Computer)” on the computer.
b
Select the pattern, and then press .
→ The select USB output screen appears.
Note
• Print the background and embroidery
position sheet in their original dimensions. If
an image is printed in a different size, the
sizes of the embroidery pattern and
background may not match. In addition, the
built-in camera cannot detect the
embroidery position mark. Make sure that
the print settings are correctly specified.
• When printing the PDF file of the image with
positioning marks, specify the highest
image quality possible for full-color printing.
In addition, use matte printing paper. Due to
poor printing conditions, the machine’s
built-in camera may not be able to correctly
detect the positioning marks. (For details on
printing, refer to the operating instructions
for your printer.)
Memo
• Do not remove the USB media from the
machine until data output is finished.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
Advanced Embroidery
299
7
c
Press .
→ Two files of the background image and one file for
aligning embroidery into position are copied (PDF
format) into “Removable Disk” under “Computer
(My Computer)”.
d
Copy the image data saved in “Removable
Disk” into a different file before closing.
Printing the Background and
Embroidery Position Sheet
Print the PDF files of the background and
embroidery position sheet. The background file
that is printed differs depending on whether iron-
on paper or printable fabric is used.
To view the PDF file, Adobe
®
Reader
®
is needed. If
it is not installed on your computer, you can
download it from the Adobe Systems website:
http://www.adobe.com/
a
Open the PDF file to be printed, click
“File”-“Print”, and then set “Page Scaling”
to “None (100%)”.
b
Print the background image.
* When printing onto iron-on paper, print the file
named E_1r.pdf (an image flipped on a vertical axis).
When printing onto printable fabric, print the file
named E_1n.pdf (an image that is not flipped).
a Background image
c
Print the embroidery position sheet (file
named E_1p.pdf) onto plain paper.
a Embroidery position sheet
d
If an iron-on transfer sheet is used, transfer
the image onto fabric.
Memo
• Do not disconnect the USB cable from the
machine until data output is finished.
Note
• Print the background and embroidery
position sheet in their original dimensions. If
an image is printed in a different size, the
sizes of the embroidery pattern and
background may not match. In addition, the
built-in camera cannot detect the
embroidery position mark. Make sure that
the print settings are correctly specified.
Note
• Before printing onto iron-on paper or
printable fabric, we recommend performing
a test print to check the print settings.
• For details on printing on iron-on transfer
sheets or printable fabric, refer to the
instructions for the iron-on transfer sheets
and printable fabric.
• Some printers will automatically print an
image flipped if an iron-on transfer sheet is
selected as the paper. For details, refer to
the instructions for the printer being used.
Note
• When printing the PDF file for the
embroidery position sheet, specify the
highest image quality possible for full-color
printing. In addition, we recommend
printing on matte paper. If this is not done,
the built-in camera may not be able to
correctly detect the embroidery positioning
mark.
Memo
• For details on transferring from iron-on
transfer sheets, refer to the instructions for
the iron-on transfer sheets.
• If necessary, cut the iron-on transfer sheet
to the size of the pattern before transferring
the image.
PRINT AND STITCH (COMBINING EMBROIDERY PATTERNS AND PRINTED DESIGNS)
300
Sewing Embroidery Patterns
a
Hoop in the embroidery frame the fabric
with the background image ironed on.
b
Cut the paper printed with the center
positioning image so it can easily be
positioned aligned with the background
image on the fabric.
* Lines or color changes in the image can help you
find the correct alignment position.
c
Place the paper printed with the positioning
image on top of the fabric so that the
pattern is aligned, and then affix the paper
to the fabric with cellophane tape to
prevent the paper from moving.
a Cellophane tape
d
After checking that a pattern is selected,
press .
→ The embroidering screen appears.
e
Align the embroidering position according
to steps
b through m of “Aligning the
Embroidering Position Using the Built-In
Camera” on page 264.
f
Remove the positioning sheet and press the
“Start/Stop” button to begin embroidering.
Note
• Before embroidering, check that the
embroidery position sheet is perfectly
aligned with the background.
CAUTION
• Before pressing the “Start/Stop” button to
begin embroidering, remove the positioning
sheet taped to the fabric in step
c.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Advanced Embroidery
301
7
Adjusting Thread Tension
When embroidering, the thread tension should be
set so that the upper thread can slightly be seen on
the wrong side of the fabric.
■ Correct Thread Tension
The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the
fabric. If the thread tension is not set correctly, the
pattern will not finish well. The fabric may pucker or
the thread may break.
a Right side
b Wrong side
Follow the operations described below to adjust
thread tension according to the situation.
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting
in the bobbin thread being visible from the right side
of the fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
a
Press .
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Note
• If the thread tension setting is made
extremely weak, the machine may stop
during sewing. This is not the sign of a
malfunction. Increase the thread tension
slightly, and begin sewing again.
Memo
• If you turn the main power to OFF or select
a different pattern, the thread tension will
reset to the automatic setting.
• When you retrieve a saved pattern, the
thread tension setting will be the same as
when the pattern was saved.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may be too
tight. In this case, refer to “Setting the
Bobbin” (page 59) and rethread the bobbin
thread.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
302
b
Press to weaken the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will
decrease.)
c
Press .
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
The tension of the upper thread is too loose,
resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread locks,
or loops appearing on the right side of the fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
a
Press .
b
Press to tighten the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will increase.)
c
Press .
■ Adjusting Overall Upper Thread
Tension
When embroidering, if the overall tension of the
upper thread is too tight or too loose, adjust it from
the setting screen.
a
Press and .
b
In the “Embroidery Tension”, use to
adjust the upper thread tension.
* Press to tighten the upper thread tension.
* Press to loosen the upper thread tension.
c
Press .
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly
threaded, the upper thread may be too
loose. In this case, refer to “Upper
Threading” (page 62) and rethread the
upper thread.
Note
• With “Embroidery Tension” on page 6/8 of
the setting screen, the tension of the upper
thread can be adjusted for embroidering.
The selected setting will be applied to all
patterns.
When embroidering, if the overall tension of
the upper thread is too tight or too loose,
adjust it from the setting screen. Press
to tighten the upper thread tension and
press to loosen the upper tension. If an
individual embroidery pattern needs
additional fine tuning, refer to “Adjusting
Thread Tension” on page 301.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Advanced Embroidery
303
7
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin
Case (with No Color on the
Screw)
When using the embroidery bobbin thread
provided, please be sure to choose the green
marked bobbin case when performing utility stitch
sewing and embroidery functions. When in the
embroidery function mode, the alternate bobbin
case (with no color on the screw) should be
selected when substitute embroidery bobbin
threads (other than what is accompanied with your
machine) are being used. The alternate bobbin
case (with no color on the screw) can be easily
adjusted when bobbin tension changes are
required to accommodate different bobbin
threads. See “Sewing Attractive Finishes” on page
175.
To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery
function, using the alternate bobbin case (with no
color on the screw), turn the slotted screw (-) with
a (small) screwdriver.
a Do not turn a phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a screwdriver (small).
■ Correct Tension
Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of
fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Loose
Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of
fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-) clockwise,
being careful not to over-tighten the screw,
approximately 30-45 degrees to increase bobbin
tension.
■ Bobbin Thread is Too Tight
Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to be
lifting/looping and bobbin thread is not seen on the
wrong side of fabric.
a Right side
b Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-)
counterclockwise, being careful not to over-loosen
the screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to decrease
bobbin tension.
CAUTION
• When adjusting the alternate bobbin case, be
sure to remove the bobbin from the alternate
bobbin case.
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the alternate bobbin case as this may
result in damage to the bobbin case, rendering
it unusable.
• If the slotted screw (-) is difficult to turn, do
not use force. Turning the screw too much or
providing force in either (rotational) direction
may cause damage to the bobbin case. Should
damage occur, the bobbin case may not
maintain proper tension.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
304
Using the Automatic Thread
Cutting Function (End Color
Trim)
The automatic thread cutting function will
cut the thread at the end of sewing each color.
This function is initially turned on. To turn this
function off, press key and then . This
function can be turned on or off during
embroidering.
* This setting returns to its default
when the machine is turned off.
a
Press .
b
Press to turn off the automatic
thread cutting function.
→ The key will display as .
* When one color thread is sewn, the machine will
stop without cutting the thread.
Using the Thread Trimming
Function (Jump Stitch Trim)
The thread trimming function will
automatically trim any excess thread jumps within
the color. This function is initially turned on. To
turn this function off, press key and then
. This function can be turned on or off
during embroidering.
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
a Jump stitch
a
Press .
Note
• When this function is turned on, use the
included ball point needle 75/11 for
embroidering patterns with short jump
stitches such as alphabet characters. Using
other needles may cause the thread to
break.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Advanced Embroidery
305
7
b
Press to turn off the thread
trimming function.
→ The key will display as .
* The machine will not trim the thread before moving
to the next stitching.
■ Selecting the Length of Jump Stitch
Not to Trim
When the thread trimming function is
turned on, you can select the length of the jump
stitch not to trim the thread. This function can be
turned on or off during embroidering.
Select a setting from 5 mm to 50 mm in 5 mm
increments.
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
Press or to select the length of jump stitch.
For example: Press to select 25 mm (1 inch)
and the machine will not trim a jump stitch of 25
mm or less before moving to the next stitching.
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed
a
Press and .
b
In the “Max Embroidery Speed”, use
to change the maximum embroidery speed.
* You can choose from 8 different speed levels.
c
Press .
Changing the Thread Color
Display
You can display the name of the thread colors or
embroidery thread number.
a
Press and then, press .
Note
• If design has many trims it is recommended
to select a higher jump stitch trim setting in
order to reduce the amount of excess tails
on backside of fabric.
• The higher number of the jump stitch length
selected, the fewer number of times the
machine will trim. In this case, more jump
stitches remain on the surface of the fabric.
Memo
• SPM is the number of stitches sewn in one
minute.
• Decrease the embroidery speed when
embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy
fabrics.
• The embroidery speed can be changed
while embroidery is being sewn.
• The setting specified before the main power
is set to OFF remains selected the next time
that the machine is turned on.
• Decrease the embroidery speed to 600 spm
when using a speciality thread like a
metallic thread.
Memo
• Colors on the screen may vary slightly from
actual spool colors.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
306
b
In the “Thread Color Display”, use
to display the name of the thread colors or
the embroidery thread number.
c
When the thread number is
displayed, use to select from six
embroidery thread brands pictured below.
* Depending on the country or area, cotton-like
polyester thread is sold.
d
Press .
Changing the Embroidery Frame
Display
a
Press and .
b
In the “Embroidery Frame Display”, use
to change the embroidery frame display
mode.
* There are 23 choices.
Embroidery: Polyester thread
Country: Cotton thread*
Madeira Poly: Polyester thread
Madeira Rayon
Sulky
Robison-Anton: Polyester
thread
#123
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Advanced Embroidery
307
7
* For the optional embroidery frame.
a Super large frame embroidering area
36 cm × 24 cm (14 inches × 9-1/2 inches)
b Center mark
c Extra large frame embroidering area 30 cm × 20
cm (12 inches × 8 inches)
d Quilt frame embroidering area 20 cm × 20 cm (8
inches × 8 inches)
e Extra large frame embroidering area 26 cm × 16
cm (10 inches × 6 inches)
f Embroidery area for optional large embroidery
frame
18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5 inches)
g Embroidering area for optional border embroidery
frame
18 cm × 10 cm (7 inches × 4 inches)
h Embroidering area for optional medium frame
15 cm × 15 cm (6 inches × 6 inches)
i Medium frame embroidering area
10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches)
j Small frame embroidering area
2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)
k Grid lines 10 mm (3/8 inch), 25 mm (1 inch)
l Cross lines
c
Press .
Aligning the Pattern and the
Needle
Example: Aligning the lower left side of a
pattern and the needle
a
Mark the embroidery start position on the
fabric, as shown.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
308
b
Press .
c
Press .
a This key is used for aligning linked characters (see
page 308).
b Start position
→ The needle position moves to the bottom left corner
of the pattern (the embroidery frame moves so that
the needle is positioned correctly).
d
Press and then, press .
e
Use to align the needle and the
mark on the fabric, and begin embroidering
the pattern.
Embroidering Linked Characters
Follow the procedure described below to
embroider linked characters in a single row when
the entire pattern extends beyond the embroidery
frame.
Example: Linking “FG” to the characters
“ABCDE”
a
Select the character patterns for “ABCDE”.
a
b
Memo
• You can use camera positioning function.
For details, see “Aligning the Embroidering
Position Using the Built-In Camera” on
page 264.
Note
• For details on selecting character patterns,
refer to “Selecting Alphabet Character
Patterns” on page 217.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
Advanced Embroidery
309
7
b
Press .
c
Press .
→ The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
d
Press .
e
Press .
f
Press to turn off the thread cutting
function and then press .
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button.
Note
• To cancel the starting point setting and
return the starting point to the center of the
pattern, press .
• Use to select a different starting
point for embroidering.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
310
h
After the characters are embroidered, cut
the threads to a generous length, remove
the embroidery frame, and then attach the
embroidery frame again so that the
remaining characters (“FG”) can be
embroidered.
a End of the embroidering
i
As in step a, select the character patterns
for “FG”.
j
Press .
k
Press .
→ The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
l
Press .
m
Use to align the needle with the end
of embroidering for the previous pattern.
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering the remaining character
patterns.
Memo
• You can use camera positioning function.
For details, see “Aligning the Embroidering
Position Using the Built-In Camera” on
page 264.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Advanced Embroidery
311
7
Embroidery Data Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using embroidery data other than that created and saved in this
machine.
■ Types of Embroidery Data that can be Used
• Only .pes,.pha,.phb,.phc, and .dst embroidery data files can be used with this machine. Using data other
than that saved using our data design systems or sewing machines may cause the embroidery machine to
malfunction.
■ Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that meets the following specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only.
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of USB media with the optional Brother USB Memory Card Reader/USB
card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
•Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
• xD-Picture Card
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
CAUTION
• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break when
sewing with a stitch density that is too fine or when sewing three or more overlapping stitches. In that
case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.
Note
• The processing speed may vary by port selection and quantity of data stored.
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.
• The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB devices/media, and it will take about 5 to 6
seconds to recognize the devices/media. (Time will differ depending on the USB device/media).
Memo
• To create file folders, use a computer.
• Letters and numerals can be used in the file names. In addition, if the file name contains no more than
eight characters, the entire file name will appear on the screen.
If the file name is more than eight characters long, only the first six characters followed by “~” and a
number appear as the file name.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
312
■ Connecting Your Machine to the PC
• Compatible models:
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8
■ Precautions on Using the Computer to Create and Save Data
• If the name of the embroidery data file/folder cannot be identified, for example, because the name contains
special characters, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the file/folder. We
recommend using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9,”-”, and
“_”.
• If embroidery data larger than 360 mm (H) × 240 mm (W) (approx.14 inches (H) × 9-1/2 inches (W)) is
selected, a message is shown asking if you wish to rotate the pattern 90 degrees.
Even after being rotated 90 degrees, embroidery data larger than 360 mm (H) × 240 mm (W) (approx.
14 inches (H) × 9-1/2 inches (W)) cannot be used. (All designs must be within the 360 mm (H) × 240 mm (W)
(approx. 14 inches (H) × 9-1/2 inches (W)) design field size.)
• .pes files saved with the number of stitches or the number of colors exceeding the specified limits cannot be
displayed. The combined design can not exceed a maximum number of 600,000 stitches or a maximum
number of 127 color changes (Above numbers are approximate, depending on the overall size of the design).
Use one of our design software programs to edit the embroidery pattern so that it meets these specifications.
• Embroidery data stored in a folder created in USB media can be retrieved.
• Do not create folders in “Removable Disk” on a computer. If embroidery data is stored in a folder in
“Removable Disk”, that embroidery data cannot be retrieved by the machine.
• Even if the embroidery unit is not attached, the machine will recognize embroidery data.
■ Tajima (.dst) Embroidery Data
• .dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by file name (the actual image cannot be displayed). Only the
first eight characters of the file name can be displayed.
• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default
thread color sequence. Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Advanced Embroidery
313
7
Saving Embroidery Patterns in
the Machine’s Memory
You can save embroidery patterns that you have
customized and will use often; for example, your
name, patterns that have been rotated or had the
size changed, patterns that have had the sewing
position changed, etc. A total of about 2 MB of
patterns can be saved in the machine's memory.
a
Press when the pattern you want to
save is in the embroidering screen.
b
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the
pattern is saved, the display returns to the original
screen automatically.
■ If the Memory is Full
If the screen below displays, either the maximum
number of patterns have been saved or the pattern
you want to save takes a lot of memory, and the
machine cannot save it. Press and delete a
previously saved pattern, then you can save the
current pattern. Refer to “Retrieving Patterns from
the Machine’s Memory” on page 315.
Saving Embroidery Patterns to
USB Media
When sending embroidery patterns from the
machine to USB media, plug the USB media into
the machine’s USB port.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will
lose the pattern you are saving.
Memo
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern to
the machine’s memory.
• See page 315 for information on retrieving a
saved pattern.
Memo
• USB media is commercially available, but
some USB media may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for
more details.
• Depending on the type of USB media being
used, either directly plug the USB device
into the machine’s USB port or plug the
USB media Reader/Writer into the
machine’s USB port.
• The USB media can be inserted or removed
at any time.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
314
a
Press when the pattern you want to
save is in the embroidering screen.
b
Insert the USB media into the USB port on
the machine.
a USB port
b USB media
c
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
→ The “Saving…” screen is displayed. When the
pattern is saved, the display returns to the original
screen automatically.
Saving Embroidery Patterns in the
Computer
Using the included USB cable, the machine can
be connected to your computer, and the
embroidery patterns can be temporarily retrieved
from and saved in the “Removable Disk” folder in
your computer. A total of about 3 MB of
embroidery patterns can be saved in the
“Removable Disk”, but the saved embroidery
patterns are deleted when the machine is turned
OFF.
For Computers and Operating Systems, see
“Connecting Your Machine to the PC” on
page 312.
a
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
b
Turn on your computer and select
“Computer (My Computer)”.
* The USB cable can be plugged into the USB ports
on the computer and embroidery machine whether
or not they are turned on.
a USB port for computer
b USB cable connector
→ The “Removable Disk” icon will appear in
“Computer (My Computer)” on the computer.
Note
• Do not insert anything other than USB
media into the USB media port. Otherwise,
the USB media drive may be damaged.
Note
• Do not insert or remove USB media while
“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will
lose some or all of the pattern you are
saving.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving…” screen is displayed. You will
lose the pattern you are saving.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Advanced Embroidery
315
7
c
Press when the pattern you want to
save is in the embroidering screen.
d
Press .
* Press to return to the original screen
without saving.
→ The pattern will be temporarily saved to
“Removable Disk” under “Computer (My
Computer)”.
e
Select the pattern’s .phc file in “Removable
Disk” and copy the file to the computer.
Retrieving Patterns from the
Machine’s Memory
a
Press .
→ The machine displays the patterns currently in the
memory.
Note
• The connectors on the USB cable can only
be inserted into a port in one direction. If it
is difficult to insert the connector, do not
insert it with force. Check the orientation of
the connector.
• For details on the position of the USB port
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the
instruction manual for the corresponding
equipment.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
316
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.
c
Press .
* Press to delete the embroidery pattern.
→ The embroidering screen is displayed.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Advanced Embroidery
317
7
Using a Frame Pattern to Make
an Appliqué (1)
You can use framed patterns of the same size and
shape to create an appliqué. Embroider one
pattern with a straight stitch and one pattern with a
satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern.
Embroider the pattern onto the appliqué
material, then cut neatly around the outside
of the shape.
b
Embroider the same pattern from step a
onto the base fabric.
c
Apply a thin layer of fabric glue or a
temporary spray adhesive to the rear of the
appliqué created in step
a. Attach the
appliqué to the base fabric matching the
shapes.
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué. Embroider over
the appliqué and base fabric from step
c to
create the appliqué.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Note
• If you change the size or position of the
patterns when selecting them, make a note
of the size and location.
a Appliqué material
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
318
Using a Frame Pattern to Make
an Appliqué (2)
This is a second method to make appliqué using
embroidery patterns. You do not have to change
the fabric in the embroidery frame using this
method. Embroider one pattern with a straight
stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and
embroider the pattern onto the base fabric.
b
Place the appliqué fabric over the pattern
embroidered in step
a.
* Be sure that the appliqué fabric completely covers
the seam.
c
Embroider the same pattern on the appliqué
fabric.
d
Remove the embroidery frame from the
embroidery unit, and cut around the
outside of the stitches.
e
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the
same shape as the appliqué.
Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the
embroidery frame to cut it. Also, do not pull
strongly on the fabric. Otherwise, the fabric
may loosen in the frame.
Note
• Do not change the size or position of the
pattern.
• If you change the size or position of the
patterns when selecting them, make a note
of the size and location.
a Appliqué material
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Advanced Embroidery
319
7
f
Reattach the embroidery frame to the
embroidery unit, and embroider the satin
stitch pattern to create an appliqué.
Sewing Split Embroidery Patterns
Split embroidery patterns created with PE-DESIGN
Ver.7 or later can be sewn. With split embroidery
patterns, embroidery designs larger than the
embroidery hoop are divided into multiple
sections, which combine to create a single pattern
after each section is sewn.
For details on creating split embroidery patterns
and for more detailed sewing instructions, refer to
the operation manual included with PE-DESIGN
Ver.7 or later.
The following procedure describes how to read
the split embroidery pattern shown below from
USB media and embroider it.
a
Connect to the machine the media
containing the created split embroidery
pattern, and then select the split
embroidery pattern to be embroidered.
* For details on recalling patterns, refer to “Selecting
Patterns from Embroidery Cards” on page 219,
“Recalling from USB Media” on page 221, or
“Recalling from the Computer” on page 222.
→ A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
b
Select section to be embroidered.
* Select the sections in alphabetical order.
* A maximum of 12 sections can be displayed in one
page. If there are 13 or more sections in the pattern,
press or to display the previous or next
page.
g5901.e ps
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
320
c
Press .
d
If necessary, press and edit the
pattern. Press to display the
embroidery screen.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to embroider
the pattern section.
f
When embroidering is finished, the
following screen appears. Press .
→ A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
g
Repeat steps b through f to embroider
the remaining sections of the pattern.
Memo
• The pattern can be rotated 90° to either the
left or right when is pressed.
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
Advanced Embroidery
321
7
Instead of using thread marks, the camera can be used to connect patterns in the Embroidery Edit screen.
An area of 33 cm × 21 cm (12-1/2 inches × 8 inches) can be embroidered when the camera is used to
connect patterns. Select the appropriate frame depending on the size of the embroidery. We recommend
using the super large embroidery frame (36 cm × 24 cm (14 inches × 9-1/2 inches)) when using the
camera to connect patterns. The small embroidery frame (2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)) cannot be
used with the camera function.
Connecting Three Patterns
Example:
a Pattern A
b Pattern B
c Pattern C
a
Select the first pattern A, and then press
.
b
Thread the machine with the upper thread
and the bobbin thread.
c
Hoop fabric in the 18 cm × 13 cm (7-1/8
inches × 5-1/8 inches) embroidery frame,
and then attach the frame to the
embroidery machine.
d
Press to display the embroidering
screen.
e
Press .
f
Press .
→ appears at the top left side of the screen, and
then changes to .
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
Note
• Split (Large-size) embroidery patterns
cannot be used with this function.
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
322
g
Lower the presser foot, and then embroider
the first pattern.
h
After embroidering of the first pattern is
finished, the following message appears.
Press .
i
When the following message appears, press
.
j
Select the second pattern B, and then press
.
k
Press , and then select how the
patterns will be connected.
→ The pattern connection setting screen appears.
Memo
• can be pressed while embroidering.
• A pattern cannot be saved in the machine’s
memory while patterns are being
connected.
Memo
• You can edit the second pattern in this
screen.
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
Advanced Embroidery
323
7
l
Select the position of the second pattern by
pressing on the screen. Press after
specifying the position.
* You can adjust the position of the second pattern
using the keys described below.
a Connecting point
b First pattern A
c Second pattern B
d Press to move the second pattern.
→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move
after pressing .
m
Prepare two embroidery positioning
stickers. Follow the on-screen instructions
to affix the two stickers to the fabric so that
the positioning marks can be detected by
the camera.
Press to rotate the second pattern in a clockwise
arc referring the first pattern as a center.
Press to rotate the second pattern in a
counterclockwise arc referring the first pattern as a
center.
Rotate the second pattern 90 degrees in a
clockwise arc.
a
b
c
d
Note
• The second pattern will be automatically
connected to the first pattern without
adjustment. Change the position of the
second pattern manually using .
• The position of the second pattern can be
moved using your finger or the included
touch pen.
• Use , or if you want to align the
pattern to the corner of the center of the
first pattern, when changing the pattern’s
connecting position.
Note
• Use the positioning stickers included with
this product or purchase replacement
stickers (SAEPS2, EPS2: XF0763-001) from
your authorized Brother dealer. If any other
sticker is used, the camera may not
recognize it.
• The 182 mm × 257 mm (7 inches × 10
inches) embroidery positioning sticker sheet
with strong adhesive is most appropriate for
connecting patterns (SAEPS2, EPS2:
XF0763-001). If any other positioning sticker
is used, it may peel off. If the sticker peels
off, the patterns cannot be connected.
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
324
n
Affix the first embroidery positioning
sticker onto the fabric within the red lines
that now appear on the screen of the
machine by using both hands to press down
on each corner of the sticker. Affix the
sticker with the large circle to the top as
shown on machine. Then, press .
→ The camera detects the first positioning sticker.
o
Use both hands to affix the second
embroidery positioning mark within the red
lines that now appear on the screen of the
machine by pressing down on each corner
of the positioning mark onto the material
and then touch .
→ The camera detects the second positioning sticker.
p
After the two positioning stickers have been
detected, the following message appears.
a Embroidering area
Note
• Use new positioning stickers. If a sticker is
reused, it may easily peel off. If the sticker
peels off during this procedure, the patterns
cannot be connected.
• Use your fingers to apply pressure to the
corners of the positioning sticker to firmly
affix it to the fabric. If the sticker is not firmly
attached, the camera may incorrectly detect
the sticker.
• If any of the following messages appear,
reattach the positioning sticker in the
correct position. Make sure that the sticker
is affixed with the large circle at the top.
a
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
Advanced Embroidery
325
7
While making sure that the two positioning
stickers do not peel off, remove the
embroidery frame from the machine, and
then rehoop the fabric. Be sure to hoop the
fabric so the next pattern and both the
positioning stickers are within the
embroidery sewing area. Reattach the
frame and press .
a Pattern to be embroidered next
b Centers of large circles for stickers
c Embroidery sheet
→ The camera detects the two positioning stickers.
Note
• The positioning markers are shown with a
tilted appearance to make sure that as long
as the markers were placed with the red
outlined square, they will be read properly
and correct connection can be assured.
Note
• If either of the following messages appear,
rehoop the fabric so that the next pattern
and both the positioning stickers are within
the embroidery sewing area as indicated in
the screen.
Press to detect the positioning
stickers.
• If the machine detects that the next pattern
and the centers of the large circles of the
two positioning stickers do not fit within the
embroidering area, the operation will be
paused. Follow the on-screen instructions
to reposition the positioning stickers. Refer
to “Changing the Position of a Sticker” on
page 327 to reposition the stickers.
• If the sticker peels off during this procedure,
the patterns cannot be connected. If this
occurs, restart the procedure from the
beginning.
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
326
q
After the positioning stickers have been
detected, press , and then remove the
stickers.
r
Lower the presser foot, and then embroider
the second pattern.
→ When embroidering is finished, the following
message appears.
To connect a third pattern, press .
s
When the following message appears, press
.
t
Select the third pattern C, and press .
u
Press , and then select how the
patterns will be connected.
→ The pattern connection setting screen appears.
v
Specify the position of the third pattern
referring to the screen display.
In this example, press 2 times and then, press
. Press after specifying the position.
a Connecting point
b Second pattern B
c Third pattern C
Memo
• You can edit the third pattern in this screen.
a
b
c
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
Advanced Embroidery
327
7
→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move
after pressing .
w
Lower the presser foot, and then embroider
the third pattern.
→ When embroidering is finished, the following
message appears. When finished connecting
patterns, press .
→ After embroidering is finished, is no longer
located at the top left of LCD screen.
The three patterns have been connected.
Changing the Position of a Sticker
If the selected pattern or positioning stickers for
connecting the next pattern do not easily fit in the
embroidering area, follow the on-screen instructions
that appear after step
o on page 324 in order to move
the positioning stickers.
For an example, the on-screen instruction appears
when you use the embroidery frame with a size of 10
cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches) to connect patterns as
shown below.
a Pattern A
b Pattern B
a
Refer to steps a through o of
“Connecting Three Patterns” using the
embroidery frame with a size of 10 cm × 10
cm (4 inches × 4 inches) to embroider the
first pattern and to connect the second
pattern.
Note
• When referring to steps a through o,
make sure you change the reference edge
and reference point to reflect this exercise.
a Reference point
b Reference edge
b
a
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
328
b
Following message appears in step p if the
next pattern or affixed positioning stickers
are close to being out of the embroidering
area. Follow the instructions and then press
.
a Embroidering area
a Pattern to be embroidered next
b Embroidery sheet
c
After the sticker position is detected, press
, and then remove the stickers.
d
Affix the two positioning stickers again
according to the on-screen instructions so
that the next pattern or positioning marks
can fit in the embroidery area.
→ Press so that the camera detects the first
positioning sticker.
a
Note
• If the following message appears, rehoop
the fabric as indicated in the screen, and
then press .
USING THE CAMERA TO CONNECT PATTERNS
Advanced Embroidery
329
7
e
Affix the second sticker and then press
.
→ The camera detects the second positioning sticker.
f
After the two positioning stickers have been
detected, the following message appears.
While making sure that the positioning
stickers do not peel off, rehoop the fabric
according to the example displayed on the
on-screen instruction.
a Embroidering area
a Pattern to be embroidered next
b Embroidery sheet
g
Continue the operation from step q on
page 326 after pressing .
Note
• The positioning markers are shown with a
tilted appearance to make sure that as long
as the markers were placed with the red
outlined square, they will be read properly
and correct connection can be assured.
a
CONNECTING ROTATED PATTERNS
330
Greater design variations can be created by
rotating patterns. The following procedure
describes how to connect patterns that are rotated.
A: First pattern
B: Second pattern
a
Select the pattern, and then press .
→ The pattern editing screen appears.
b
Press and then, press in the
pattern editing screen.
c
Rotate the pattern, and then press .
CONNECTING ROTATED PATTERNS
CONNECTING ROTATED PATTERNS
Advanced Embroidery
331
7
d
Press to display the sewing screen.
e
Press and then, press .
f
Refer to steps g through i of
“Connecting Three Patterns” to embroider
the first pattern.
g
Select the next pattern, and then press
.
h
Press and then, press in the
pattern editing screen.
i
Rotate the pattern to the same angle as the
first pattern, and then press .
j
Press .
k
The pattern position does not need to be
specified for this example. Press .
a Connecting point
→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move
after pressing .
Note
• Be sure to rotate the pattern from the
pattern editing screen. The reference edge
and reference point are specified along the
smallest rectangle (not angled) that contains
all patterns selected.
Rectangles and angled patterns
a Rectangle
Rectangles and patterns (not angled)
a Rectangle
• Pressing in the sewing screen changes
the angle at which patterns are connected.
A
B
B
A
A
A
B
B
a
CONNECTING ROTATED PATTERNS
332
l
Continue with step m of “Connecting
Three Patterns” to finish connecting the
patterns.
Connecting Patterns to be Joined
Along an Edge
Greater design variations can be created by sliding
the patterns being connected.
The following procedure describes how to use this
function to connect patterns so they are joined
along an edge. Before connecting the patterns, the
basting function will be used to measure the
distance that the pattern will be slid.
A: First pattern
B: Second pattern
■ Measuring the Distance That the
Pattern Will Be Slid
a
Set “Embroidery Basting Distance” in the
settings screen to “0.0”.
b
Select the pattern whose slide distance is to
be measured.
c
Continue to the embroidery screen, and
press and then, press to
select the basting function.
→ changes to .
CONNECTING ROTATED PATTERNS
Advanced Embroidery
333
7
d
After the pattern is sewn, remove the fabric
from the frame, and then measure the
distance that the pattern is to be slid.
a Vertical: 32.8 mm
b Horizontal: 42.8 mm
■ Trial Sewing
Sew trial embroidery to check that the pattern will
be slid the correct distance.
a
Select the pattern, and then continue to the
sewing screen.
b
Press and then, press in the
sewing screen.
c
Embroider the first pattern.
d
Refer to steps h through k of
“Connecting Three Patterns” on page 321
to select the next pattern.
e
Specify the position of the second pattern
referring to the vertical/horizontal position
measured in step
d of “Measuring the
Distance That the Pattern Will Be Slid” on
page 332. Press after specifying the
position.
a Connecting point
a Connecting point
b Vertical/Horizontal position
→ Message appears on screen and carriage will move
after pressing .
a
a
b
a
CONNECTING ROTATED PATTERNS
334
f
Continue with step m of “Connecting
Three Patterns” on page 323 to finish
connecting the patterns.
Note
• After checking that the trial embroidery
results are satisfactory, sew the actual
embroidery. If you decide to change the
distance that the pattern is slid after
checking the trial embroidery, change the
settings selected in step
e.
RESUME FEATURE
Advanced Embroidery
335
7
If the machine is turned off while the pattern
connecting function is being used, the machine
will return to the operation indicated below when
it is turned on again. The machine operation will
differ depending on when it is turned off.
Example: When connecting two patterns
RESUME FEATURE
Select the first pattern. Press the pattern connection key .
Begin embroidering the first pattern.
È
Finish embroidering the first pattern. (A)
If the machine is turned off during any operation in this box, the
machine will return to (A) when it is turned on again.
È
Select the second pattern.
È
Press .
È
Specify the reference point for connecting the pattern.
È
Start detecting positioning stickers (2 locations).
È
Finish detecting positioning stickers. (B)
If the machine is turned off during any operation in this box, the
machine will return to (B) when it is turned on again.
È
Rehoop the fabric.
È
Finish detecting positioning stickers (2 locations).
È
Begin embroidering the second pattern.
È
Finish embroidering the second pattern.
RESUME FEATURE
336
Chapter 8
My Design Center
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER ............................... 338
Basics: Creating a Pattern .......................................................338
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN .............................. 340
■ Key functions.......................................................................... 341
Before Creating Designs..........................................................341
Drawing Lines .........................................................................342
■ Setting the line types and colors............................................. 343
Drawing Regions.....................................................................343
■ Setting the brush types and fill colors..................................... 344
Using the stamp key................................................................344
Using the erase key .................................................................345
Using the select key ................................................................346
After Editing the Design ..........................................................346
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN................................... 347
■ Line sew stitch settings........................................................... 347
■ Fill stitch settings.................................................................... 347
■ Stippling stitch settings........................................................... 348
EMBROIDERY IMAGE PREVIEW SCREEN ............. 349
MY DESIGN CENTER WITH SCAN ...................... 350
Using the Scanning Frame.......................................................350
■ Scanning with an Embroidery Frame...................................... 351
Scanning to Trace Background Image .....................................351
■ Importing the Background image ........................................... 353
LINE SCAN ........................................................... 354
Using the Scanning Frame to Create a Pattern with Line Scan
....354
ILLUSTRATION SCAN .......................................... 357
Using the Scanning Frame to Create a Pattern
with Illustration Scan ..............................................................357
STIPPLING ............................................................ 360
Basic Stippling with My Design Center ...................................360
Scanning Drawing to Create Stippling Pattern ........................363
Scanning Fabric and Stippling .................................................367
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER
338
With My Design Center, you can use below functions;
• hand-drawn functions - creating embroidery patterns by drawing on the LCD screen
• scanning functions - creating embroidery patterns by not only scanning object with built-in camera, but also
imported data from USB media or computer.
You can also combine patterns that you have created with the machine’s built-in patterns.
Start My Design Center by pressing in the home page screen or pressing in the embroidery
pattern selection screen.
Basics: Creating a Pattern
1. Draw a line drawing in the pattern drawing
screen. (page 342)
2. Add color to the pattern.
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER
CAUTION
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the pen (stylus) included with the sewing machine. Do not use a
mechanical pencil, screwdriver or any other hard or sharp object. In addition, do not press the screen
with extreme pressure. Otherwise the screen may be damaged.
• All or part of the screen may sometimes become darker or lighter due to changes in the surrounding
temperature or other changes in the environment. This is not a sign of a malfunction. If the screen is
difficult to read, adjust its brightness.
My Design Center
8
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER
339
3. Select colors and stitching and add desired
patterns to complete the pattern.
4. Specify stitching settings. (page 347)
Further customize your pattern by specifying
embroidery stitching settings, such as satin stitch
width and density and the sewing direction.
5. Convert image data to embroidery data.
The embroidery image preview screen appears.
(page 349)
6. Edit the pattern in the embroidery edit screen,
for example, by combining it with the machine’s
built-in patterns. (page 224)
→ Embroidering begins.
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
340
a Pattern drawing area
b Pattern preview area
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
Memo
• The actual dimension of the pattern area is the size of the embroidery frame, which is 36 cm × 24 cm
(approx. 14 inches × 9-1/2 inches). The pattern you drew may be bigger than you expected. Please
resize the pattern after converting the design to the embroidery pattern.
• When the pattern is enlarged so that only a part of it appears in the pattern drawing area, the entire
pattern is displayed in the pattern preview area. The red frame in the pattern preview area indicates
the part of the pattern displayed in the pattern drawing area. Move the red frame in the pattern
preview area with the touch pen or your finger to display the corresponding area in the pattern
drawing area.
g
c
u
i
e f
p
h
j
k
l
m
n
t s r q
o
a
d
b
My Design Center
8
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
341
■ Key functions
Before Creating Designs
The pattern preview displays the design smaller
than the actual size. You can view the actual
pattern size by setting the “Embroidery Frame
Display”.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
c Magnify key Press this key to magnify the pattern by both 200% and 400% in the
screen.
234
d Image scan key Press this key to scan the attached frame and display on the screen as
the background while using the My Design Center. You can scan the
fabric as the background or scan the picture as the reference when
creating the pattern.
—
e Line design key Press this key to scan the line drawing to edit and convert to the
embroidery data using the built-in camera. You can also import the line
drawing image from the USB media or the computer and create the
embroidery design.
354
f Illustration design key Press this key to scan the illustration to edit and convert to the
embroidery data using the built-in camera. You can also import the
illustration from the USB media or the computer and create the
embroidery design.
357
g Line tool key Draw lines and set the color. You can select the line type and color as
you need.
342
h Brush tool key Paint with brush and set the color. You can select the brush type and
color as you need. Painted lines and areas will be converted to the
pattern embroidered with fill stitch.
343
i Stamp key Press this key to select the stamp shape for pattern drawing. You can
set the fill/stroke setting.
344
j Erase key Press this key to erase lines and shapes that have been drawn. You
can select the size/shape of the eraser.
345
k Cut key Press this key to cut out the selected section. 346
l Select key Press this key to select a section for moving by finger or pen, copying,
deleting, changing size and rotating lines and shapes that have been
drawn.
346
m Rotate key Press this key to rotate the selected section. 346
n Size key Press this key to change the size of the selected section. 346
o Duplicate key Press this key to duplicate the selected section. —
p Preview key Press this key to convert the image data to embroidery data. —
q Recall key Press this key to recall image data from the machine’s memory, USB
media or the computer.
—
r Store key Press this key to store the pattern being created. —
s Undo key Press this key to undo the last operation that was performed and
return to the previous operation. Each press of this key undoes one
operation.
—
t All Clear key Press this key to clear all the lines and shapes and start from the
beginning.
—
u Cancel key Press this key to end the My Design Center. All lines and shaped are
erased when you press this key.
—
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
342
a
Press .
b
Select the grid line of the “Embroidery
Frame Display”.
* Select the grid size 10 mm (3/8 inch) or 25 mm (1
inch).
Drawing Lines
a
Press and draw lines.
Memo
• When is pressed, all regions will be
displayed in the background to clarify the
drawing lines on the screen.
My Design Center
8
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
343
■ Setting the line types and colors
You can set or change the line types and colors
anytime. You can also specify the line types and
colors before drawing lines.
a
Press to set the line types and colors.
→ The Line/Color type settings screen appears.
a Line types
b Color selection: touch the color palette to activate
the drawing pen color.
Line types
b
Press to return to the pattern
drawing screen.
→ The color bar on the line tool key is changed to the
selected color.
a Color bar
c
Press and press on the line to change
color.
→ The connected line will be changed to the selected
color.
* You can pick the color from the line already drawn,
press and select the desired color.
Drawing Regions
a
Press and draw with brush.
Freehand line
Select for opening the end. Select
to closing the end automatically.
Straight line with one stroke
Straight line changing directions to the point
you select. If the end point is created near the
start point, a closed object will be created.
Stitch line
Line without stitch for creating a region.
Created region will be defined by the gray line.
a
b
Memo
• Press to magnify the image when you
cannot press on the line correctly.
a
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
344
■ Setting the brush types and fill colors
a
Press to set the brush types and fill
colors.
a Brush types
b Fill color selection: touch the color palette to
activate the paint brush color.
c Select when you don’t want any fill stitch.
Brush shapes/sizes
Fill stitch types
b
Press to return to the pattern
drawing screen.
→ The color bar on the brush tool key is changed to the
selected color.
a Color bar
c
Press and press on the brush line to
change color and fill stitch types. You can
also set the fill color/stitch type to the
closed area that is made by lines and brush
lines.
* You can pick the color from the brush line or the
area already drawn, press and select the
desired color.
Using the stamp key
a
Press .
Square brush
Round brush
Small brush
Medium brush
Large brush
Fill stitch pattern
Stippling pattern
b
c
a
a
My Design Center
8
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
345
b
Select a stamp type and stamp shape.
Stamp types
* Press to return to the pattern drawing
screen.
c
Press to set the selected stamp.
→ The pattern drawing screen is displayed.
* You can change size of, rotate or move the shape
right after you create it by pressing or .
Using the erase key
a
Press .
b
Select the size and shape of the eraser.
c
Press to set the selected erase.
→ The pattern drawing screen is displayed.
d
Drag along the area or line that you want to
erase while the key appears as .
Outline
Fill stitch
Outline and fill stitch
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
346
Using the select key
You can select the part of the design to move and/
or edit. Some keys are available only after you
select the part.
a
Press .
b
Select the area you want to edit.
→ Selected area is marked with red square.
c
Edit the design with available keys. (See
“Key functions” on page 341 for the details
of each key function.)
After Editing the Design
Press to create the embroidery pattern.
Memo
• We recommend saving the My Design Center
pattern. You cannot return to the design screen
after applying stitching settings and continuing to
the embroidery edit screen.
• If the pattern is saved, you can start My Design
Center again and further edit the pattern or create a
new pattern with the same design and different
stitching settings applied.
My Design Center
8
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
347
Before creating the embroidery pattern, specify the stitch settings. Lines of the design are sewn with
zigzag stitches, running stitches, or triple stitches, and areas are sewn with fill stitches or stippling stitches.
Stitching of the areas was already selected in “Drawing Regions” on page 343, so specify values of
detailed settings.
If the design data is saved, the settings can be changed after a trial embroidering.
After finished specifying the settings, press to check the preview of the pattern.
■ Line sew stitch settings
Select the type of the line sew stitch from zigzag stitch ( ), running stitch ( ) or triple stitch ( ).
Zigzag stitch
Running stitch /Triple stitch
* Both includes an under sewing.
■ Fill stitch settings
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
Zigzag width
Specifies the width of the satin stitches used to sew the lines of the design.
Density
Specifies the density of the satin stitches used to sew the lines of the design.
Run Pitch
Specifies the length of the straight stitch of the design.
Size
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
Direction
Specifies the sewing direction. Set to “Manual” when you have desired direction of fill stitch.
Density
Specifies the stitch density of fill stitch.
Pull compensation
Specifies to correct the shrinkage of the pattern by slightly shortening or lengthening the
stitching. Change the setting after you embroider the pattern and can check the shrinkage.
Under sewing
Select if you need or not need the under sewing stabilize fabric.
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
348
■ Stippling stitch settings
Run Pitch
Specifies the length of a stitch of the fill stitch of the design.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing between the stitches when embroidering the stippling stitch.
My Design Center
8
EMBROIDERY IMAGE PREVIEW SCREEN
349
You can check the total stitch number, embroidery time and spool thread color number to embroider the
pattern. Press to check the pattern image with the embroidery frame.
Press to proceed to the embroidery edit screen.
Press to change the stitch settings again.
Press to save the pattern as the embroidering data.
Press to return to the pattern drawing screen.
EMBROIDERY IMAGE PREVIEW SCREEN
Note
• Once you proceed to the embroidery edit screen, you cannot return to the previous page.
MY DESIGN CENTER WITH SCAN
350
Using the Scanning Frame
a
Prepare the desired drawing/illustration.
b
Place the paper to be scanned in the
scanning frame, and then secure the paper
in place with the included magnets.
* Place the magnets at six locations around the paper
to secure it, making sure that the line drawing is not
covered.
MY DESIGN CENTER WITH SCAN
CAUTION
• To avoid having the embroidery foot strike the
frame during the scanning process and
possibly causing injury, check the following:
the thickness of the fabric or paper, creases or
folds in the fabric or paper that may be rolled
up too close to the frame.
Memo
• Only one sheet of paper can be placed in
the scanning frame per scan.
Note
• When placing the paper in the scanning
frame, make sure that the white balance
area is not hidden; otherwise, the drawing
cannot be scanned correctly. At the same
time, be sure to place the scan image within
the scan area. The image out of the scan
area will not be scanned.
a White balance area
b Scan area
• Make sure that the white balance area or
the scan area is not dirty or scratched;
otherwise, the image cannot be scanned
correctly.
• Be sure to use the included magnets. If any
other magnets are used, they may become
attached to the machine during scanning, or
other problems, such as a misaligned scan
image, may occur.
• Be sure to place the magnets so that they
secure the paper firmly. If the paper is
placed unevenly, the image cannot be
scanned correctly.
• If the scanning frame is dirty, wipe it with a
cloth dampened with a diluted neutral
detergent solution.
Memo
• If you want to scan the small piece of paper
that cannot be placed with the magnets,
copy the image on the paper to the larger
paper and place on the scanning frame.
My Design Center
8
MY DESIGN CENTER WITH SCAN
351
c
Attach the embroidery unit to the machine,
and then turn on the machine.
* Refer to “Attaching the Embroidery Unit” on
page 211.
d
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to
raise the presser foot, and then press the
“Needle Position” button to raise the
needle.
* The presser foot is not raised high enough when
raised with the presser foot lever.
e
After attaching the scanning frame to the
embroidery unit, swing the frame-securing
lever toward you to secure the frame.
* Refer to “ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME”
on page 261.
■ Scanning with an Embroidery Frame
Drawings and illustrations can also be scanned
using an embroidery frame. Hoop the embroidery
frame with fabric larger than the frame. Place the
paper to be scanned on the fabric, and then secure
it, with tape.
a Fabric
b Tape
Scanning to Trace Background
Image
If you have a favorite picture or drawing, it can
easily be traced on the scanned background image
and you can create your own pattern.
a
Press .
→ The image display screen appears.
Note
• Unthread the machine to avoid having the
thread slipping out of the needle or getting
caught on the embroidery frame.
CAUTION
• If you want to scan the small piece of paper
that cannot be placed with the magnets, copy
the image on the paper to the larger paper and
place on the scanning frame.
Note
• Make sure that presser foot and needle are
fully raised. If scanning is started with the
presser foot and needle lowered, the
scanning frame may hit the machine,
causing damage.
Note
• Unthread the machine to avoid having the
thread pull out of the needle or becoming
caught on the scanning frame.
• Be sure not to attach any presser foot other
than the embroidery foot “W+” or “W”,
otherwise the presser foot will be scanned.
MY DESIGN CENTER WITH SCAN
352
b
Using a magnets, affix a picture to the
scanning frame and attach the frame to the
machine. Refer to “Using the Scanning
Frame” on page 350.
c
Press .
→ When the following message appears, press .
→ Scanning begins.
* To stop scanning and return to the screen in
step
c, press .
d
When scanning is finished, scanned image is
displayed transparently in the pattern
drawing area.
e
Trace the background image. Refer to
“PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN” on
page 340 about creating your pattern.
a Transparency adjustment
* Press or to adjust the transparency of the
background.
Each press of lightens the background, making
the line pattern darker. Each press of darkens the
background, making the line pattern lighter.
f
After editing the pattern, follow the
procedure from “After Editing the Design”
on page 346.
Note
• When scanning starts, some of the machine
lights will turn off in a certain
circumstances, in order to increase the
scan quality. The machine lights will return
to their original brightness when scanning
ends.
• You can import the data as a .jpg, .png,
.bmp file type.
a
My Design Center
8
MY DESIGN CENTER WITH SCAN
353
■ Importing the Background image
Prepare data of your favorite picture that you want
to create the pattern with. Save the data as a .jpg file
type to the PC or USB media.
a
Press .
→ The image display screen appears.
b
Select the device you saved the data to.
c
Select the data, and then press .
d
The selected image is displayed
transparently in the pattern drawing area.
LINE SCAN
354
Custom patterns can be created from drawings.
You can create patterns by scanning your
drawings using the included scanning frame or
importing an image from USB media or a
computer.
Recommended line drawings for Line Scan
• Line drawings must be drawn clearly using lines
with approximately 1 mm thickness.
• Line drawings should be drawn in a strong
contrast.
• If the lines are too short or gathered too densely,
they will not be scanned correctly.
Using the Scanning Frame to
Create a Pattern with Line Scan
a
Press .
→ The image display screen appears.
b
Press .
* If you scan the image, make sure that the scanning
frame is attached to the machine. Refer to “Using
the Scanning Frame” on page 350.
LINE SCAN
Note
• For details on creating patterns using color
illustrations, refer to “ILLUSTRATION
SCAN” on page 357.
• If you cannot scan the drawings as
expected, you can edit the design in the My
Design Center. Refer to “PATTERN
DRAWING SCREEN” on page 340.
• Line drawings are scanned without
recognizing the thickness of lines. If you
want to change the thickness of lines,
specify in the Settings screen. Refer to
“STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN” on
page 347.
• Line drawings are scanned as black lines. If
you want to change the colors, specify in
the My Design Center. Refer to “Drawing
Regions” on page 343.
My Design Center
8
LINE SCAN
355
→ When the following message appears, press .
→ Scanning begins.
* To stop scanning and return to the screen in
step
b, press .
c
When scanning is finished, specify the
“Gray-Scale Detection level” on the screen
if necessary.
The “Gray-Scale Detection level” can change the
black and white threshold for the image.
* If you do not know how the settings should be
changed, first continue the operation without
specifying settings and check the results.
* To stop scanning and return to the screen in
step b, press . The scanned image will be
deleted when you return to the previous screen.
d
Move to frame the image for the
pattern.
e
Press .
→ The screen for confirming the converted image
appears.
f
In the screen for confirming the converted
image, you can adjust the “Gray-Scale
Detection level” again, if necessary.
* If you do not know how the settings should be
changed, first continue the operation without
specifying settings and check the results.
* To enlarge the image, press .
* To display the image before being converted, press
. Compare the images before and after
being converted, and then change the settings if
necessary.
* To return to the previous screen, press .
→ After changes to the settings of “Detection level” is
applied, changes to . Press
to check that the image is as desired.
g
Press .
Note
• When scanning starts, some of the machine
lights will turn off in a certain
circumstances, in order to increase the
scan quality. The machine lights will return
to their original brightness when scanning
ends.
LINE SCAN
356
h
Press .
In this screen, the pattern can be resized, rotated or
moved.
→ The pattern design editing screen for My Design
Center appears.
* To return to the previous screen, press .
i
Follow the procedure described on
page 224 to edit the pattern as desired.
* The original image is displayed in the background.
Use gauge a to adjust the transparency of the
background. Each press of lightens the
background, making the line pattern darker. Each
press of darkens the background, making the
line pattern lighter.
a
Note
• During scanning, the small dots that appear
and unnecessary lines can be erased.
• To import an image from USB media or a
computer, press , or
. For details, refer to page 353.
My Design Center
8
ILLUSTRATION SCAN
357
Custom patterns can be created from color
illustrations. You can create patterns by scanning
an illustration using the included scanning frame
or importing an image from USB media or a
computer.
Recommended illustrations for Illustration Scan
• Patterns that are clearly drawn, with no
gradation, fading or blurriness.
• Patterns that are at least a 5 mm square
• Patterns that are extremely simple images
Using the Scanning Frame to
Create a Pattern with Illustration
Scan
a
Press .
→ The image display screen appears.
b
Press .
→ When the following message appears, press .
→ Scanning begins.
* To stop scanning and return to the screen in
step
b, press .
ILLUSTRATION SCAN
Note
• When scanning starts, some of the machine
lights will turn off in order to increase the
scan quality. The machine lights will return
to their original brightness when scanning
ends.
ILLUSTRATION SCAN
358
c
When scanning is finished, specify the
necessary settings in the scan image
confirmation screen.
Change the settings to adjust the image so it can easily
be converted to the desired pattern.
* To stop scanning and return to the screen in
step
b, press .
d
Move to frame the image for the
pattern.
e
Press .
→ The screen for confirming the converted image
appears.
f
In the screen for confirming the converted
image, adjust the image as necessary as in
step
c.
* To enlarge the image, press .
* To display the image before being converted, press
. Compare the images before and after
being converted, and then change the settings if
necessary.
* To return to the previous screen, press .
→ After changes to the settings described above have
been applied, changes to . Press
to check that the image is as desired.
g
Press .
a Max. Number of
Colors
The number of colors in an image will
reduced less than the number
specified here, and then the outline
will be extracted.
b Remove Background Select whether or not the
background color will be included as
one of the colors.
c Line Select whether or not the outline will
be detected as a line. A thick outline
can also be detected as a region.
When detected as a line, the line
thickness and color can be specified.
Memo
• Press to detect the outline.
Line thickness can be specified from 1.0
mm (1/16 inch) to 5.0 mm (3/16 inch).
• Press to select the outline color. Select
by touching the color, or moving icon
using in the color selection screen.
My Design Center
8
ILLUSTRATION SCAN
359
h
Press .
In this screen, the pattern can be resized, rotated or
moved.
→ The pattern design editing screen for My Design
Center appears.
* To return to the previous screen, press .
i
Follow the procedure described on
page 224 to edit the pattern as desired.
* The original image is displayed in the background.
Use gauge a to adjust the transparency of the
background. Each press of lightens the
background, making the illustration pattern darker.
Each press of darkens the background, making
the illustration pattern lighter.
a
Note
• During scanning, the small dots that appear
and unnecessary lines can be erased.
• To import an image from USB media or the
computer, press , or
.
STIPPLING
360
Basic Stippling with My Design
Center
Create a stippling design with the basic procedure.
Example:
a
Press .
* You can also start the function by pressing
in “Embroidery” mode.
b
Press .
c
Select the square shape, and then press
.
d
Press to enlarge the square.
STIPPLING
My Design Center
8
STIPPLING
361
e
Press 7 times, and then press for
this example.
f
Press .
g
Select the heart shape, and then press
.
h
Press , and then press .
STIPPLING
362
i
Press , and then select the stitch color.
Press after setting the color.
j
Select the area you want to set stippling
effect.
a Select this area.
k
Press .
→ When the following message appears, press .
l
Adjust the stippling settings to create the
desired effect, and then press .
a
My Design Center
8
STIPPLING
363
m
Press .
n
Follow the procedure described on
page 224 to edit the pattern as desired.
Scanning Drawing to Create
Stippling Pattern
Create the custom pattern with stippling design.
Example:
a
Set the drawing to create the pattern to the
scan frame.
b
Press .
* You can also start the function by pressing
in “Embroidery” mode.
c
Press .
→ The image display screen appears.
d
Set the scan frame to the machine, and then
press .
STIPPLING
364
→ When the following message appears, press .
→ Scanning begins.
* To stop scanning and return to the screen in
step
b, press .
e
When scanning is finished, move to
frame the image for the pattern, and then
press .
f
Press .
g
Press .
Note
• When scanning starts, some of the machine
lights will turn off in a certain
circumstances, in order to increase the
scan quality. The machine lights will return
to their original brightness when scanning
ends.
• You can import an image of 5 MB or smaller
from USB media or a computer.
My Design Center
8
STIPPLING
365
h
Press , and then press .
i
Press to set the outline of the pattern,
and then press .
j
Select the outline of the pattern to set as the
line without stitch.
a Outline of the pattern
k
Press to select the color of the stitch
around the stippling effect.
a
STIPPLING
366
l
Press and select the stitch color, and
then press .
m
Select the stitch line around the stippling
effect.
a Stitch line
n
Press , and then press .
o
Press , and then select the stitch color.
Press after setting the color.
a
My Design Center
8
STIPPLING
367
p
Select the area you want to set stippling
effect.
q
Follow the procedure from step k of
“Basic Stippling with My Design Center”.
Scanning Fabric and Stippling
Use the fabric pattern to coordinate with the
stippling pattern.
a
Set the fabric to the embroidery frame.
b
Press .
* You can also start the function by pressing
in “Embroidery” mode.
c
Press .
→ The image display screen appears.
d
Set the embroidery frame to the machine,
and then press .
→ When the following message appears, press .
→ Scanning begins.
* To stop scanning and return to the screen in
step
b, press .
Note
• When scanning starts, some of the machine
lights will turn off in a certain
circumstances, in order to increase the
scan quality. The machine lights will return
to their original brightness when scanning
ends.
• You can import an image of 5 MB or smaller
from USB media or a computer.
STIPPLING
368
e
Press .
f
Select the circle shape, and then press
.
g
Press to enlarge the circle.
h
Press until the size of circle fits the
pattern on the fabric, and then press .
* Use to align the position of the circle to
the pattern on the fabric.
My Design Center
8
STIPPLING
369
i
Press , and then press .
j
Press , and then select the stitch color.
Press after setting the color.
k
Select the area you want to set stippling
effect.
l
Press , and then press .
STIPPLING
370
m
Press to set the outline of the pattern,
and then press .
n
Select the outline of the pattern to set as the
line without stitch.
a Outline of the pattern
o
Follow the procedure from step k of
“Basic Stippling with My Design Center”.
→ Start embroidering on the fabric that you scanned at
first.
a
Chapter 9
How to Create Bobbin Work
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK ....................................... 372
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK........................ 373
Required Materials..................................................................373
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover ............................................... 373
■ Lower thread.......................................................................... 373
■ Upper thread.......................................................................... 373
■ Needle.................................................................................... 373
■ Presser foot ............................................................................ 373
■ Fabric .....................................................................................374
Upper Threading.....................................................................374
Preparing the Bobbin Thread .................................................374
■ When tension is applied to the bobbin thread........................ 376
■ When tension is not applied to the bobbin thread.................. 376
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING) ............... 378
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing ..........................................378
■ Finishing the thread ends........................................................ 380
Bobbin Work Free Motion Sewing ..........................................380
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY) ....... 381
Selecting the Pattern ...............................................................381
Start Embroidering ..................................................................382
ADJUSTING BOBBIN WORK THREAD TENSION
.... 385
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension ........................................ 385
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread ............................ 385
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................... 386
■ The thread was accidentally cut automatically and the bobbin
thread is caught inside the machine ....................................... 386
■ The pattern is misaligned........................................................ 386
■ The bobbin thread catches on the tension spring of
the bobbin case ...................................................................... 386
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
372
Beautiful embroidery work, with a three-dimensional appearance, can be created by winding the bobbin
with heavy weight thread or ribbon, which is too thick to be threaded through the machine’s needle. The
decorative thread or ribbon will stitch out on the underneath side of fabric while sewing with the fabric
wrong side facing up.
Bobbin work embroidery is sewn using the bobbin work patterns included with this product in addition to
some of the utility stitches.
ABOUT BOBBIN WORK
1. Utility stitches 2. Decorative stitches 3. Free motion sewing
9
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
373
How to Create Bobbin Work
Required Materials
■ Bobbin case and bobbin cover
a Bobbin case (gray)
There is a notch at the location indicated by the
letter “A”.
a Bobbin cover
There are two small v-shaped tabs on the back of
the bobbin cover as indicated by the letter “B”.
The tabs help hold the bobbin in place so it does
not lift up while thick thread is being pulled
through.
■ Lower thread
We recommend the following types of threads for
bobbin work.
* When wide ribbon or heavy weight threads are being used, we
recommend test sewing with and without bobbin case tension
being applied to see which gives the best stitching results.
If wide ribbon such as 3.5mm (approx. 1/8 inch) is to be used,
we recommend that bobbin case tension not be applied. Refer
to page 376 for more detailed instructions.
■ Upper thread
Upper thread choices can vary depending on the
finished look you would like to achieve. By using
sewing machine embroidery thread (polyester),
multipurpose polyester thread, or monofilament
(transparent nylon) thread the appearance of a single
design can be changed many times just by choosing
a different upper thread weight and/or color.
If you do not wish for the upper thread to be visible,
we recommend using transparent nylon
monofilament thread or polyester light weight
thread (50wt. or above) that is the same color as the
lower thread.
■ Needle
Use a needle appropriate for the upper thread and
fabric being used. Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” on page 77 and “Embroidery Step by
Step” on page 210.
■ Presser foot
Utility stitches or decorative stitches:
Monogramming foot “N”
Free motion sewing: Free motion quilting foot “C”,
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” or Free
motion echo quilting foot “E”
Embroidery: Embroidery foot “W+” or Embroidery
foot “W” (optional)
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
<Sewing/Embroidery>
No.5 or finer hand embroidery
thread or decorative thread
Flexible woven ribbon
(When embroidering: approx. 2mm
(approx. 5/64 inch) recommended)
<Sewing only>
Fine embroidery ribbon (silk or
silk-like material) (3.5 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) or less, recommended)
Note
• Do not use thread heavier than No.5 hand
embroidery thread.
• Some threads may not be appropriate for
bobbin work. Be sure to sew trial stitches
before sewing on your project.
N
C
C
O
O
E
E
W+
W
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
374
■ Fabric
Be sure to sew trial stitches on a piece of scrap
fabric, which includes the same threads and fabric
as what is being used in your project.
Upper Threading
a
Install a needle appropriate for the upper
thread and fabric to be used.
For details on installing the needle, refer to
“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 75.
b
Attach the presser foot.
→ “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on page 70
→ “Using Free motion Quilting Foot “C”” on page 134
→ “Using free motion Open Toe Quilting Foot “O”” on
page 136
→ “Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion Echo Quilting
Foot “E”” on page 137
→ “Attaching Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED
pointer” on page 211
c
Thread the machine with the upper thread.
For details on threading the machine, refer to
“Upper Threading” on page 62.
Preparing the Bobbin Thread
In order to create bobbin work, the bobbin case
must be replaced with the one for bobbin work.
Before creating bobbin work, clean the bobbin case
and the race.
a
Raise the needle and presser foot, and then
turn off the machine.
b
Remove the flat bed attachment or
embroidery unit.
c
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you to remove it.
a Needle plate cover
d
Remove the bobbin case.
a Bobbin case
e
Use the cleaning brush included with the
machine or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the race and its
surrounding area.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
f
Wipe the bobbin case (gray) with a soft lint
free cloth to clean it.
Note
• The sewing results may be affected by the
type of fabric used. Before sewing your
project, be sure to sew trial stitches on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as the
fabric used in the project.
9
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
375
How to Create Bobbin Work
g
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the
● mark
on the machine.
* Align the S and ● marks.
a S mark
b
● mark
c Bobbin case
h
Wind a decorative thread around the
bobbin by hand. After winding the bobbin
so it is filled as shown below (about 80%),
cut the thread.
For precautions on winding the bobbin for
embroidering, refer to step
b of “Selecting the
Pattern” on page 381.
i
Using scissors carefully trim the thread tail
as close to the bobbin as possible.
a Beginning of wound thread
Note
• The bobbin case (gray) cannot be used for
sewing in any way other than bobbin work.
After sewing bobbin work, refer back to the
steps in “Preparing the Bobbin Thread” on
page 374 for removing and cleaning the
bobbin case (gray), and then reinstall the
standard bobbin case (black).
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the bobbin case (gray) when
creating bobbin work. Using any other bobbin
case may result in the thread becoming
tangled or damage to the machine.
• Make sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed. If the bobbin case is incorrectly
installed, the thread may become tangled or
the machine may be damaged.
a
b
b
a
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the machine’s included bobbin
or one designed specifically for this machine.
Using any other bobbin may result in damage
or injuries. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code: SA156,
(SFB: XA5539-151)). SA156 is Class 15 type
bobbin.
* Actual size
a This model
b Other models
c 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
Note
• Slowly and evenly wind the thread around
the bobbin.
• For best results, wind the bobbin so the
thread is snug and not twisted.
CAUTION
• If thread extends beyond the top of the bobbin
too much, the thread may become tangled or
the needle may break.
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
376
j
Install the bobbin wound with thread.
Whether or not tension should be applied to the
bobbin thread depends on the type of thread being
used.
■ When tension is applied to the
bobbin thread
Insert bobbin into bobbin case so the thread
unwinds from the left side.
Then correctly pass the thread through the tension
spring as shown below.
a Tension spring
■ When tension is not applied to the
bobbin thread
If the bobbin thread in the trial stitching is too tight
and adjusting the bobbin case tension does not help,
do not pass the thread through the tension spring.
Hold the bobbin with your left hand so the thread
unwinds from the right side and hold the end of the
thread with your right hand.
k
Pull out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of
bobbin thread.
l
Lightly hold the end of the upper thread
while turning the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) until the mark on the
handwheel aligns with the center top of
machine.
CAUTION
• When winding the bobbin, make sure the
thread is not frayed. Sewing with frayed
thread may result in the thread catching on
the tension spring of the bobbin case, the
thread completely becoming tangled or
damage to the machine.
• Do not guide the bobbin thread through the
groove in the needle plate cover, otherwise
the lower threading cannot be done correctly.
9
PREPARING FOR BOBBIN WORK
377
How to Create Bobbin Work
m
Gently pull the upper thread to bring the
bobbin thread up through the needle plate.
→ A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the
hole in the needle plate.
n
Insert tweezers through bobbin thread loop
and pull bobbin thread above the needle
plate.
o
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pull out about 10 cm (approx.
4 inches) of the threads and pass them
under the presser foot toward the rear of
the machine.
p
Install the needle plate cover and bobbin
cover with tabs.
For details on installing the needle plate cover, refer to
“Cleaning the Race” on page 388.
a Bobbin cover
b Bobbin cover with tabs
q
Install the flat bed attachment or
embroidery unit.
→ This completes the upper and lower threading.
CAUTION
• When creating bobbin work, use the bobbin
cover with tabs, otherwise the thread may
become tangled or the needle may break.
Note
• When installing the needle plate cover, do
not allow it to pinch the thread.
Note
• When installing the flat bed attachment or
embroidery unit, do not allow it to pinch the
thread.
• When the bobbin thread is replaced with a
new one, be sure to repeat the procedure
from
a, otherwise the lower threading will
not be done correctly.
Note
• If utility stitches are to be used, refer to
“CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)” on
page 378. If embroidery patterns are to be
used, refer to “CREATING BOBBIN WORK
(EMBROIDERY)” on page 381.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
378
Positioning the Fabric and Sewing
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select a stitch in the Utility and Decorative
Stitches mode. For this example, press .
c
Adjust the upper thread tension.
For details on adjusting the upper thread tension,
refer to “Setting the Thread Tension” on page 92.
d
Make sure the automatic thread cutting
( ) and automatic reinforcement/reverse
stitching ( ) have been turned off.
e
Place stabilizer on top (wrong side) of the
fabric.
f
If thread is too thick to pull through fabric
to machine surface use an awl to punch a
small hole in the fabric at the beginning of
stitching so the bobbin thread can be fed
through the opening.
g
Press .
→ The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
Note
• Recommended stitches for bobbin work are
open “airy” type stitches.
• Be sure to sew trial stitches using same
fabric and threads as project in order to
check the sewing results.
• The bobbin thread may become tangled
due to the type of pattern and thread that
are being used. Since this may cause the
needle to break, immediately stop sewing if
this occurs. Turn off the machine and cut
out the tangled thread with scissors. Then,
clean the race and bobbin case as
described in “Preparing the Bobbin Thread”
on page 374.
Memo
• For best results, select a longer stitch length
and a wider stitch width. Depending on the
selected stitch, it may not be possible to
change the stitch length and stitch width
settings.
• Depending on the fabric, bunched stitches
may result. We recommend selecting a
simple stitch and sewing trial stitches to
check the sewing results.
Examples of simple stitches: , ,
Memo
We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the
upper thread tension.
CAUTION
• Before sewing, make sure the automatic thread
cutting has been turned off. If sewing is started with
automatic thread cutting turned on, the thread may
become tangled or the machine may be damaged.
Note
• Type and weight of stabilizer will depend on
fabric and thread being used.
9
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
379
How to Create Bobbin Work
h
Use the presser foot lever to raise the
presser foot.
i
With the wrong side facing up, place the
fabric under the presser foot.
a Wrong side of fabric
j
Turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to feed the needle into
the fabric or punched hole. Position the
upper thread over the presser foot and
lightly hold then, lower the presser foot
lever.
a Punched hole
b Upper thread over the presser foot
k
Pulling the upper thread gently, turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
until the mark on the handwheel aligns with
the center top of machine.
→ A loop of the bobbin thread comes out through the
hole in the fabric.
l
Raise the presser foot lever, and then use
tweezers to pull up the bobbin thread and
bring the end of the thread to the top of the
fabric.
m
Align the upper thread and bobbin thread,
and then pass them under the presser foot
toward the rear of the machine.
n
While gently holding threads at the rear of
the machine, turn the handwheel to feed
the needle into the fabric or punched hole
again, and then lower the presser foot lever.
o
Press .
→ All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
p
Select a low speed, gently hold the threads
behind the presser foot and start sewing.
Threads can be released after several
stitches have been made.
Note
• If the bobbin thread does not come up, hold
the upper thread as shown below to pull up
the bobbin thread.
a Upper thread
Note
• Pull the thread while holding down the
fabric so it does not move out of place.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (SEWING)
380
q
When you have reached the end of the
stitching area, stop the machine.
r
Raise the needle and presser foot.
s
Leaving about 10 cm (approx. 4 inches) of
thread at the ends, use scissors to cut the
threads.
a 10 cm (approx. 4 inches)
■ Finishing the thread ends
a
At the end of the stitching, use a hand
sewing needle to bring the bobbin thread
up to the wrong side of the fabric.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Bobbin thread
b
Working from the wrong side of the fabric,
tie the bobbin and upper threads together
by hand. Cut away excess threads with
scissors.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c
If the desired results could not be achieved,
adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and
of the upper thread, and then try sewing the
stitching again.
For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING BOBBIN
WORK THREAD TENSION” on page 385.
Bobbin Work Free Motion
Sewing
If so desired, use a template or draw your design
on the stabilizer to allow for ease of stitching.
Remember, your stitches with your decorative
thread will be on the underneath side of your
fabric and the stabilizer will be on the top of the
wrong side of your fabric.
* For bobbin work free motion sewing use the
instructions for “CREATING BOBBIN WORK
(SEWING)” on page 378.
* For information about using the free motion quilting
foot “C”, free motion open toe quilting foot “O”, or
free motion echo quilting foot “E” refer to “Free
Motion Quilting” on page 133.
Note
• Before sewing, check that there is enough
thread in the bobbin.
Note
• Do not sew reinforcement/reverse stitches
at the end of the stitching, otherwise the
threads may become tangled or the needle
may break. In addition, it will be difficult to
pull the bobbin thread up to the wrong side
of the fabric.
Note
• Do not press the “Thread Cutter” button to
cut the threads, otherwise the machine may
be damaged.
Note
• If it is difficult to place bobbin thread
through the eye of a hand sewing needle,
use a ribbon embroidery needle to pull the
thread up to the wrong side of the fabric.
Otherwise, use an awl to pull up the bobbin
thread.
Note
• To ensure threads do not come undone
after being tied place a drop of fabric glue
on knots.
9
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
381
How to Create Bobbin Work
Selecting the Pattern
a
Attach the embroidery foot “W+” or “W”
and the embroidery unit.
b
Install a bobbin wound with an adequate
amount of thread for pattern.
c
Pull up the bobbin thread above the needle
plate.
d
Turn on the machine.
e
Press .
→ The carriage will move to the initialization position.
f
To select a bobbin work embroidery
pattern, press (Embroidery).
g
Press for bobbin work patterns.
h
Select one of the bobbin work embroidery
patterns.
Embroidery patterns for bobbin work appear with
the letter “B” in the lower-left corner of the key.
a “B” mark
→ Regardless of the setting that had been selected, the
automatic thread cutting function is turned off.
→ When a bobbin work embroidery pattern is selected
the embroidery sewing speed is automatically set at
350 spm.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
Note
• Prepare the machine for bobbin work as
described in “PREPARING FOR BOBBIN
WORK” on page 373.
Note
• For an estimated length of bobbin thread
required for each pattern, refer to the Quick
Reference Guide included with the
machine. Be sure to use a bobbin wound
with enough thread. If the bobbin runs out
of thread while sewing, the embroidery
cannot be completed.
• Depending on the thread thickness, it may
not be possible to wind the bobbin with the
necessary length of thread. In this case, try
winding the bobbin again, or use a lighter
weight thread.
Note
• The beginning and end of stitching are
specified for bobbin work patterns. They
cannot be used for normal embroidering.
CAUTION
• When sewing bobbin work, be sure to select an
embroidery pattern for bobbin work. If any other
type of pattern is selected, the machine may be
damaged.
Note
• Embroidery sewing speed defaults to 350
spm when a bobbin work embroidery
pattern is selected. The Settings screen will
not allow speed to be adjusted.
a
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
382
i
Press and then press .
→ The embroidering screen is displayed.
j
Press , and then adjust the tension of
the upper thread.
For details on adjusting the tension of the upper
thread, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on
page 301.
Start Embroidering
a
Hoop the fabric so the right side of the
fabric is facing down with the stabilizer
lying on the top. Use an embroidery frame
that fits the size of the pattern and then
attach the frame to the machine. These
patterns are embroidered from the wrong
side of the fabric so technically you are
working in “reverse” of normal
embroidering.
a Wrong side of fabric
Memo
• When an embroidery pattern for bobbin
work is selected, the automatic thread
cutting function is turned off. Afterward, if a
pattern other than one for bobbin work is
selected, the automatic thread cutting
function is returned to the setting that was
selected before the embroidery pattern for
bobbin work was chosen.
Note
• Since bobbin work is sewn from the wrong
side of the fabric, the pattern shown in the
screen appears as a mirror image of the
final sewn embroidery. If necessary, flip the
image to preview it. In addition, when
sewing with the thread colors shown in the
embroidering screen, select a bobbin
thread that matches what is shown in the
screen.
a Image shown in screen b Sewn embroidery
(Right side of fabric)
Memo
• With embroidery patterns for bobbin work,
the size and thread density cannot be
changed. In addition, the automatic thread
cutting function cannot be turned on.
Memo
• We recommend a setting between 6 and 8
for the upper thread tension.
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery.
Otherwise, the needle may break and cause injuries.
Not using a stabilizer material may result in a poor
finish to your project.
9
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
383
How to Create Bobbin Work
b
It is necessary to move to the beginning of
stitching so press , and then press .
→ The embroidery frame moves to the beginning of
stitching.
c
Press .
→ The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked.
d
Using the presser foot lever, raise the
presser foot.
e
To bring the bobbin thread above the
fabric, rotate the handwheel
counterclockwise while holding the upper
thread.
f
As shown below, pull the upper thread
slightly to the left pulling the bobbin thread
up through the fabric.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
g
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
h
Lower the presser foot.
i
Press .
j
While holding both the upper thread and
the bobbin thread, sew a section of the
pattern.
k
Stop the machine, and then tie the upper
thread and the bobbin thread together to
secure the threads.
l
Start sewing again to finish the pattern.
m
Raise the needle and presser foot, remove
the embroidery frame, and then cut the
upper thread and the bobbin thread.
When cutting the threads, be sure to leave an
adequate length of thread so they can be
Memo
• If the bobbin thread cannot be pulled up,
use an awl to create small hole to help pull
bobbin thread to surface.
CREATING BOBBIN WORK (EMBROIDERY)
384
properly secured.
n
Using a hand sewing needle such as a
ribbon embroidery needle, pull the bobbin
thread to the top (wrong side) of the fabric,
and then tie the upper thread and the
bobbin thread together.
o
Remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame, and check the finished embroidery.
p
If the desired results could not be achieved,
adjust the tension of the bobbin thread and
of the upper thread, and then try sewing the
pattern again.
For more details, refer to “ADJUSTING BOBBIN
WORK THREAD TENSION” on page 385.
Memo
• If there is a gap between the start point and
end point of the pattern, cut the threads,
remove the fabric from the machine, and
then use a ribbon embroidery needle to
hand sew stitches to connect the starting
and ending points.
a Right side of fabric b Wrong side of fabric
Memo
• Check bobbin after each bobbin work
embroidery pattern is sewn to make sure
there is adequate bobbin thread for the next
pattern.
9
ADJUSTING BOBBIN WORK THREAD TENSION
385
How to Create Bobbin Work
After sewing trial stitches and checking the sewing results, adjust the thread tensions if necessary. After adjusting the
tensions, be sure to sew trial stitches again in order to check the sewing results.
■ Adjusting the upper thread tension
We recommend a setting between 6 and 8 for the upper
thread tension.
If utility stitches are being used, refer to “Setting the
Thread Tension” on page 92. If embroidery patterns are
being used, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on
page 301.
■ Adjusting the tension of the bobbin
thread
If the desired stitching cannot be achieved after
adjusting the upper thread tension, adjust the tension of
the bobbin thread. The tension of the bobbin thread can
be adjusted by turning the slotted-head (–) screw on the
bobbin case (gray) for bobbin work.
a Do not turn the phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a small screwdriver.
To increase the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° clockwise.
To decrease the tension of the bobbin thread, turn the
slotted-head (–) screw 30° to 45° counterclockwise.
ADJUSTING BOBBIN WORK THREAD TENSION
Note
• Turning the screw on the bobbin case (gray)
may push up the spring plate, as shown
below.
If this occurs, gently press down the spring
plate with a screwdriver so it is lower than
the top surface of the bobbin case (gray),
and then insert the bobbin case into the
machine.
a Spring plate
CAUTION
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the bobbin case (gray) as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it useless.
• If the slotted screw (-) is difficult to turn, do not use
force. Turning the screw too much or providing
force in either (rotational) direction may cause
damage to the bobbin case. Should damage occur,
the bobbin case may not maintain proper tension.
Note
• If the bobbin thread tension is tight, the
thread cannot be passed through the
tension spring when the bobbin is installed
in the bobbin case. (Refer to “When tension
is not applied to the bobbin thread” on
page 376.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
386
Several solutions for minor problems are described below. If the problem persists, contact your nearest authorized
Brother dealer.
■ The thread was accidentally cut
automatically and the bobbin thread
is caught inside the machine
a
Cut the thread near the fabric above the
needle plate, and then remove the fabric.
a Thread
b
Remove the bobbin, and then hold it out
toward the left side of the machine.
c
Lower the presser foot.
d
Apply slight tension on bobbin thread by
holding thread out to the left side of presser
foot. Press the “Thread Cutter” button
again.
■ The pattern is misaligned
Refer to “ADJUSTING BOBBIN WORK THREAD
TENSION” and increase the upper thread tension. If
the pattern is still misaligned, reduce the tension of
the bobbin thread.
Example: Decorative Stitch
a Correct tension
b The upper thread tension is too loose, or the
bobbin thread tension is too tight.
■ The bobbin thread catches on the
tension spring of the bobbin case
Sew with no tension applied to the bobbin thread.
(Refer to “When tension is not applied to the bobbin
thread” on page 376.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Note
• If an embroidery pattern was sewn, remove
the embroidery frame.
CAUTION
• Do not pull on the thread with excessive force,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
Chapter 10
Appendix
CARE AND MAINTENANCE.................................. 388
Restrictions on oiling ..............................................................388
Precautions on storing the machine ........................................388
Cleaning the LCD Screen .......................................................388
Cleaning the Machine Casing .................................................388
Cleaning the Race .................................................................388
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area ..........................390
About the Maintenance Message ............................................390
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN..................................... 391
Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen Display .......................391
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning ................................................391
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................... 392
Frequent Troubleshooting Topics............................................392
Upper Thread is Too Tight ......................................................392
■ Symptom ................................................................................392
■ Cause ..................................................................................... 392
■ Remedy .................................................................................. 392
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric ................................393
■ Symptom ................................................................................393
■ Cause ..................................................................................... 393
■ Remedy .................................................................................. 393
Incorrect Thread Tension........................................................395
■ Symptoms............................................................................... 395
■ Cause/remedy ........................................................................ 395
Fabric is Caught in the Machine and Cannot be Removed ......396
■ Removing the fabric from the machine ..................................396
■ Checking machine operations ................................................ 398
List of Symptoms.....................................................................399
■ Getting ready ......................................................................... 399
■ While sewing.......................................................................... 400
■ After sewing ........................................................................... 403
ERROR MESSAGES ................................................ 405
■ Alarm Sounds ........................................................................ 410
SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 411
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE .... 412
Upgrade Procedure Using USB Media ....................................412
Upgrade Procedure Using Computer ......................................413
STITCH SETTING CHART...................................... 414
INDEX ................................................................... 423
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
388
Restrictions on oiling
In order to prevent damaging this machine, it must
not be oiled by the user. This machine was
manufactured with the necessary amount of oil
applied to ensure correct operation, making
periodic oiling unnecessary.
If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the
handwheel or an unusual noise, immediately stop
using the machine, and contact your authorized
Brother dealer or the nearest Brother authorized
service center.
Precautions on storing the
machine
Do not store the machine in any of the locations
described below, otherwise damage to the
machine may result, for example, rust caused by
condensation.
* Exposed to extremely high temperatures
* Exposed to extremely low temperatures
* Exposed to extreme temperature changes
* Exposed to high humidity or steam
* Near a flame, heater or air conditioner
* Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight
* Exposed to extremely dusty or oily environments
Cleaning the LCD Screen
If the screen is dirty, gently wipe it with the
included LCD cleaning cloth or a soft, dry cloth.
Do not use organic solvents or detergents.
Cleaning the Machine Casing
If the surface of the machine is dirty, lightly soak a
cloth in a neutral detergent, squeeze it out firmly,
and then wipe the surface. Then wipe again with a
dry cloth.
Cleaning the Race
a
Press the “Needle Position” button to raise
the needle.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
c
Remove the needle and the presser foot
holder (see pages 71 through 75).
d
Remove the flat bed attachment or the
embroidery unit if either is attached.
e
Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover,
and then slide it toward you.
a Needle plate cover
→ The needle plate cover is removed.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning it. Otherwise, electric shock or injury may result.
Note
• In order to extend the life of this machine,
periodically turn it on and use it. Storing this
machine for an extended period of time
without using it may reduce its efficiency.
Note
• Do not wipe the LCD screen with a damp
cloth.
Memo
• Occasionally, condensation may form on
the LCD screen or it may become fogged
up; however, this is not a malfunction. After
a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
389
10
Appendix
f
Grasp the bobbin case, and then gently lift
out.
a Bobbin case
g
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any lint and dust from the race
and bobbin thread sensor and the
surrounding area.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
c Bobbin thread sensor
h
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the
● mark
on the machine.
* Align the S and ● marks.
a S mark on the bobbin case
b
● mark on the machine
c Bobbin case
* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
i
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
Note
• Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
• If lint or dust collects on the bobbin thread
sensor, the sensor may not operate
correctly.
a
b
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
otherwise, the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking
on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the
screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),
contact your nearest authorized Brother
dealer.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
Note
• If the needle plate has been removed it is
especially important to reinstall the needle
plate and tighten the screws prior to
installing the bobbin case.
b
a
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
390
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin
Case Area
The cutter below the needle plate should be
cleaned. If dust or lint accumulate on the cutter, it
will be difficult to cut the thread when the “Thread
Cutter” button is pressed or the automatic thread
cutting function is used. Clean the cutter when the
thread is not easily cut.
a
Follow steps a through e in “Cleaning the
Race” to remove the needle plate cover.
b
Use the screwdriver included with the
machine to unscrew and remove the needle
plate.
c
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any lint and dust from the cutter
in the bobbin case area.
a Cutter
d
Use the screwdriver included with the
machine to screw and attach the needle
plate.
e
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
About the Maintenance Message
Once this message appears, it is recommended to
take your machine to an authorized Brother dealer
or nearest Brother authorized service center for a
regular maintenance check. Although this message
will disappear and the machine will continue to
function once you press , the message will
display several more times until the appropriate
maintenance is performed.
Please take the time to arrange for the
maintenance your machine requires once this
message appears. Such steps will help to ensure
you receive continued, uninterrupted hours of
machine operation for the future.
CAUTION
• Do not touch the cutter, otherwise injuries
may result.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
391
10
Appendix
Adjusting the Brightness of the
Screen Display
If the screen does not look very clear under certain
situations, you can adjust the brightness of the
screen display.
a
Press .
→ The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
→ The General settings screen appears.
c
Display page 4 of the General settings
screen.
d
Press or to adjust the brightness of
the screen display.
* The screen will dim as the number on the settings
screen decreases. The screen will appear brighter as
the numbers increase.
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning
If the screen does not respond correctly when you
touch a key (the machine does not perform the
operation or performs a different operation), follow
the steps below to make the proper adjustments.
a
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the
main power switch to OFF and back to ON.
→ The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.
b
Using the included touch pen, lightly touch
the center of each +, in order from 1 to 13.
c
Turn the main power to OFF, then turn it
back to ON.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
Note
• Only use the included touch pen to touch
the screen. Do not use a mechanical pencil,
pin, or other sharp object. Do not press too
hard on the screen. Otherwise, damage
may result.
Note
• If you finish the screen adjustment and the
screen still does not respond, or if you
cannot do the adjustment, contact your
authorized Brother dealer.
+1
+4
+5 +8
+11 +13
+9
+2 +3
+10
7+
6+
12+
TROUBLESHOOTING
392
If the machine stops operating correctly, check the following possible problems before requesting service.
You can solve most problems by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers
the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips. Visit us at “ http://support.brother.com
”.
If the problem persists, contact your authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service
center.
Frequent Troubleshooting Topics
Detailed causes and remedies for common troubleshooting topics are described below. Be sure to refer to
this before contacting your authorized Brother dealer.
Upper Thread is Too Tight
■ Symptom
* The upper thread appears as a single continuous
line.
* The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the
fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.)
* The upper thread has tightened up, and comes out
when pulled.
* The upper thread has tightened up, and wrinkles
appear in the fabric.
* The upper thread tension is tight, and the results do
not change even after the thread tension is adjusted.
a Lower side of fabric
b Lower thread visible from upper side of fabric
c Upper thread
d Upper side of fabric
e Lower thread
■ Cause
Incorrect lower threading
If the lower thread is incorrectly threaded, instead of
the appropriate tension being applied to the lower
thread, it is pulled through the fabric when the
upper thread is pulled up. For this reason, the thread
is visible from the upper side of the fabric.
■ Remedy
Correctly install the lower thread.
a
Turn off the sewing machine.
b
Remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.
c
Place the bobbin in the bobbin case so that
the thread unwinds in the correct direction.
* Hold the bobbin with your right hand with the
thread unwinding to the left, and hold the end of the
thread with your left hand. Then, with your right
hand, place the bobbin in the bobbin case.
If the bobbin is inserted with the thread unwinding
in the wrong direction, sewing will be done with
an incorrect thread tension.
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
page 392
■ Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric
page 393
■ Incorrect Thread Tension
page 395
■ Fabric is Caught in the Machine and Cannot be
Removed
page 396
TROUBLESHOOTING
393
10
Appendix
d
While holding the bobbin in place with
your finger, pass the thread through the slit
in the needle plate.
* Hold down the bobbin with your right hand, and
then pull the end of the thread around the tab with
your left hand.
a Tab
b Hold down the bobbin with your right hand.
Pull the thread to pass it through the slit in the
needle plate, then cut it with the cutter.
c Slit
d Cutter
Sewing with the correct thread tension is possible
after the bobbin has been correctly installed in the
bobbin case.
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of
Fabric
■ Symptom
* The thread becomes tangled on the lower side of the
fabric.
* After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made and
sewing cannot continue.
* Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread in
the bobbin case.
■ Cause
Incorrect upper threading
If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the upper
thread passed through the fabric cannot be firmly
pulled up and the upper thread becomes tangled in
the bobbin case, causing a rattling noise.
■ Remedy
Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the
upper threading.
a
Remove the tangled thread. If it cannot be
removed, cut the thread with scissors.
* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” in “CARE AND
MAINTENANCE” on page 388.
b
Remove the upper thread from the
machine.
c
Refer to the following steps to correct the
upper threading.
* If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,
refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 59 and
“Remedy” in the section “Upper Thread is Too
Tight” on page 392 to correctly install the bobbin.
TROUBLESHOOTING
394
d
Raise the presser foot using the presser foot
lever.
* If the presser foot is not raised, the sewing machine
cannot be threaded correctly.
e
Raise the needle by turning the handwheel
toward you (counterclockwise) so that the
mark on the wheel points up, or press
“Needle Position” button once or twice to
raise the needle.
or
a Mark
f
While holding the thread with both hands,
pull the thread up from under the thread
guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
g
While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.
h
Guide the thread down, up, then down
through the groove, as shown in the
illustration.
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the
thread with both hands and guiding it as
shown in the illustration.
a Needle bar thread guide
j
Thread the needle according to steps j
and
o in “UPPER THREADING” on
page 62.
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if
the thread catches on the take-up lever
visible inside the upper groove area.
a Look in the upper groove area
TROUBLESHOOTING
395
10
Appendix
Incorrect Thread Tension
■ Symptoms
• Symptom 1: The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the fabric.
• Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a straight line on the upper side of the fabric.
• Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the lower side of the fabric.
• Symptom 4: The lower thread appears as a straight line on the lower side of the fabric.
• Symptom 5: The stitching on the lower side of the fabric is loose or has slack.
■ Cause/remedy
□ Cause 1
The machine is not correctly threaded.
<With symptoms 1 and 2 described above>
The lower threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Upper Thread is Too Tight” on page 92.
<With symptoms 3 through 5 described above>
The upper threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric” on page 393 to
correct the upper threading.
□ Cause 2
A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used.
The sewing machine needle that should be used depends on the type of fabric sewn and the thread thickness.
If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not being used, the thread tension will not be adjusted
correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or skipped stitches.
* Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” on page 77 to check that a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric
are being used.
□ Cause 3
An appropriate upper tension is not selected.
Adjust the upper thread tension to select an appropriate thread tension.
The appropriate thread tension differs according to the type of fabric and thread being used.
* Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used in your project.
* When the lower thread is visible on the upper side
of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a lower
number. (Loosen the thread tension.)
* When the upper thread is visible on the lower side
of the fabric. Set the upper thread tension to a higher
number. (Tighten the thread tension.)
□ Symptom 1 □ Symptom 3
a Lower side of fabric
b Lower thread visible on
upper side of fabric
c Upper thread
d Upper side of fabric
e Lower thread
f Upper thread visible from
lower side of fabric
Note
• If the upper threading and lower threading are incorrect, the thread tension cannot be adjusted
correctly, even by adjusting the upper thread tension. Check the upper threading and lower threading
first, and then adjust the thread tension.
TROUBLESHOOTING
396
Fabric is Caught in the Machine
and Cannot be Removed
If the fabric is caught in the sewing machine and
cannot be removed, the thread may have become
tangled under the needle plate. Follow the
procedure described below to remove the fabric
from the machine. If the operation could not be
completed according to the procedure, instead of
attempting to complete it forcefully, contact your
authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
■ Removing the fabric from the
machine
a
Immediately stop the sewing machine.
b
Turn off the sewing machine.
c
Remove the needle.
If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the
handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the
needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 75.
d
Remove the presser foot and presser foot
holder.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on
page 70.
e
Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below
it.
If the fabric can be removed, remove it. Continue with
the following steps to clean the race.
f
Remove the needle plate cover.
a Needle plate cover
g
Cut out the tangled threads, and then
remove the bobbin.
h
Remove the bobbin case.
If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.
a Bobbin case
i
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner
to remove any dust or loose threads from
the race and its surrounding area.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
j
Use the enclosed multi-purpose screwdriver
to loosen the two screws on the needle
plate.
If the fabric could be removed
Continue with
step
p.
If the fabric could not be
removed
Continue with
step
j.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws
in the machine.
TROUBLESHOOTING
397
10
Appendix
k
Slightly lift up the needle plate, cut any
tangled threads, and then remove the
needle plate.
Remove the fabric and threads from the needle plate.
If the fabric cannot be removed, even after completing
these steps, contact your authorized Brother dealer or
the nearest Brother authorized service center.
l
Remove any threads in the race and around
the feed dogs.
m
Turn the handwheel to raise the feed dogs.
n
Align the two screw holes in the needle
plate with the two holes at the needle plate
mounting base, and then fit the needle plate
onto the machine.
o
Lightly finger-tighten the screw on the right
multi-purpose screwdriver side of the
needle plate. Then, use the disc-shaped
screwdriver to firmly tighten the screw on
the left side. Finally, firmly tighten the
screw on the right side.
Turn the handwheel to check that the feed dogs move
smoothly and do not contact the edges of the slots in
the needle plate.
a Correct position of feed dogs
b Incorrect position of feed dogs
p
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the ● mark
on the machine.
* Align the S and ● marks.
a S mark
b ● mark
c Bobbin case
* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws
in the machine.
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched;
otherwise, the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case (part code: XE5342-101 (green marking
on the screw), XC8167-551 (no color on the
screw), XE8298-001 (gray, for bobbin work)),
contact your nearest authorized Brother
dealer.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
a
b
b
a
TROUBLESHOOTING
398
q
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover
into the needle plate, and then slide the
cover back on.
r
Check the condition of the needle, and then
install it.
If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is
bent, be sure to install a new needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 75.
■ Checking machine operations
If the needle plate has been removed, check
machine operations to confirm that installation has
been completed correctly.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select .
c
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), and look from all sides
to check that the needle falls at the center
of the hole in the needle plate.
If the needle contacts the needle plate, remove the
needle plate, and then install it again, starting with
step
m in “Removing the fabric from the machine” on
page 396.
a Hole in the needle plate
b Handwheel
d
Select zigzag stitch . At this time,
increase the stitch length and width to their
maximum settings.
e
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the
needle bar and feed dogs operate correctly.
If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate, the
machine may be malfunctioning; therefore, contact
your authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
f
Turn off the machine, and then install the
bobbin and presser foot.
* Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” and “CHANGING THE
PRESSER FOOT” on page 70.
g
Correctly thread the machine.
* For details on the machine, refer to “UPPER
THREADING” on page 62.
h
Perform trial sewing with normal fabric.
Note
• If the needle plate has been removed it is
especially important to reinstall the needle
plate and tighten the screws prior to
installing the bobbin case.
CAUTION
• Never use bent needles. Bent needles can
easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.
Note
• After completing this procedure, continue
with the following procedure in “Checking
machine operations” to check that the
machine is operating correctly.
Memo
• Since the needle may have been damaged
when the fabric was caught in the machine,
we recommend replacing it with a new one.
Note
• Do not yet install the presser foot and
thread.
Note
• The thread may have become tangled as a
result of incorrect upper threading. Make
sure that the machine is correctly threaded.
Note
• Remember when sewing thin fabrics, select
a center stitch that is shorter in length and
use the straight stitch needle plate for
straight sewing stitches. A lightweight
paper stabilizer can also be placed on the
underside of the fabric.
TROUBLESHOOTING
399
10
Appendix
List of Symptoms
If you have a minor problem with your sewing machine, check the following solutions. If the solutions
suggested do not correct the problem, contact your authorized Brother dealer. Press →
→ for advice about minor sewing problems during sewing. Press at any time to return
to the original screen.
■ Getting ready
Problem Cause Solution Page
Cannot thread the
needle.
Needle is not in the correct position. Press the “Needle Position” button to raise the
needle.
17
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 75
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
62
The needle threader hook is bent and does not
pass through the eye of the needle.
Contact your authorized Brother dealer.
—
The needle threader lever cannot be moved or
returned to its original position.
Contact your authorized Brother dealer.
—
A size 65/9 needle is being used. The needle is incompatible with the needle
threader. Manually pass the thread through the
eye of the needle.
65
Cannot lower the
presser foot with the
presser foot lever.
Presser foot was raised using the “Presser
Foot Lifter” button.
Press the “Presser Foot Lifter” button to lower
the presser foot.
17
Bobbin thread does
not wind neatly on the
bobbin.
The thread is not passed through the bobbin
winding thread guide correctly.
Correctly pass the thread through the bobbin
winding thread guide.
55
Bobbin spins slowly.
Press in the bobbin winding window to
increase the bobbin winding speed.
56
The thread that was pulled out was not wound
onto the bobbin correctly.
Wind the thread that was pulled off around the
bobbin 5 or 6 times clockwise.
55
The empty bobbin was not set on the pin
properly.
Set the empty bobbin on the pin and slowly
turn the bobbin until you hear it click in place.
54
While winding the
bobbin, the bobbin
thread was wound
below the bobbin
winder seat.
You have not wound the bobbin thread
properly when you are initially winding thread
on the bobbin as well as being sure that the
bobbin thread is set in the guides.
After removing the thread wound below the
bobbin winder seat, wind the bobbin correctly.
Follow the drawn images on the top of the
machine for guidance when threading the
machine for bobbin winding.
54
The bobbin thread
cannot be pulled up.
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. 59
Machine does not
operate
All keys and buttons have been locked by
.
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
70, 75
Nothing appears in
the LCD.
Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON.
30
The plug of the power cord is not inserted into
an electrical outlet.
Insert the plug of the power cord into an
electrical outlet.
31
The LCD screen does
not look very clear.
The brightness of the screen is not adjusted. Adjust the “Screen Display Brightness” in the
settings screen.
391
Nothing happens,
even if the LCD
display is pressed
The screen has been locked. Press either of the following keys to unlock the
screen.
—
The LCD screen is
fogged up.
Condensation has formed on the LCD screen. After a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
—
Embroidery unit does
not operate.
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly. Reattach the embroidery unit correctly.
211
Embroidery frame was attached before the
unit was initialized.
Remove the embroidery unit, and then perform
the initialization process correctly.
211
TROUBLESHOOTING
400
■ While sewing
Pointer of the
embroidery foot “W+”
with LED pointer
does not indicate the
position correctly
With thick elastic fabric, the position will be
misaligned only at raised parts in the fabric.
Manually adjust the position according to the
thickness of the fabric.
264
With fabric having a very uneven surface, the
position is not correctly aligned.
The pointer indication should be used only as
a reference.
—
Specifying with
sensor pen cannot be
done accurately.
The sensor pen has not been calibrated. Before using the sensor pen for the first time,
be sure to calibrate it.
52
The pen is being held differently than when it
was calibrated.
When using the sensor pen, be sure to hold it
at the same angle as when it was calibrated.
The specification location may be misaligned if
the pen is held at a slightly different angle. In
this case, make fine adjustments after making
the selection.
52
Problem Cause Solution Page
Machine does not
operate.
“Start/Stop” button was not pressed. Press the “Start/Stop” button.
17
There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern.
113, 170, 214, 313
Presser foot is not lowered. Lower the presser foot.
17
“Start/Stop” button was pressed with the foot
controller attached.
Remove the foot controller, or use the foot
controller to operate the machine.
83
The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the
machine is set for the sewing speed controller
to control the zigzag stitch width.
Use the foot controller instead of the “Start/
Stop” button to operate the machine, or set
the “Width Control” to “OFF” in the settings
screen.
33, 83
Needle breaks. Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 75
Needle clamp screw is not tightened. Tighten the needle clamp screw. 76
Needle is turned or bent. Replace the needle. 75
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/thread/needle
combinations” chart.
77
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the recommended presser foot.
“STITCH SETTING
CHART”
Upper thread tension is too tight. Adjust the thread tension. 92, 301
Fabric is pulled during sewing. Do not pull the fabric during sewing. —
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool cap,
then reattach the spool cap.
62
There are scratches around the opening in the
needle plate.
Replace the needle plate, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
119
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
Replace the presser foot, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
70
There are scratches on the bobbin case. Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
388
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. 75
A bobbin designed specifically for this
machine is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
59
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
62
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. 59
Presser foot is attached incorrectly. Attach the presser foot correctly. 70
Screw of the presser foot holder is loose. Securely tighten the screw of the presser foot. 71
Fabric is too thick. Use fabric that the needle can pierce when the
handwheel is turned.
87
Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick
fabric or thick seams.
Allow the fabric to be fed without being
forcefully pushed.
77, 87
Stitch length is too short. Adjust the stitch length. 91
Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being
embroidered.
Attach stabilizer. 175, 256
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. 54
Problem Cause Solution Page
TROUBLESHOOTING
401
10
Appendix
Upper thread breaks. Machine is not threaded correctly (used the
wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the
thread did not catch the needle bar threader,
etc.)
Rethread the machine correctly. 62
Knotted or tangled thread is being used. Remove any knots or tangles.
—
The selected needle is not appropriate for the
thread being used.
Select a needle that is appropriate for the type
of thread being used.
77
Upper thread tension is too tight. Adjust the thread tension. 92, 301
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the race, etc.
—
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 75
There are scratches around the opening of the
needle plate.
Replace the needle plate, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
119
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
Replace the presser foot, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
70
There are scratches on the bobbin case. Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
388
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
77
While sewing, the thread became knotted or
tangled.
Rethread upper and lower thread. 59, 62
A bobbin designed specifically for this
machine is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
59
The thread is tangled
on the wrong side of
the fabric.
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine. Be sure that the presser
foot is in the raised position when threading
the machine so that the upper thread sets
properly in the upper tension.
62
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
77
The upper thread is
too tight.
The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed. Correctly install the bobbin thread. 59
Bobbin thread
breaks.
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. 59
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. 54
There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t
rotate properly.
Replace the bobbin. 59
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc. to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the race, etc.
—
A bobbin designed specifically for this
machine is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
59
Fabric puckers. There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin
threading.
Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread it correctly.
59, 62
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool cap,
then reattach the spool cap.
62
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
77
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. Shorten the stitch length. 91
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 92, 301
Wrong presser foot. Use the correct presser foot. “STITCH SETTING
CHART”
The stitch is not sewn
correctly.
The presser foot that is used is not appropriate
for the type of stitch that you wish to sew.
Attach the presser foot that is appropriate for
the type of stitch that you wish to sew.
“STITCH SETTING
CHART”
The thread tension is incorrect. Adjust the tension of the upper thread. 92
The thread is tangled, for example, in the
bobbin case.
Remove the tangle thread. If the thread is
tangled in the bobbin case, clean the race.
388
Skipped stitches Machine is threaded incorrectly. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread it correctly.
62
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
77
Problem Cause Solution Page
TROUBLESHOOTING
402
Skipped stitches Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. 75
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. 75
Dust or lint has collected under the needle
plate.
Remove the dust or lint with the brush. 388
Thin or stretch fabrics are being sewn. Sew with one sheet of thin paper under the
fabric.
89
No stitching Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin thread correctly. 59
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
62
High-pitched sound
while sewing
Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. Remove the dust or lint. 388
Pieces of thread are caught in the race. Clean the race. 388
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
62
A bobbin designed specifically for this
machine is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
59
There are needle holes or friction scratches in
the bobbin case.
Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
388
Fabric does not feed
through the machine.
Feed dogs are set in the down position.
Press , and then turn the handwheel to
raise the feed dogs.
133
Stitches are too close together. Lengthen the stitch length setting. 91
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the correct presser foot.
“STITCH SETTING
CHART”
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
Thread is entangled. Cut the entangled thread and remove it from
the race.
—
Zigzag foot “J” is slanted on a thick seam at
the beginning of stitching.
Use the presser foot locking pin (black button
on the left side) on zigzag foot “J” to keep the
presser foot level while sewing.
88
The fabric feeds in
the opposite
direction.
The feed mechanism is damaged. Contact your authorized Brother dealer.
—
The needle contacts
the needle plate.
The needle clamp screw is loose. Firmly tighten the needle clamp screw. If the
needle is bent or blunt, replace it with a new
one.
75
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
Fabric being sewn
with the machine
cannot be removed.
Thread is tangled below the needle plate. Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below it,
and clean the race.
393
A broken needle has
fallen into the
machine.
— Turn off the machine, and then remove the
needle plate. If the needle that fell into the
machine can be seen, use tweezers to remove
it. After removing the needle, return the needle
plate to its original position.
Before turning on the machine, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you to check that it turns
smoothly. If the handwheel does not turn
smoothly or the needle that fell into the
machine cannot be removed, consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
—
The handwheel feels
sluggish when it is
turned.
Thread is tangled in the bobbin case. Remove the tangled thread from the bobbin
case. Re-install the bobbin case so it is
correctly positioned.
393
Problem Cause Solution Page
TROUBLESHOOTING
403
10
Appendix
■ After sewing
Problem Cause Solution Page
Thread tension is
incorrect.
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
62
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin. (If needle plate was
removed, reinstall needle plate and tighten
screws prior to installing bobbin case.)
59
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
77
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. Reattach the presser foot holder correctly. 71
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 92, 301
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. 54
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. 75
A bobbin designed specifically for this
machine is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
59
Character or
decorative patterns
are misaligned.
Pattern adjustment settings were set
incorrectly.
Revise the pattern adjustment settings. 176
Pattern does not turn
out.
Wrong presser foot was used. Attach the correct presser foot. “STITCH SETTING
CHART”
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics
or stretch fabrics.
Attach a stabilizer material. 175
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 92, 301
Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle
while it was being sewn.
Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands
so that the fabric is fed in a straight line.
82
The thread is tangled, for example, in the
bobbin case.
Remove the tangle thread. If the thread is
tangled in the bobbin case, clean the race.
Embroidery pattern
does not sew out
correctly.
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread
and remove it from the bobbin case, etc.
—
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. 92, 301
Fabric was not inserted into the frame
correctly (fabric was loose, etc.).
If the fabric is not stretched tight in the frame,
the pattern may turn out poorly or there may
be shrinkage of the pattern. Set the fabric into
the frame correctly.
258
Stabilizing material was not attached. Always use stabilizing material, especially with
stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, fabrics with
a coarse weave, or fabrics that often cause
pattern shrinkage. See your authorized Brother
dealer for the proper stabilizer.
256
There was an object placed near the machine,
and the carriage or embroidery frame hit the
object during sewing.
If the frame bumps something during sewing,
the pattern will turn out poorly. Do not place
anything in the area where the frame may
bump it during sewing.
273
Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with
the sewing arm, so the embroidery unit cannot
move.
Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so
that the excess fabric is away from the sewing
arm, and rotate the pattern 180 degrees.
258
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit
cannot move freely.
Place a large thick book or similar object under
the arm head to lightly lift the heavy side and
keep it level.
—
Fabric is hanging off the table. If the fabric is hanging off the table during
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not move
freely. Place the fabric so that it does not hang
off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
273
Fabric is snagged or caught on something. Stop the machine and place the fabric so that
it does not get caught or snagged.
—
Embroidery frame was removed during sewing
(for example, to reset the bobbin). The presser
foot was bumped or moved while removing or
attaching the embroidery frame, or the
embroidery unit was moved.
If the presser foot is bumped or the
embroidery unit is moved during sewing, the
pattern will not turn out. Be careful when
removing or reattaching the embroidery frame
during sewing.
280
Stabilizer is incorrectly attached, for example,
it is smaller than the embroidery frame.
Attach the stabilizer correctly. 256
TROUBLESHOOTING
404
Loops appear on the
surface of the fabric
when embroidering
The thread tension is incorrectly set. Adjust the thread tension.
301
The tension of the upper thread is incorrectly
set for the combination of the fabric, thread
and pattern being used.
Use the embroidery needle plate cover.
274
The combination of the bobbin case and
bobbin thread is incorrect.
Change the bobbin case or bobbin thread so
that the correct combination is used.
273
CAUTION
• This machine is equipped with a thread detection device. If the “Start/Stop” button is pushed before the
upper threading is done, the machine will not operate properly. Also, depending on the pattern selected,
the machine may feed the fabric even if the needle is raised. This is due to the needle bar release
mechanism. At these times, the machine will make a sound different from what is made during normal
sewing. This is not the sign of a malfunction.
• If the power is disconnected during sewing:
Turn the main power to OFF and unplug the machine.
If you restart the machine, follow the instructions for operating the machine correctly.
Problem Cause Solution Page
ERROR MESSAGES
405
10
Appendix
If the machine is not properly set and the “Start/Stop” button or the “Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch” button
is pressed, or if the operation procedure is incorrect, the machine does not start. An alarm sounds and an
error message is displayed on the LCD. If an error message displays, follow the instructions in the
message.
Below is an explanation of error messages. Refer to these when necessary (if you press or do the
operation correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears).
ERROR MESSAGES
CAUTION
• Be sure to rethread the machine. If you press the “Start/Stop” button without rethreading the machine,
the thread tension may be wrong or the needle may break and cause injury.
This message is displayed
when the motor locks due
to tangled thread or for
other reasons related to
thread delivery.
This message is displayed
when the embroidery unit is
initializing.
This message is displayed
when you try to sew with a
stitch other than a middle
needle position stitch while
the single-hole needle plate
is installed.
This message is displayed
when the needle plate is
removed with the machine
on or when the machine is
turned on and embroidery
or embroidery edit mode is
selected (see page 59).
This message is displayed
when the machine needs to
be maintained. (see page
390)
This message is displayed
when the needle plate
cover is not attached.
This message is displayed
when you try to combine
more than 71 patterns.
This message is displayed
when the buttonhole lever
is up, a buttonhole stitch is
selected, and the “Start/
Stop” button or “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch”
button is pushed.
This message is displayed
when the speed control
lever is set to control the
zigzag stitch width, and the
“Start/ Stop” button is
pushed. Use the foot
controller to operate the
machine.
This message appears
when there are not enough
colors in the custom thread
table, to display the color
scheme you have selected
to display.
In this case, set more
colors in the custom thread
table (See page 237), or
select less colors in the
color shuffling function.
(See page 241.)
ERROR MESSAGES
406
This message appears
when there are not enough
colors in the thread table,
to display the color scheme
effect you have selected.
In this case, select another
effect or the custom thread
table (300 color palette) or
less colors in the color
shuffling function. (See
page 241.)
If there are not enough
number of colors set in the
custom thread table, set
more colors in the table.
(See page 237.)
This message is displayed
when the automatic needle
threading button is pushed
while twin needle sewing is
set.
This message is displayed
when the “Start/Stop”
button is pressed before
the edge of the fabric is
detected. To detect the
edge of the fabric using the
built-in camera, press
, raise the presser
foot, and then perform the
operation again. (see page
162)
This message is displayed
when the built-in camera
cannot detect the edge of
the fabric.
If this message appeared
after sewing has reached 1
to 2 cm (about 3/8 to 3/4
inch) from the edge of the
fabric, refer to step
m in
“Edge Sewing” on
page 167.
If this message appeared
during edge sewing, the
edge of the fabric cannot
be detected by the built-in
camera. Press ,
raise the presser foot, raise
the needle if it is lowered,
and then perform the
procedure described in
“Edge Sewing” on
page 164 starting from step
f.
If this error message
appears again, sew without
using edge sewing
function.
This message appears
when you try to save more
than 100 camera image or
settings screen image files
in the USB media. In this
case, delete a file from the
USB media or use different
USB media. (See page 36
and 98)
This message appears
when or is
pressed to delete the
settings for a utility stitch.
To delete the selected
settings, press .
This message is displayed
when an unusable
embroidery card is
inserted.
This message is displayed
when the “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch”
button is pushed while the
embroidery unit is
attached.
This message is displayed
when the foot controller is
pressed while the
embroidery unit is attached
and machine is set up for
embroidering.
This message is displayed
when the patterns you are
editing take up too much
memory, or if you are
editing too many patterns
for the memory.
This message is displayed
when a key on the LCD
display is touched while the
needle is in the down
position.
This message is displayed
when there are too many
characters and the curved
character configuration is
impossible.
ERROR MESSAGES
407
10
Appendix
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery mode, and the
character pattern
combination is too large to
fit in the embroidery frame.
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery mode and the
combined character
pattern is too large for the
embroidery frame. You can
rotate the pattern 90
degrees and continue
combining characters.
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery mode and the
embroidery unit tries to
initialize while the
embroidery frame is
attached.
This message is displayed
when the machine is ready
to sew an embroidery
pattern, and the “Start/
Stop” button is pushed
while the embroidery frame
is not attached.
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery edit mode, and
you try to use an editing
function when the pattern is
not completely within the
red outline.
This message is displayed
when you try to save a
copyright protected pattern
to USB media/Computer.
According to copyright
laws, patterns that are
illegal to reproduce or edit
cannot be saved to USB
media or computer. If this
message displays, save the
pattern in the machine’s
memory.
This message is displayed
when the machine is in
embroidery mode and the
small frame is attached,
and the selected pattern
does not fit in the small
frame.
This message appears
when embroidery frame
(small) is attached while
aligning the embroidery
position using the built-in
camera.
This message is displayed
when is pressed
when changing thread
colors.
This message appears if
the machine is turned off
while sewing, then turned
on again. Press to
return the machine to the
condition (pattern position
and number of stitches)
when it was turned off.
Follow the procedure
described in “If the Thread
Breaks During Sewing” on
page 281 to align the
needle position and sew
the remainder of the
pattern.
This message is displayed
when the “Start/Stop”
button is pushed and the
machine is in embroidery
mode, but the embroidery
unit is not attached.
This message is displayed
when replacing the
embroidering bobbin
thread.
This message is displayed
when rotating a saved
combined pattern in the
Embroidery screen.
This message is displayed
when the embroidery frame
is attached.
ERROR MESSAGES
408
This message is displayed
when the machine failed to
recognize the embroidery
positioning mark.
- Confirm that the
embroidery positioning
mark is in the selected
area. If problem persists,
see page 268 to
reposition mark.
- Machine failed to
recognize printed
positioning mark. Set
“Page Scaling” to “None
(100%)”, and try printing
the embroidery
positioning mark again.
(see page 299)
This message is displayed
when the machine has
recognized the embroidery
position mark. Remove the
embroidery positioning
sticker and press
to continue. To remove the
embroidery positioning
sticker more easily, press
. (see page 268)
This message appears
when the built-in camera is
being used to align the
embroidery position, but
the embroidery positioning
sticker is too near an edge
or the pattern extends from
the embroidery frame.
Change the positioning of
the embroidery position
sticker, and then try
aligning the position again.
See page 263.
This message is displayed
when the upper thread is
broken or not threaded
correctly, and the “Start/
Stop” button or the
“Reverse/ Reinforcement
Stitch” button is pressed.
This message is displayed
when the “Presser Foot
Lifter” button is pushed
while the presser foot lever
is raised/the needle is
lowered.
This message is displayed
when the “Start/Stop”
button is pushed to sew
Utility stitches or
Character/Decorative
stitches while the foot
controller is connected.
(This message does not
appear when
embroidering).
This message is displayed
when the “Start/ Stop”
button is pushed while the
machine is in embroidery
edit mode and a pattern is
being edited.
This message is displayed
when there is no stitch or
embroidery pattern
selected and the “Start/
Stop” button or the
“Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitch” button is pressed.
This message is displayed
when the bobbin thread is
running out.
This message is displayed
when the memory is full
and the stitch or pattern
cannot be saved.
This message is displayed
when, after selecting a
pattern, ,
, or is
pressed and the pattern is
about to be deleted.
This message is displayed
when the bobbin is being
wound, and the motor
locks because the thread is
tangled, etc.
This message is displayed
when there is a possibility
that the data for the
selected pattern is
corrupted.
ERROR MESSAGES
409
10
Appendix
This message is displayed
when the buttonhole lever
is down, a stitch other than
a buttonhole is selected,
and the “Start/ Stop”
button or the “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch”
button is pushed.
This message is displayed
when the embroidery unit is
attached and the power is
turned on with the needle in
the down position.
This message is displayed
when you try to use
incompatible media.
This message is displayed
when you attempt to select
a pattern after the USB
media in which the pattern
is saved has been
changed.
This message is displayed
when an error occurs with
the USB media.
This message is displayed
when the memory is full
and a pattern must be
deleted.
This message is displayed
when a button, such as the
“Start/Stop” button, is
pushed while the presser
foot is raised.
This message is displayed
when you try to use
incompatible USB media.
For a list of compatible
USB media, visit “ http://
support.brother.com ”.
This message is displayed
when it seems that the
upper thread has not been
threaded correctly.
This message is displayed
when the file size exceeds
the data capacity of the
machine.
Confirm the file size and
format. (see page 37.)
This message appears if
the file format is
incompatible with this
machine. Check the list of
compatible file formats.
(see page 37.)
This message is displayed
when the image is deleted.
This message is displayed
when you press
in the
screen other than the Utility
Stitch, or press
in the
screen other than the Utility
Stitch or Character/
Decorative Stitch.
This message appears
when you touch the invalid
area of sensor pen. Touch
the active area. (see page
100)
This message appears
when you try to recall the
pattern stored in the
machine while specifying
the sewing end point using
the sensor function. (see
page 105)
ERROR MESSAGES
410
■ Alarm Sounds
If the operation was performed incorrectly, an alarm
sounds to indicate that an error occurred. If the
operation was performed correctly, the machine
beeps to confirm the operation.
This message appears
when you press down the
sensor pen tip before
pressing and keep
pressing for the certain
period. Move the sensor
pen away from the current
position.
This message appears
when something is wrong
with the sensor unit of the
machine. Consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
This message appears
when you touch the invalid
area of sewing with the
sensor pen. Touch the
active area. (see page 100)
This message appears
when the time/date is not
set. Set time/date. (see
page 31)
This message appears
when you try to start
sewing utility/decorative
stitch or character pattern
with the embroidery foot
with the LED pointer
attached to the machine.
Remove the embroidery
foot with the LED pointer
before entering the sewing
mode. (see page 221)
This message appears
when you try to start
embroidering with the dual
feed foot attached to the
machine. Remove the dual
feed foot before entering
the embroidery mode. (see
page 72)
This message appears
when the function to
specify the sewing end
point cannot be used with
the current stitch. Select
other stitch. (see page 105)
This message appears
when the dual feed foot
cannot be used with the
current stitch. Select other
stitch.
This message appears
when the selected function
is not available with the
sensor function. (see page
100, 268)
Memo
• To cancel the operation beep or to change
the volume, press , display screen 4/9,
and then change the setting for “Machine
Speaker Volume”. See page 34 for more
details.
SPECIFICATIONS
411
10
Appendix
* Please be aware that some specifications may change without notice.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Sewing Machine
(Box 1 of 2)
Dimensions of machine Approx. 662 mm (W) × 348 mm (H) × 321 mm (D) (approx.
26-1/16 inches (W) × 13-11/16 inches (H) × 12-5/8 inches
(D))
Dimensions of box Approx. 740 mm (W) × 620 mm (H) × 405 mm (D) (approx.
29-1/8 inches (W) × 24-13/32 inches (H) × 15-15/16 inches
(D))
Weight of machine Approx. 17 kg (approx. 37.5 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 26 kg (approx. 57.3 lb)
Sewing speed 70 to 1050 stitches per minute
Needles Home sewing machine needles (HA × 130)
Embroidery Unit
(Box 2 of 2)
Dimensions of embroidery unit Approx. 595 mm (W) × 139 mm (H) × 524 mm (D) (approx.
23-7/16 inches (W) × 5-15/32 inches (H) × 20-5/8 inches (D))
Dimensions of machine with
embroidery unit attached
Approx. 916 mm (W) × 348 mm (H) × 524 mm (D) (approx.
36-1/16 inches (W) × 13-11/16 inches (H) × 20-5/8 inches
(D))
Dimensions of box Approx. 735 mm (W) × 620 mm (H) × 190 mm (D) (approx.
28-15/16 inches (W) × 24-13/32 inches (H) × 7-15/32 inches
(D))
Weight of embroidery unit Approx. 4.6 kg (approx. 10.1 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 7.4 kg (approx. 16.3 lb)
Total Shipping Weight (Combination of all 2 boxes complete) Approx. 37 kg (approx. 81.6 lb)
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
412
You can use USB media or a computer to upgrade software for your sewing machine.
When an upgrade program is available on “ http://support.brother.com ”, please download the files
following the instructions on the website and steps below.
Upgrade Procedure Using USB
Media
a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.
b
Press .
c
Insert the USB media into the primary (top)
USB port on the machine. The media device
should only contain the upgrade file.
a Primary (top) USB port for media
b USB media
d
Press .
→ The upgrade file is loaded.
e
Remove the USB media, and turn the
machine off and on again.
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
Note
• When using USB media to upgrade the software, check that no data other than the upgrade file is
saved on the USB media being used before starting to upgrade.
• Compatible operating systems:
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8
Note
• The access lamp will begin blinking after
inserting USB media, and it will take about 5
to 6 seconds to recognize the media. (Time
will differ depending on the USB media).
Note
• If an error occurs, a red text error message
will appear. When the installation is
performed successfully, following message
will appear.
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
413
10
Appendix
Upgrade Procedure Using
Computer
a
While pressing the “Automatic Threading”
button, turn the main power to ON.
→ The following screen will appear on the LCD.
b
Press .
c
Plug the USB cable connector into the
corresponding USB ports for the computer
and for the machine.
→ “Removable Disk” will appear in “Computer (My
Computer)”.
d
Copy the upgrade file to “Removable Disk”.
→ The following message will appear.
e
When the message disappears, press .
→ The upgrade file is loaded.
f
Unplug the USB cable, and turn the
machine off and on again.
Note
• Do not connect any additional USB media
devices to your computer when using the
USB cable.
Note
• If an error occurs, a red text error message
will appear. When the installation is
performed successfully, following message
will appear.
STITCH SETTING CHART
414
The following chart shows information for each utility stitch concerning applications, stitch lengths, stitch
widths, and whether or not the twin needle mode can be used.
STITCH SETTING CHART
Note
• Quilting foot “C” is used when the straight stitch needle plate is attached to the machine. Refer to
“Using Free motion Quilting Foot “C”” on page 134.
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Straight stitch
(Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc. Reverse stitch is
sewn while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch
(Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc. Reinforcement
stitch is sewn while pressing
“Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch
(Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc. Reverse stitch is
sewn while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Straight stitch
(Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc. Reinforcement
stitch is sewn while pressing
“Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Triple stretch
stitch
General sewing for
reinforcement and decorative
topstitching
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing
and decorative applications
1.0
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching, top
stitching
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Basting stitch Basting
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
20
(3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-3/
16)
NO
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
Reverse stitch is sewn while
pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch For overcasting, mending.
Reinforcement stitch is sewn
while pressing “Reverse/
Reinforcement Stitch” button.
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch
(Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left.
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Zigzag stitch
(Left)
Start from left needle position,
zigzag sew at right.
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
STITCH SETTING CHART
415
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
3 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of light and
medium weight fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of heavyweight
fabric
5.0
(3/16)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of medium,
heavyweight and easily friable
fabrics or decorative stitching.
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforced seaming of stretch
fabric
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcing of medium stretch
fabric and heavyweight fabric,
decorative stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative stitching
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Overcasting
stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
With side cutter Straight stitch while cutting
fabrics
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 2.5
(0 - 3/32)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Zigzag stitch while cutting
fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
3.5
(1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
With side cutter Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Right)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) right seam
allowance
5.5
(7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
— —
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
416
Piecing stitch
(Left)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) left seam
allowance
1.5
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hand-look
quilting
Quilting stitch made to look
like hand quilting stitch
0.0
(0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt
pieces
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
1.5
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
stippling
Background quilting
7.0
(1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Blind hem stitch Hemming woven fabrics
0.0
(0)
+3.0 - -3.0
(+1/8 - -1/8)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Blind hem stitch
stretch
Hemming stretch fabric
0.0
(0)
+3.0 - -3.0
(+1/8 - -1/8)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket
stitch
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Satin scallop
stitch
Decorating collar of blouse,
edge of handkerchief
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.1 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Scallop stitch Decorating collar of blouse,
edge of handkerchief
7.0
(1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Patchwork join
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
4.0
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Patchwork
double overlock
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching
cord and couching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Fagoting cross
stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
417
Ladder stitch Decorative stitching
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching
1.0
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching
5.5
(7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Serpentine
stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Decorative
stippling stitch
Decorative stitching
7.0
(1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple
straight at left
1.0
(1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems, triple
straight at center
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching
zigzag
Decorative hems, top stitching
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems, lace
attaching pin stitch
3.5
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems
3.0
(1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems daisy stitch
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
418
Honeycomb
stitch
Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Honeycomb
stitch
Heirloom, decorative hems
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
4.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging
stitch
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems. Fagoting,
attaching ribbon
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking
6.0
(15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems, smocking
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Ladder stitch Decorative hems. Fagoting,
attaching ribbon
7.0
(1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
NO
Narrow rounded
buttonhole
Buttonhole on light to medium
weight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Wide round
ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra space
for larger buttons
5.5
(7/32)
3.5 - 5.5
(1/8 - 7/32)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Tapered round
ended
buttonhole
Reinforced waist tapered
buttonholes
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack in heavyweight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
419
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with bar tack
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Round double
ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes for fine, medium
to heavyweight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Narrow squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes for light to
medium weight fabrics
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Wide squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra space
for larger decorative buttons
5.5
(7/32)
3.5 - 5.5
(1/8 - 7/32)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Squared
buttonhole
Heavy-duty buttonholes with
vertical bar tacks
5.0
(3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Stretch
buttonhole
Buttonholes for stretch or
woven fabrics
6.0
(15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.0
(1/16)
0.5 - 2.0
(1/32 - 1/16)
NO
Heirloom
buttonhole
Buttonholes for heirloom and
stretch fabrics
6.0
(15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.5
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
NO
Bound
buttonhole
The first step in making bound
buttonholes
5.0
(3/16)
0.0 - 6.0
(0 - 15/64)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in heavyweight or
thick fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in medium to
heavy weight fabrics for larger
flat buttons
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical bar
tack for reinforcement in
heavyweight or thick fabrics
7.0
(1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5
(1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps
buttonhole 1
Left side of 4 step buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps
buttonhole 2
Bar tack of 4 step buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps
buttonhole 3
Right side of 4 step buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
4 steps
buttonhole 4
Bar tack of 4 step buttonhole
5.0
(7/32)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4
(1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Darning Darning of medium weight
fabric
7.0
(1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
NO
Darning Darning of heavyweight fabric
7.0
(1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
NO
Bar tack Reinforcement at opening of
pocket, etc.
2.0
(1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
0.4
(1/64)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
420
Button sewing Attaching buttons
3.5
(1/8)
2.5 - 4.5
(3/32 - 3/16)
— —NO
Eyelet For making eyelets, holes on
belts, etc.
7.0
(1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
7.0
(1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
NO
Star eyelet For making star-shaped
eyelets on holes.
— — — —NO
Diagonally left
up (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Reverse
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Diagonally right
up (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Sideways to left
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
— — — —NO
Sideways to
right (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
— — — —NO
Diagonally left
down (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Forward
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Diagonally right
down (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Sideways to left
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
— — — —NO
Sideways to
right (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
— — — —NO
Forward
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Reverse
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric and
mitering corners
— — — —NO
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
— —
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Right)
Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) right
seam allowance
5.50
(7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Piecing stitch
(Left)
Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.50
(1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
421
Hand-look
quilting
Quilting stitch made to look
like hand quilting stitch
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Basting stitch Basting
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
20
(3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-3/
16)
NO
Stem stitch Reinforced stitching, sewing
and decorative applications
1.00
(1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt
pieces
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Zigzag stitch
(Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6
(1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Zigzag stitch
(Left)
Start from left needle position,
zigzag sew at right
3.50
(1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6
(1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
2 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium weight
and stretch fabrics), tape and
elastic
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
3 steps elastic
zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
2.00
(1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Shell tuck edge Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Blanket stitch Appliqués, decorative blanket
stitch
3.50
(1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Quilting
stippling
Background quilting
7.00
(1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Tape attaching Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
5.50
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.4
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Serpentine
stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Feather stitch Fagoting, decorative stitching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Fagoting cross
stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Couching stitch Decorative stitching, attaching
cord and couching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.2
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
422
Patchwork
double overlock
stitch
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Smocking stitch Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Rick-rack stitch Decorative top stitching
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5
(3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.00
(15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0
(1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Decorative
stitch
Decorative stitching
5.50
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Heirloom, decorative hems
5.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Hemstitching Decorative hems and bridging
stitch
6.00
(15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0
(1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
6.00
(15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
3.0
(1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Overcasting
stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative stitching
4.00
(3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0
(3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Free motion
couching stitch
Free motion couching stitch
3.50
(1/8)
2.75 - 3.75
(3/32 - 1/8)
– –NO
Stitch Stitch name
Presser foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Index
423
10
Appendix
INDEX
A
Accessories
included accessories
................................................................ 18
options
.................................................................................... 22
Accessory case
............................................................................ 18
Accessory compartment
.............................................................. 18
Adjustments
screen
.................................................................................... 391
Air vent
....................................................................................... 15
Alarm sounds
............................................................................ 410
Aligning the position
.............................................. 264, 266, 286
Alphabet characters
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. 172
embroidery
............................................................................ 217
Appliqué
................................................................................... 141
quilting
.................................................................................. 132
using a zigzag stitch
............................................................... 124
using an embroidery frame pattern
........................................ 317
Array key
................................................................................... 233
Arrow keys
...................................................................... 201, 226
Automatic fabric sensor system
.................................................... 97
Automatic reinforcement stitching
............................................... 85
Automatic thread cutting key
....................................................... 93
Automatic Threading button
................................................ 17, 62
B
Back to beginning key ............................................................... 181
Ball point needle 75/107
................................................... 77, 304
Bar tacks
.................................................................................... 155
Basting
...................................................................................... 120
Blind hem stitches
..................................................................... 138
Block move key
......................................................................... 203
Bobbin
pulling up the bobbin thread
................................................... 61
runs out of thread
.................................................................. 280
setting
...................................................................................... 59
winding
................................................................................... 54
Bobbin case
cleaning
................................................................................. 388
Bobbin clip
.................................................................................. 19
Bobbin cover
....................................................................... 16, 59
Bobbin holder (switch)
................................................................ 56
Bobbin winder
............................................................................. 15
Bobbin work
.............................................................................. 371
Border key
....................................................................... 243, 246
Built-in camera
......................................................... 99, 162, 266
Button sewing
............................................................................ 156
4 hole buttons
........................................................................ 157
shank
..................................................................................... 157
Buttonhole lever
....................................................... 16, 151, 154
Buttonholes
four-step
................................................................................ 153
odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate
..... 152
one-step
................................................................................. 149
C
Calibrating the sensor pen ........................................................... 52
Character spacing key
............................................................... 235
Character/Decorative Stitches
adjustments
........................................................................... 176
combining
............................................................................. 183
editing
................................................................................... 178
key functions
......................................................................... 178
retrieving
..................................................................... 192, 193
saving
.......................................................................... 190, 191
selecting
................................................................................ 170
sewing
................................................................................... 175
stitch selection screens
........................................................... 171
Cleaning
LCD screen
............................................................................ 388
machine casing
...................................................................... 388
race
........................................................................................ 388
Clock
........................................................................................... 31
Color shuffling function
............................................................. 241
Combining Patterns
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. 183
embroidery edit
...................................................................... 252
Connecting patterns
................................................................... 321
Cord guide bobbin cover
........................................................... 125
Couching
................................................................................... 147
Crazy quilt
................................................................................. 124
Custom Thread Table
....................................................... 237, 240
Cut/Tension key
......................................................................... 301
D
Darning ..................................................................................... 154
Dart seam
.................................................................................. 121
Density key
................................................................................ 231
Dual feed foot
.............................................................................. 72
E
Echo quilting .............................................................................. 137
Eco mode
..................................................................................... 36
Edge sewing
edge sewing using the built-in camera
................................... 162
Editing
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. 178
embroidery edit
...................................................................... 224
MY CUSTOM STITCH
............................................................ 200
Elastic zigzag stitches
................................................................. 125
Elongation key
........................................................................... 180
Embroidery
adjusting the speed
................................................................ 305
automatic thread cutting function (END COLOR TRIM)
......... 304
edges or corners
..................................................................... 260
key functions
.......................................................................... 251
restarting from the beginning
.................................................. 282
resuming embroidery after turning off the power
.................... 282
ribbons or tape
....................................................................... 260
selecting patterns
................................................................... 214
small fabrics
........................................................................... 259
thread color display
............................................................... 305
thread trimming function (JUMP STITCH TRIM)
..................... 304
Embroidery appliqué
.................................................................. 276
Embroidery edit
changing the thread color
...................................................... 236
combined patterns
....................................................... 252, 255
custom thread table
...................................................... 237, 240
key functions
.......................................................................... 225
repeated patterns
.................................................................... 243
Embroidery foot “W2”
............................................................... 211
Embroidery frame display
.......................................................... 306
Embroidery frames
attaching
................................................................................ 261
inserting fabric
....................................................................... 258
removing
................................................................................ 261
types
...................................................................................... 257
using the embroidery sheet
.................................................... 259
Embroidery needle plate cover
................................................... 274
Embroidery patterns
aligning the position
............................................................... 286
checking the position
............................................................. 271
combining
.............................................................................. 252
duplicating
............................................................................. 249
editing
.................................................................................... 224
Index
424
linked characters .................................................................... 308
pattern selection screens
........................................................ 215
retrieving
...................................................................... 221, 315
saving
.......................................................................... 313, 314
selecting
................................................................................. 214
sewing
................................................................................... 273
using a frame pattern to make an appliqué
................... 317, 318
Embroidery positioning sticker
................................................... 266
Embroidery sheet
....................................................................... 259
Embroidery unit
................................................................. 17, 211
carriage
.................................................................................... 17
Enlarger key
............................................................................... 201
Error messages
........................................................................... 405
Eyelet
......................................................................................... 157
F
Fabrics
fabric/thread/needle combinations
........................................... 77
sewing heavyweight fabrics
...................................................... 87
sewing lightweight fabrics
........................................................ 89
sewing stretch fabrics
..................................................... 89, 152
Fagoting
..................................................................................... 144
Feed dogs
.......................................................................... 16, 133
Flat bed attachment
........................................................... 15, 212
Flat fell Seam
............................................................................. 122
Forward/Back key
............................................................ 281, 282
Free motion quilting
free motion echo quilting foot “E”
.......................................... 137
free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
................................... 136
free motion quilting foot “C”
.................................................. 134
Free motion sewing mode
.......................................................... 133
G
Gathering ................................................................................... 121
Grid direction key
...................................................................... 201
Guideline marker
......................................................................... 94
H
Handle ......................................................................................... 15
Handwheel
.................................................................................. 15
Heirloom
................................................................................... 146
Hemstitching
daisy stitch
............................................................................. 146
drawn work
............................................................................ 147
Home page screen
....................................................................... 32
I
Image key ..................................................... 114, 182, 202, 226
Insert key
................................................................................... 204
K
Key functions
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. 178
embroidery
............................................................................ 251
embroidery edit
...................................................................... 225
MY CUSTOM STITCH
............................................................ 200
utility stitches
......................................................................... 111
Knee lifter
............................................................................ 15, 96
L
L/R Shift ....................................................................................... 91
LCD screen
.......................................................................... 15, 32
cleaning
................................................................................. 388
light
......................................................................................... 34
Lower threading
pulling up the bobbin thread
.................................................... 61
setting the bobbin
.................................................................... 59
winding the bobbin
.................................................................. 54
M
Machine operation mode key .................................................... 392
Main power switch
............................................................... 15, 30
Mirror image key
.................................................... 113, 180, 229
MPEG-4 (MP4) videos
................................................................. 46
Multi color key
.......................................................................... 232
Multi-directional sewing
............................................................ 158
Multi-function foot controller
............................... 15, 26, 83, 84
Multi-purpose screwdriver
........................................................... 24
MY CUSTOM STITCH
designing
............................................................................... 198
entering data
......................................................................... 200
key functions
......................................................................... 200
retrieving
............................................................................... 206
saving
.................................................................................... 206
storing in your list
.................................................................. 206
My Design Center
..................................................................... 338
N
Needle
changing the needle
................................................................ 75
changing the needle position
................................................. 118
checking the needle location
................................................... 98
fabric/thread/needle combinations
........................................... 77
mode
....................................................................................... 32
twin needle
............................................................................. 65
Needle bar thread guides
..................................................... 16, 66
Needle calibration
....................................................................... 78
Needle clamp screw
.................................................................... 16
Needle mode selection key
......................................................... 65
Needle plate
................................................................................ 16
Needle position
.................................................................. 98, 118
Needle Position button
................................................................ 17
O
Operation buttons ................................................................ 15, 17
Overcasting
...................................................................... 124, 126
P
Patchwork ................................................................................. 124
Piecing
...................................................................................... 131
Pintuck
...................................................................................... 123
Pivoting
....................................................................................... 95
Point delete key
......................................................................... 202
Power cord
.................................................................................. 31
Power cord receptacle
................................................................. 15
Presser foot
attaching
................................................................................. 70
pressure
................................................................................... 97
removing
................................................................................. 70
types
...................................................................................... 414
Presser foot code
....................................................................... 250
Presser foot holder
................................................................ 16, 70
Presser foot holder screw
............................................................. 16
Presser foot lever
.................................................................. 15, 88
Presser Foot Lifter button
............................................................. 17
Presser foot/Needle exchange key
................................ 65, 70, 75
Pre-tension disk
............................................................ 15, 55, 58
Print and stitch
.......................................................................... 296
Q
Quilting ..................................................................................... 129
free motion
............................................................................ 133
with satin stitches
.................................................................. 133
R
Race .......................................................................................... 388
Reinforcement stitch
.................................................................... 85
Reinforcement Stitch button
........................................................ 85
Index
425
10
Appendix
Repeated patterns ...................................................................... 243
Retrieving
character/decorative stitch patterns
........................................ 192
computer
..................................................................... 194, 222
embroidery patterns
............................................................... 315
machine’s memory
...................................................... 192, 315
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
............................................... 206
stitch settings
......................................................................... 115
USB media
.................................................................. 193, 221
utility stitches
......................................................................... 115
Reverse Stitch button
................................................................... 85
Reverse/Reinforcement Stitch button
................................... 17, 85
Reverse/Reinforcement stitches
.................................................... 85
Rotate key
................................................................................. 227
S
Satin stitches .................................................................... 133, 181
Saving
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. 190
computer
..................................................................... 191, 314
embroidery patterns
............................................................... 313
machine’s memory
...................................................... 190, 313
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
............................................... 206
stitch settings
......................................................................... 115
USB media
.................................................................. 190, 313
utility stitches
......................................................................... 115
Scallop stitches
.......................................................................... 142
Scan
.......................................................................................... 350
Screen saver
................................................................................ 37
Sensor functions
embroidering position
............................................................ 268
guideline marker
.................................................................... 100
L/R Shift
................................................................................. 103
needle drop position
.............................................................. 102
Sensor pen
................................................................................... 50
Sensor pen holder
........................................................................ 51
Set key
....................................................................................... 201
Settings
automatic thread cutting
................................................ 93, 304
display language
...................................................................... 39
embroidery settings
.................................................................. 35
general settings
........................................................................ 34
machine setting mode key
.................................... 33, 237, 305
sewing settings
......................................................................... 33
stitch length
............................................................................. 91
stitch width
.............................................................................. 90
thread tension
................................................................ 92, 301
thread trimming
..................................................................... 304
Sewing key
................................................................................ 249
Sewing machine help key
............................................................ 42
Sewing speed controller (speed control slide)
............... 15, 17, 82
Sewing type selection key
............................................................ 44
Shelltuck stitches
....................................................................... 142
Shutoff support mode
.................................................................. 36
Side cutter
................................................................................. 127
Single/Repeat sewing key
.......................................................... 180
Single/Triple stitching key
.......................................................... 201
Size key
..................................................................................... 228
Size selection key
...................................................................... 180
Smocking stitches
...................................................................... 143
Soft cover case
............................................................................ 22
Speaker
....................................................................................... 34
Specifications
............................................................................ 411
Spool cap
.................................................................................... 15
Spool net
..................................................................................... 69
Spool pin
..................................................................................... 15
Spool stand
.......................................................................... 58, 67
Spool stand LED
........................................................................ 276
Stabilizer
................................................................................... 256
Start/Stop button
.......................................................................... 17
Starting point key
....................................................................... 308
Step stitch patterns
..................................................................... 186
Stitch setting chart
..................................................................... 414
Straight stitch foot
...................................................................... 119
Straight stitch needle plate
......................................................... 119
Straight stitches
.......................................................................... 116
Supplemental spool pin
............................................... 15, 54, 66
T
Tape attaching ........................................................................... 125
Tape or elastic attaching
............................................................ 145
Test key
........................................................................... 202, 206
Thread
fabric/thread/needle combinations
........................................... 77
thread tension
................................................................ 92, 301
Thread color display
.................................................................. 305
Thread cutter
....................................................................... 15, 83
Thread Cutter button
.................................................................... 17
Thread density key
..................................................................... 181
Thread guide
......................................................... 15, 55, 57, 66
Thread guide plate
....................................................... 15, 57, 62
Thread marks
............................................................................. 246
Thread palette key
........................................................... 236, 240
Top cover
.................................................................................... 15
Top stitching
.............................................................................. 143
Touch pen
............................................................. 201, 237, 391
holder
...................................................................................... 15
Trial key
..................................................................................... 271
Troubleshooting
......................................................................... 392
Tutorial video
.............................................................................. 45
Twin needle
................................................................................. 65
U
Uninterrupted embroidering ...................................................... 286
Upgrading
.................................................................................. 412
Upper threading
twin needle mode
.................................................................... 65
using the “Automatic Threading” button
.................................. 62
using the spool net
................................................................... 69
USB cable
................................... 48, 191, 222, 298, 314, 413
USB media
recalling
....................................................................... 193, 221
saving
.......................................................................... 190, 313
usable
.......................................................................... 189, 311
USB mouse
.......................................................................... 37, 49
USB port connector
for computer
........................................................ 15, 191, 314
for media
............................................................. 15, 190, 313
Utility stitches
key functions
.......................................................................... 111
pattern explanation key
............................................................ 47
retrieving
................................................................................ 115
saving
.................................................................................... 115
selecting
................................................................................. 110
sewing type selection key
......................................................... 44
stitch selection screens
........................................................... 112
stitch setting chart
.................................................................. 414
V
Vertical stitch alignment foot “V” ............................................... 163
W
Walking foot ................................................................................ 71
Z
Zigzag stitches ........................................................................... 124
Zipper insertion
centered
................................................................................. 159
side
........................................................................................ 160
XF9335-101
1
English
882-W20/W22
Printed in Taiwan
Please visit us at http://support.brother.com where you can get
product support and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs).
